JP6555228B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine includes a game board that defines a game area in which game balls flow down, and nails, windmills, and the like are provided on the game board in order to properly distribute the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area. These various members are arranged. In addition, the game board is provided with an opening for a game ball to be paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. The game balls launched from the game ball launching device flow down the game area while making contact with various members, and when the game balls enter the general prize opening, special electric prize winning device, operation opening, etc., a predetermined number of A game ball is paid out to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-146319 A

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the behavior of the game ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of making the behavior of a game ball suitable.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is a ball-entry unit into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Guiding means for guiding a game ball toward the ball-entrance unit;
With
The guiding means includes
Rotating means comprising a take-in means that is rotatable and capable of taking a game ball into the guiding means;
Rotation control means for conveying a game ball taken into the guiding means by rotating the rotating means;
A fall prevention means for preventing a game ball taken into the guiding means and being transported by the taking means from dropping downward, and being thrown out of the guiding means by rotation of the rotating means;
Release means for causing the game ball being conveyed in contact with the fall prevention means to be released from the guide means toward the ball entrance through the release opening of the fall prevention means ;
With
The entrance portion is provided at a position separated from the discharge means by a diameter equal to or larger than the game ball ,
The releasing means includes a direction changing means for changing a moving direction of the game ball that has reached the releasing position to a moving direction for releasing at the releasing position for releasing the game ball in the guiding means,
The direction changing means protrudes to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the game area in a manner that allows contact with the game ball guided by the rotation means,
The rotating means includes contact avoiding means for avoiding contact with the projecting direction changing means .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to make the behavior of the game ball suitable.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the periphery of the adjustment mechanism. (A) It is the front view and right view of a rotary body isolate | separated from the adjustment mechanism, (b) It is the front view and top view of the said rotary body. It is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and the game board when cutting right above the intake port in a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board. (A), (b) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to demonstrate the motion of the game ball taken in by the adjustment mechanism. (A), (b) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to demonstrate the motion of the game ball discharged | emitted from the adjustment mechanism and winning a 1st through gate. It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism showing the movement of the game ball discharged from the adjustment mechanism and coming off the first through gate. (A) It is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and the game board when cut right above the intake port in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board, and (b) in the case of being cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a 1st blade | wing part, (c) It is a cross-sectional view of a window panel and a game board at the time of cut | disconnecting immediately above an intake port in the plane perpendicular | vertical to the surface of a game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure regarding discharge | emission of the game ball which flowed down the game area | region. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. (A) It is a low-frequency winning determination value table indicating a winning determination value for public power open lottery in the low-frequency support mode, and (b) a high-frequency indicating a winning determination value for public power open lottery in the high-frequency support mode It is a winning determination value table. (A)-(c) It is a time chart which shows the timing which can generate | occur | produce a public power open winning in the pachinko machine for a comparison. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows the timing which can generate | occur | produce a public power open winning. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the open | release counter update process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure normal power control process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding information acquisition process by the side of a common execution performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure change start process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the public power open lottery process performed with main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the usual figure determination performed with the main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which makes the main side CPU input the detection result of a entrance detection sensor. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of the various apparatuses which communicate between a payout control apparatus and the said payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with payout side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of IC for management. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for correspondence. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of the 1st-15th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in the memory for correspondence. It is a flowchart which shows the output process for management performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that log | history information is stored in the memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the process for data output performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed with management side CPU. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the periphery of the adjustment mechanism in the second embodiment. (A) It is a top view of the housing which cuts and shows right above an adjustment mechanism, (b) It is a front view of a housing which expands and shows the circumference of a rotation axis. It is a front view of the rotary body isolate | separated from the adjustment mechanism. (A) It is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and the game board when cutting right above the distribution nail in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board, and (b) is discharged from the adjustment mechanism and won the first through gate. It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to explain the motion of the game ball to play, (c) a cross section of the window panel and the game board when cutting just above the distribution nail in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board It is a figure, (d) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to demonstrate a motion of the game ball which is discharged | emitted from an adjustment mechanism and remove | deviates from a 1st through gate. (A)-(d) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to demonstrate the motion of the game ball taken in and conveyed by the adjustment mechanism. (A)-(c) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to demonstrate the motion of the game ball | bowl near an inlet. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the periphery of the adjustment mechanism in the third embodiment. (A) It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the periphery of the electric nail in a permission position, (b) It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the periphery of the electric nail in a prohibition position. (A)-(c) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to demonstrate the motion of the game ball in the periphery of an adjustment mechanism. (A)-(c) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to demonstrate a mode that pinching of the game ball is canceled in the upper part of an adjustment mechanism. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the periphery of the adjustment mechanism in the fourth embodiment. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view at the time of cut | disconnecting a rotary body in the plane perpendicular | vertical to the surface of a game board. (A)-(d) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to demonstrate a motion of the game ball discharged | emitted from an adjustment mechanism and winning a 1st through gate. (A), (b) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to demonstrate the motion of the game ball which is discharged | emitted from an adjustment mechanism and remove | deviates from a 1st through gate. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the periphery of the adjustment mechanism in the fifth embodiment. (A) It is a front view of the adjustment apparatus in a closed state, (b) It is a front view of the adjustment apparatus in an open state. (A)-(d) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to demonstrate the motion of the game ball in the periphery of an adjustment mechanism. It is a front view of the game board in a 6th embodiment. (A), (b) It is the schematic which shows the structure of a 2nd operation port. (A) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the state seen from the side of a distribution winning device, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the state seen from the back side of the distribution winning device. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the circumference of the adjustment mechanism in a 7th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of the management side I / F in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of 1st-12th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in the memory for correspondence. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of management IC in 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of management side I / F. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed with main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed in management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed by management side CPU in 10th Embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the opportunity specific process performed in main side CPU in 11th Embodiment, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed in management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the opportunity specific process performed by the main side CPU in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed by the management side CPU in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed in the management side CPU in 14th Embodiment. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of a history memory in the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of MPU of the main controller in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of the main controller in 17th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for history. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter management process performed with main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path | route which transmits the detection result of each entrance detection sensor in 18th Embodiment to main side CPU and management IC.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. Have. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and may be configured such that the outer frame 11 is provided in the island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed at the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window part 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed of colorless and transparent with synthetic resin. The game area PA is defined through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a special electric prize device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a first through gate 35, a second through gate 39, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, and a universal drawing unit 37. A figure unit 38 and the like are provided. A total of four general winning ports 31 are provided, and one is provided for each other.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of symbols. The symbol display device 41 includes a display surface 41a for displaying an effect, and is arranged in an opening 24c provided in the game board 24 so that the display surface 41a is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Yes. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a center frame 57 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The center frame 57 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is reduced due to the fall of the game ball B1 does not occur. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the center frame 57 includes a roof unit 58 provided so as to define the upper edge and the left and right side edges of the opening 24c. The game board 24 includes game areas PA on both the left and right sides of the center frame 57.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A game ball is formed by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. A guide rail for guiding B1 is configured. A game ball B1 launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is a ball that feeds a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail and a game ball B1 stored in an upper plate 55a described later onto the launch rail 27a. A feeding device 27b and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball B1 supplied on the firing rail 27a toward the guide rail, are provided. When the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the game ball B1 is fired. The player can aim at the game area PA on the left side of the center frame 57 and aim at the game area PA on the right side of the center frame 57 by adjusting the amount of rotation in the rotation operation. A game ball B1 can be launched.

  As shown in FIG. 3, even when a ball enters the first through gate 35 and the second through gate 39, the payout of the game ball B1 is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls B1 are paid out. Specifically, with respect to the number of prize balls, when one game ball B1 enters the first operation port 33 or one game ball B1 enters the second operation port 34 In this case, one prize ball is paid out, and when one game ball B1 enters the general winning opening 31, ten prize balls are paid out, and the special electric prize is awarded. When one game ball B1 enters the apparatus 32, 15 prize balls are paid out.

  The number of prize balls may be arbitrary. For example, the second actuation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33, and the second actuation port 34 may be configured as the first actuation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and the game ball B1 that has not entered the various winning ports etc. is discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b and various members such as a windmill in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball B1.

  Here, the entry means that the game ball B1 passes through a predetermined opening, and the game area PA is not only discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also after passing through the opening. A mode of continuing the flow down of the game area PA without being discharged from the game is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball B1 from entering the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the first Entering the game ball B1 into the through gate 35 and the second through gate 39 is also expressed as winning.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 33 is located on the upper side. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric utility 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 34a, the game ball B1 cannot win the second operating port 34, and the winning of the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal power feature 34a is opened.

  As shown in FIG. 3, in the game area PA on the left side of the center frame 57, a first through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball B1 with respect to the second operation port. The first through gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball B1 winning the first through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has won the first through gate 35 reaches the area where the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are provided, and the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 It is possible to win any one.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the game area PA on the right side of the center frame 57, a second through gate 39 is provided on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball B1 with respect to the second operation port 34. . The second through gate 39 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball B1 that wins the second through gate 39 flows down the game area PA after winning. For this reason, the game ball B1 winning the second through gate 39 reaches the area where the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are provided, and the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 It is possible to win any one.

  Based on the winning of the through gates 35 and 39, the universal power 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, a public power open lottery, which is a lottery, is performed with a winning at the through gates 35, 39 as a trigger, and a game zone PA is provided in a lower left corner, which is an area through which the game ball B1 does not pass. The variation display of the pattern is performed in the general map display section 38a of the figure unit 38. Then, when the result of the public train opening lottery is the public train open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the general map display section 38a is terminated, the state shifts to the public train open state. In the public power open state, the general electric utility 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode in which the winning to the second operating port 34 is supported by the open state of the general utility 34a when the through gates 35 and 39 are won. In addition, the high frequency support mode in which the power utility 34a is in an open state is set in a mode that makes it easier to win the game ball B1 in the second operation port 34 than the low frequency support mode.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the low-frequency support mode in which the transition to the high-frequency support mode is not performed, the performance is performed in such a manner that the player aims at the left game area PA where the first through gate 35 is provided. Done. When the mode is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, an effect such as a mode in which the player aims at the right game area PA where the second through gate 39 is provided is performed. Details of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode will be described later.

  The general map display unit 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 38, a universal map hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls B1 have won in the through gates 35 and 39 are reserved, and the number of reserves is displayed by turning on the usual figure hold display section 38b.

  A lottery is performed with the winning of the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 as a trigger. The lottery result is clearly shown through display effects in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a. The display area of the special figure display unit 37 a is narrower than the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display part 37a, a winning change to the first working port 33 or a winning to the second working port 34 is used as a trigger, and a lottery is performed to display a variation display or a predetermined display. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, although the special figure display part 37a is comprised by the segment display by which several segment light emission parts are arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a picture displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

  In the special figure unit 37, a special figure holding display part 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display part 37a. A maximum of four game balls B1 won in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the special figure display unit 37b.

  In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  In the symbol display device 41, when a special symbol display unit 37a displays a change or predetermined display of a pattern based on a winning in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of upper, middle, and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas, and numbers “1” to “9” are attached to the symbol rows. The symbols are scrolled and displayed with the symbols arranged in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, the scroll display in all the symbol sequences is started first, and the display is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol sequence → the lower symbol sequence → the middle symbol sequence. The process ends with the symbols still displayed. For example, in the game times in which the game result is a jackpot result, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line set in advance on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

  In addition, the symbol display device 41 performs not only a display effect triggered by winning a prize to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also a display effect in the opening / closing execution mode that shifts after winning the winning combination. Is called. In addition, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33 and 34, the display is started on the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and until a predetermined result is displayed and ended, the game number is 1 Equivalent to times. Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  When the big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 33 or the winning to the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to an opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. The special electric prize winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open / close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball B1 cannot win, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball B1 can win a prize when winning the opening / closing execution mode in the lottery. It is like that. Incidentally, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that shifts when a hit result is obtained. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

  As shown in FIG. 3, an adjustment mechanism 180 that adjusts the timing at which the game ball B <b> 1 is supplied toward the first through gate 35 is provided above the first through gate 35. The adjustment mechanism 180 supplies the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 by discharging the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 below. The interval between the adjustment mechanism 180 and the first through gate 35 is an interval at which the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. . The adjustment mechanism 180 will be described below.

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view of the gaming board 24 showing the first through gate 35 and the structure above the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 4, the adjustment mechanism 180 takes in the game ball B <b> 1 at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 180 and conveys it to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, and an adjustment drive for rotating the rotary body 183 clockwise. And a housing portion 181 that houses the rotating body 183 and prevents the game ball B1 taken into the rotating body 183 by the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation from being thrown out before the discharge position.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the rotating body 183 is provided at the center of the adjustment mechanism 180. The rotating body 183 is formed by providing four recessed portions 183b to 183e that can take in the game ball B1 with respect to a substantially disk-shaped transparent resin member that is reduced in diameter toward the rear. ing. 5A is a front view and a right side view of the rotator 183, and FIG. 5B is a front view and a plan view of the rotator 183. As shown in FIG. 5A, the recessed portions 183 b to 183 e of the rotating body 183 are formed so as to be recessed from the outer edge portion of the rotating body 183 toward the axial line side. The recesses 183b to 183e are arranged in the order of the first recess 183b → the second recess 183c → the third recess 183d → the fourth recess 183e in the rotation direction so that the centers thereof exist at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. It is formed to become.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, none of the recesses 183b to 183e reach the position of the axis of the rotating body 183 and are discontinuous with each other. Each of the recesses 183b to 183e has a shape and a size that allow one whole game ball B1 to enter. In each of the recesses 183b to 183e, the inner wall in the vicinity of the outer edge of the rotating body 183 has an inclination in which the recesses 183b to 183e widen toward the outer edge, and the width of each of the recesses 183b to 183e in the vicinity of the outer edge is It is set wider than the diameter of the game ball B1.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the rotating body 183 includes a first blade portion 188, a first recess portion 183b, and a second recess portion 183c sandwiched between the fourth recess portion 183e and the first recess portion 183b. Sandwiched between the second blade portion 189 sandwiched between the second recess portion 183c and the third recess portion 183d, and the third recess portion 183d and the fourth recess portion 183e. A fourth blade portion 191.

  As shown in FIG. 4, in the adjusting mechanism 180, the accommodating portion 181 that accommodates the rotator 183 has a game ball B <b> 1 taken into the recesses 183 b to 183 e of the rotator 183 from the front surface of the game board 24 during the transfer. Is also provided with a base body 181a that prevents it from moving backward. The base body 181a includes a fixing flange 181b formed so as to protrude in the radial direction from the outer periphery of the base body 181a.

  FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the window panel 52 and the game board 24 when a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24 is cut right above the intake port 185. In order to describe the configuration of the housing portion 181, FIG. 6 shows a state where the rotating body 183 is removed. As shown in FIG. 6, a fixing recess 24 d that can accommodate the base body 181 a and the fixing flange 181 b is formed on the front surface of the game board 24. As shown in FIG. 4, the storage portion 181 is configured such that the base board 181 a and the fixing flange 181 b are stored in the fixing recess portion 24 d (FIG. 6), and the fixing flange 181 b is screwed to play the game board 24. It is fixed to. The base body 181 a is located behind the rotating body 183, and the front surface of the base body 181 a exists on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 24.

  As shown in FIG. 4, an accommodation space for accommodating the rotating body 183 is formed in front of the base body 181a, and the rotating body 183 is accommodated in the accommodation space. An adjustment drive unit 184 is disposed behind the rotating body 183. The adjustment drive unit 184 includes an output shaft 184 a extending from the front surface of the adjustment drive unit 184 to the front in a manner orthogonal to the front surface of the game board 24. The rotating body 183 is coupled to the output shaft 184a so that the axis of the rotating body 183 is positioned on the same straight line as the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184.

  The adjustment drive unit 184 is connected to an output port of an MPU 62 (see FIG. 12) described later. When the drive signal is supplied and the adjustment drive unit 184 enters the drive state, the rotating body 183 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 90 ° in 1 sec. A stepping motor is used as the adjustment drive unit 184, and specifically, 1-2 phase excitation drive that alternately performs one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation is employed. The phase excitation method is not limited to this, and other phase excitation methods may be employed. The adjustment drive unit 184 has a configuration in which the output shaft rotates once by transmitting 500 excitation signals from the main controller 60. An angle change based on one pulse of the excitation signal, that is, an angle change per step is as follows. 0.72 °.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the accommodating part 181 is provided with the standing walls 181c and 181d for dividing the accommodating space. The accommodation space is partitioned by the standing walls 181c and 181d so as to be slightly larger than the rotating body 183. The distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the upright walls 181c and 181d of the housing portion 181 is longer than the distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blades 188 to 191, and the two distances The difference is shorter than the radius of the game ball B1. For this reason, the possibility that the game ball B1 enters between the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191 and the standing walls 181c and 181d is excluded.

  A plurality of standing walls 181c and 181d are formed in a manner protruding forward from the front surface of the base body 181a, and are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction of the base body 181a. Among the plurality of standing walls 181c and 181d, the left standing wall 181c existing on the left side and the right standing wall 181d existing on the right side are separated from each other in the lateral direction, so An intake 185 is present.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the shape and size of the intake port 185 are such that one game ball B1 can pass through the intake port 185, and a plurality of game balls B1 can be simultaneously loaded. It is set so that it cannot pass through the mouth 185. For this reason, the adjustment mechanism 180 can take in the game balls B1 from the take-in port 185 one by one.

  The left standing wall 181c prevents the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper left of the intake port 185 from entering the adjustment mechanism 180. For this reason, the game ball B1 is taken into the recesses 183b to 183e that open toward the left, and the game ball B1 is discharged after being transported for a long time in the order of the upper part → right part → lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180. Never happen. Further, the right standing wall 181d is moved outwardly of the adjusting mechanism 180 by the centrifugal force of the rotating body 183 before the game ball B1 taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 is conveyed to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 and the discharge timing is reached. To be thrown out.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the left standing wall 181c and the right standing wall 181d are spaced apart from each other in the lateral direction, so that the housing portion 181 is opened downward. For this reason, the game ball B1 taken into one of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 and transported to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 is discharged toward the first through gate 35 positioned below.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the housing portion 181 includes a discharge protrusion 181 e for discharging the game ball B <b> 1 taken into the recesses 183 b to 183 e of the rotating body 183 at a predetermined discharge position. The discharge protrusion 181e is provided near the lower part of the center of the base body 181a. As shown in FIG. 6, the discharge protrusion 181e protrudes forward from the front surface of the base body 181a to the middle position of the game area PA so that the protrusion dimension is 9 mm.

  As already described, the longitudinal dimension of the game area PA (FIG. 3) sandwiched between the front surface of the game board 24 and the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1) is 18 mm, and the game ball B1 The diameter is 11 mm. Therefore, the discharge protrusion 181e includes a game ball B1 located on the back side (game board 24 side) of the game area PA, a game ball B1 located on the front side (window panel 52 side) of the game area PA, It has a length dimension in the front-rear direction that can be in contact with both. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge protrusion 181e is formed to extend downward from the vicinity of the center of the base body 181a.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the lower end of the discharge projecting portion 181e is from the center of the rotating body 183 to the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191 (FIG. 5 (a)). Shorter than the distance. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, the first blade portion 188 and the third blade portion 190 of the rotating body 183 are provided with a collision avoidance groove 192 for avoiding a collision with the discharge protrusion 181e. In addition, as shown in FIG. 5B, the second blade portion 189 and the fourth blade portion 191 are also provided with a collision avoiding groove 192 for avoiding a collision with the discharge projecting portion 181e.

  The collision avoidance groove 192 is provided larger than the protruding dimension of the discharge protrusion 181e, and does not contact the rotating body 183 regardless of the rotation state of the discharge protrusion 181e. For this reason, the discharge protrusion 181e does not hinder the rotation of the rotating body 183.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the discharge protrusion 181 e includes a discharge right side 181 g inclined leftward as a right side. The discharge right side surface 181g contacts the game ball B1 existing in the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 at the discharge position of the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180. The game ball B1 is transported to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 by the rotation of the rotating body 183, and then discharged toward the lower first through gate 35 when triggered by the contact with the discharge right side surface 181g.

  When the game ball B1 is discharged directly downward from the adjustment mechanism 180, the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 positioned below without colliding with an obstacle on the way. As already described, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge position reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance of about 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. Since the distance from the discharge position to the first through gate 35 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1, depending on the discharge direction and discharge speed of the game ball B1 at the discharge position, the discharged game ball B1 may be removed from the first through gate 35. There is a possibility of detachment. The discharge position of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 180 is fixed by the discharge protrusion 181e, and the distance from the discharge position to the first through gate 35 is short. Therefore, when the discharged game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35, the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 until the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35. The time falls within a predetermined range.

  Since the discharge timing of the game ball B1 occurs in the adjustment mechanism 180 at a cycle of 1 sec, winning of the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 also occurs at a cycle of approximately 1 sec. Details of the flow of discharging the game ball B1 from the adjustment mechanism 180 will be described later.

  The rotating body 183 rotates clockwise in a state where the game ball B1 taken in from the take-in port 185 exists in the recesses 183b to 183e, so that the game ball B1 faces the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180. Transport.

  The adjustment mechanism 180 can take in the game ball B1 flowing down from above when any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is open upward. Since the inner wall of the recesses 183b to 183e in the vicinity of the outer edge of the rotating body 183 has a shape that becomes wider toward the outer edge, the adjusting mechanism 180 can take in the game ball B1 at the inlet 185. Can be extended. Thereby, the number of game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 can be increased, and the number of game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 can be increased.

  In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the rotator 183 is provided with a plurality of recesses 183b to 183e, the rotation speed of the rotator 183 required for discharging the game ball B1 from the adjusting mechanism 180 at a cycle of 1 sec is reduced. Can do. In this way, by slowly rotating the rotating body 183, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball B1 flowing down to the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is taken into the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183.

  Here, the configuration around the adjustment mechanism 180 in the game board 24 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, a plurality of nails 24 b are arranged above the intake port 185 in order to collect the game balls B <b> 1 flowing down the game area PA upstream of the intake port 185 toward the intake port 185. It is arranged. In the upper left area of the intake port 185, a plurality of nails 24b for arranging the game ball B1 toward the intake port 185 by changing the course of the game ball B1 flowing down the area to the right are arranged. In the upper right area of the intake port 185, a plurality of nails 24b for arranging the game ball B1 toward the intake port 185 by changing the course of the game ball B1 flowing down the area to the left are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the plurality of nails 24b arranged in the vicinity of the upper portion of the intake port 185 have a distance from the nail 24b to the left standing wall 181c and a distance from the nail 24b to the right standing wall 181d. It is provided to be longer than the diameter of the game ball B1 by one or more times. Further, on the left side and the right side of the adjustment mechanism 180, spaces for allowing the game ball B1 that has flowed down toward the intake port 185 and has not been taken in the intake port 185 to escape downstream are provided. The nail 24b is not arranged in the space. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flowed near the intake port 185 and has not been taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 is adjusted between the nail 24b and the left standing wall 181c or between the nail 24b and the right standing wall 181d. It can be discharged into the left and right spaces of the mechanism 180. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from staying around the intake port 185.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the adjustment mechanism 180 will be described. First, a configuration for taking in the game ball B1 will be described.

  As described above, the diameter of the game ball B1 is 11 mm, and the length dimension in the front-rear direction of the game area PA (FIG. 3) is 18 mm, which is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. As described above, the game area PA has a gap that allows the game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA to move in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 are inclined toward the axial center toward the front. For this reason, when the dents 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 are in a rotational state in which the dents 183b to 183e are opened upward, they are inclined downward and forward. Become. For example, as shown in FIG. 4, in the state where the first dent portion 183b is opened upward, the first dent portion 183b is inclined downward toward the front.

  The game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from the take-in port 185 is accommodated in any of the recesses 183b to 183e opened upward at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 180. As described above, the recessed portions 183b to 183e opened upward at the upper portion of the adjustment mechanism 180 are inclined downward toward the front. Therefore, while the game ball B1 is conveyed toward the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 by the rotation of the rotating body 183, the game ball B1 is positioned on the front side (the window panel 52 side) in the game area PA having a thickness in the front-rear direction. To do.

  Next, the timing when the adjusting mechanism 180 takes in the game ball B1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the intake port 185 is opened upward. When the state in which any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is positioned below the intake port 185 is set to the acquisition-permitted state, the intake port 185 causes the inside of the adjustment mechanism 180 to be in the intake-permitted state. The game ball B1 that has entered can be accommodated in the recesses 183b to 183e.

  On the other hand, when the rotating body 183 rotates from the state of FIG. 4 and the state in which any of the blade portions 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 is positioned below the intake port 185 is set to the intake prohibited state, In the prohibited state, the game ball B1 attempting to enter the inside of the adjustment mechanism 180 from the intake port 185 collides with the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191. In this case, the game ball B1 is not taken into the adjustment mechanism 180.

  At the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180, both states of a take-in permitted state in which the game ball B <b> 1 can be taken in and a take-in prohibited state in which the game ball B <b> 1 cannot be taken in as the rotating body 183 rotates. Repeated alternately.

  First, the case where the intake port 185 is in the acquisition permission state will be described. 7 (a) and 7 (b) are front views of the game board 24 showing the vicinity of the adjusting mechanism 180 in an enlarged manner. The rotating body 183 in FIG. 7 (a) is in a rotating state in which the first recess 183b is located on the upper side, and the rotating body 183 in FIG. 7 (b) is the same as the rotating body 183 in FIG. 7 (a). The rotation state is 90 ° clockwise.

  The game ball B1 that has entered the take-in opening 185 in the take-in permitted state is taken into the recesses 183b to 183e located above. For example, as shown in FIG. 7A, the game ball B1 that has entered the intake port 185 in a state where the first recess 183b is located at the top is taken into the first recess 183b.

  The game ball B1 taken into any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is conveyed toward the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 as the rotating body 183 rotates. At this time, the right standing wall 181d prevents the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from being released to the outside of the adjustment mechanism 180 before reaching the discharge timing.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 7A, the game ball B1 taken into the first dent portion 183b is first forced forward from the first blade portion 188 in the rotational direction (right direction in FIG. 7A). Will be added. Next, the game ball B <b> 1 about to fall due to its own weight is supported by the second blade portion 189.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), a drag force is applied from the right standing wall 181d to the game ball B1 that is about to fall to the lower right by its own weight and the force applied from the second blade portion 189. The game ball B1 is prevented from falling to the lower right. In this state, when the rotating body 183 rotates, the game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is transported toward the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180.

  The game ball B1 taken into one of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 and transported to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is connected to the discharge right side 181g (FIG. 4) of the discharge protrusion 181e (FIG. 4). By contact, it is discharged in a certain direction.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 5B, the side surface of the first blade portion 188 positioned on the front side in the rotational direction is defined as the first front surface 188b, and the second side positioned on the front side in the rotational direction. Let the side surface of the blade | wing part 189 be the 2nd front surface 189b. In addition, the side surface of the third blade portion 190 positioned on the front side in the rotational direction is defined as a third front surface 190b, and the side surface of the fourth blade portion 191 positioned on the front side in the rotational direction is defined as the fourth front surface 191b. And The front surfaces 188 b to 191 b of the blade portions 188 to 191 are surfaces extending in the radial direction of the rotating body 183.

  When the game ball B1 taken in any of the recesses 183b to 183e (FIG. 5B) in the rotating body 183 comes into contact with the right side surface 181g for discharge and the discharge timing is reached, the game ball B1 is the game ball. In the recesses 183b to 183e where B1 is present, the rear front surfaces 188b to 191b and the discharge right side surface 181g are in contact with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the first recess 183b, the second recess 183c, and the third recess 183d have the same shape and size. For this reason, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the second recess 183c and transported to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, and the game ball B1 taken into the third recess 183d and transported to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 The discharge mode is the same as the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the first recess 183b and transported to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180.

  On the other hand, the fourth recess 183e has the same shape as the first recess 183b, the second recess 183c, and the third recess 183d, and is slightly smaller than the three recesses 183b to 183d. Have a size. Therefore, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the fourth recess 183e and transported to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 is taken into the first recess 183b to the third recess 183d to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180. It may be different from the discharge mode of the transported game ball B1. When the discharge mode of the game ball B1 discharged from all the recesses 183b to 183e is the same, the movement of the game ball B1 after discharge becomes monotonous. On the other hand, by changing the discharge mode of the game ball B1 discharged from the fourth recess 183e, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the player's interest in the movement of the game ball B1 after discharge.

  First, the discharge state of the game ball B1 taken into one of the first dent portion 183b to the third dent portion 183d and transported to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 will be described by exemplifying the case of the first dent portion 183b.

  FIGS. 8A and 8B are front views of the game board 24 showing the vicinity of the adjusting mechanism 180 in an enlarged manner. FIG. 8A shows a state immediately before the game ball B1 taken into the first dent 183b reaches the discharge timing, and FIG. 8B shows the game ball B1 reached the discharge timing. The state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, immediately before the discharge timing comes, the contact state between the game ball B1 taken into the first recess 183b and the right standing wall 181d is eliminated. Thereby, the game ball B1 that has lost its support is in a state where it can fall toward the lower right side. However, since the rotating body 183 rotates at an angular velocity of 90 ° within 1 sec, the game ball B1 is pushed in the rotating direction (left direction in FIG. 8) from the first blade portion 188 and rotated in the rotating direction (left direction in FIG. 8). Continue to move on.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, at the discharge timing, the game ball B1 is in contact with the discharge right side surface 181g and the first front surface 188b. The distance between the two surfaces 181g and 188b sandwiching the game ball B1 gradually increases from the upper side to the lower side.

  When the rotation of the rotating body 183 progresses, the region having a width larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 in the region sandwiched between the two surfaces 181g and 188b gradually disappears from the upper side. At this time, the force applied to the game ball B1 from the discharge right side surface 181g and the force applied to the game ball B1 from the first front surface 188b both have components that push the game ball B1 downward. . For this reason, the game ball B <b> 1 taken into the first dent 183 b is pushed downward as the rotating body 183 rotates. Then, as shown in FIG. 8B, the game ball B1 is discharged downward from the first recess 183b and wins the first through gate 35 with a high probability.

  At the discharge timing shown in FIG. 8B, with respect to the game ball B1 originally falling downward due to its own weight, the discharge right side surface 181g and the first front surface 188b are also directed downward in the same manner. Apply the force to drop. At this time, the leftward movement of the game ball B1 is restricted by the discharge right side 181g. For this reason, the discharge direction of the game ball B1 is limited to one direction, and the probability of winning the first through gate 35 is increased.

  As already described, in the outer edge portion of the rotating body 183, the width of the recesses 183b to 183e is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, immediately before the discharge timing, the position of the game ball B1 in the recesses 183b to 183e is not the same every time. The discharge direction of the game ball B1 differs depending on the position immediately before the discharge timing of the game ball B1 in the recesses 183b to 183e.

  At the design stage, most of the game balls B1 taken into the first recess 183b, the game balls B1 taken into the second recess 183c, and the game balls B1 taken into the third recess 183d are first through. The position of the discharge projection 181e and the inclination of the discharge right side 181g are adjusted so that the gate 35 is won. However, as already described, the distance between the discharge position in the adjustment mechanism 180 and the first through gate 35 is set to a distance approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, when the game ball B1 discharged from the first recess 183b is caught by the first front surface 188b and pushed leftward, the game ball B1 discharged from the second recess 183c is applied to the second front surface 189b. When it is caught and pushed to the left, and when the game ball B1 ejected from the third recess 183d is caught by the third front surface 190b and pushed to the left, the game ball B1 after ejection is the first through. The gate 35 may come off to the left.

  Here, a discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the fourth recess 183e and conveyed to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 will be described. FIG. 9 is an enlarged front view of the game board 24 showing the adjustment mechanism 180 in order to explain the case where the game ball B1 discharged from the fourth recess 183e is detached from the first through gate 35.

  As already described, the fourth recess 183e is formed slightly smaller than the first recess 183b, the second recess 183c, and the third recess 183d. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 9, the game ball B1 discharged from the fourth recess 183e is easily pushed to the left by being caught by the fourth front surface 191b, and easily released to the left of the first through gate 35. .

  At the design stage, the winning probability to the first through gate 35 of the game ball B1 discharged from the fourth recess 183e is to the first through gate 35 of the game ball B1 discharged from the other three recesses 183b to 183d. The position of the discharge protrusion 181e and the inclination of the discharge right side 181g are adjusted so as to be lower than the winning probability.

  By adopting a configuration in which a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 is detached from the first through gate 35, the player's interest is avoided from being concentrated only on the game ball B1 taken in by the adjustment mechanism 180. The person is also interested in discharging the game ball B1 in the adjusting mechanism 180.

  As already described, the discharge protrusion 181e is located below the center of the rotating body 183. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 8B, the center of the game ball B1 in contact with the discharge protrusion 181e is to the right of the center of the rotating body 183 in the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180. positioned. The game ball B1 taken into the rotating body 183 at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is discharged in contact with the discharging protrusion 181e at a timing earlier than the 180 ° rotation around the center of the rotating body 183.

  The game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 180 is discharged before rotating around the center of the rotating body 183 by 180 ° or more and starting to rise, so that the game ball at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 is discharged. B1 can be prevented from rising. In addition, by setting a short time from when the game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 until it is discharged, the time required for a series of flows of taking in, transporting, and discharging the game ball B1 by the adjustment mechanism 180 is shortened. Thus, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the player's interest will shift to another part of the series of flows.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, when the game ball B1 is in contact with both the discharge protrusion 181e and the rotating body 183 at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, the left side of the game ball B1 is in contact. The region sandwiched between the front right surfaces 188b to 191b where the right side 181g for discharge and the right side of the game ball B1 are in contact has a shape that gradually becomes wider from the upper part to the lower part. Then, as the clockwise rotation of the rotating body 183 proceeds, the width of the region sandwiched between the discharge right side surface 181g and the front surfaces 188b to 191b is reduced overall. For this reason, in a region sandwiched between the discharge right side surface 181g and the front surfaces 188b to 191b, a portion having a width in which the game ball B1 can exist is limited to the lower portion.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the discharge right side surface 181g is inclined leftward toward the lower side. Therefore, when a leftward force is applied from the rotating rotator 183 to the game ball B1 in contact with the discharge right side 181g, the game ball B1 follows the inclination of the discharge right side 181g. Move to the left and move downward. In the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180, the game ball B1 that is in contact with both the discharge protrusion 181e and the rotating body 183 is pushed downward and discharged as the rotating body 183 rotates. The discharge right side surface 181g is inclined leftward downward, thereby preventing the game ball B1 from rising and stopping without being discharged at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180.

  Next, a configuration in which the game ball B1 that has not been taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 in an attempt to enter the take-in port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180 is released to the rear of the game board 24 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, an escape passage 172 is provided behind the game board 24 as a passage for allowing the game ball B <b> 1 that has not been taken in at the take-in port 185 to escape. A passage entrance 171, which is the entrance of the escape passage 172, is provided on the front surface of the game board 24. The passage inlet 171 is located behind the intake port 185. By letting the game balls B1 that have not been taken in at the take-in port 185 escape to the passage entrance 171, it is possible to prevent the game balls B1 that have not been taken in from stopping around the take-in port 185.

  First, the game ball B1 that has flowed down to the take-in port 185 in the take-in prohibited state and was not taken into the take-in port 185 will be described.

  FIG. 10A is a cross-sectional view of the window panel 52 and the game board 24 when a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24 is cut right above the intake port 185, and FIG. 10B is a game board. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st blade | wing part 188 at the time of cut | disconnecting in a plane perpendicular | vertical to the front surface of 24. 10A and 10B, the rotating body 183 is in a rotating state in which the first blade portion 188 is positioned above.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, when the game ball B1 flows down to the intake port 185 in the intake prohibition state, the game ball B1 is one of the rotating bodies 183 positioned below the intake port 185. It contacts the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a (FIG. 5B) of the blade portions 188 to 191.

  As shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the peripheral surfaces 188 a to 191 a of the blade portions 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 have an inclination that becomes the axial center toward the rear. For this reason, as shown to Fig.5 (a), in the state which the 1st blade | wing part 188 faces upwards, the surrounding surface 188a of the said 1st blade | wing part 188 inclines below toward back. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 10A, the game ball B1 that is in contact with the peripheral surface 188a of the first blade portion 188 is guided backward.

  In the take-in prohibition state in which the second blade portion 189 faces upward, the peripheral surface 189a of the second blade portion 189 is inclined downward and the third blade portion 190 moves upward. In the capture prohibition state that faces, the peripheral surface 190a of the third blade portion 190 is inclined downward toward the rear. Moreover, in the taking-in prohibition state in which the fourth blade portion 191 faces upward, the peripheral surface 191a of the fourth blade portion 191 is inclined downward toward the rear.

  Although not shown in the drawing, it is in contact with any one of the peripheral surface 189a of the second blade portion 189, the peripheral surface 190a of the third blade portion 190, and the peripheral surface 191a of the fourth blade portion 191 that is facing upward in the intake prohibition state. The game ball B1 is guided rearward in the same manner as the game ball B1 in contact with the peripheral surface 188a of the first blade portion 188 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the passage entrance 171 is an opening provided on the front surface of the game board 24, and is located behind the intake port 185. The passage entrance 171 is formed from the left end of the intake port 185 to the right end of the intake port 185 on the front surface of the game board 24.

  The upper end of the passage inlet 171 is higher than the upper end of the game ball B1 that contacts the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blades 188 to 191 in a state where any one of the blades 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 faces upward. It is set higher by about half of the game balls B1. For this reason, the game ball B1 that flows down from the upper side of the game area PA and collides with the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191 that are inclined downward toward the rear and bounces back obliquely to the passage entrance 171. You can enter.

  On the other hand, the area above the passage entrance 171 is taken into the intake 185 so that the game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA does not enter the passage entrance 171 before reaching the intake 185. It is set to the minimum area that makes it possible to prevent the remaining game ball B1 from stopping and staying.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the lower left end of the passage inlet 171 is lower than the upper end of the back surface of the blades 188 to 191 when any of the blades 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 faces upward. Is located. The lower end on the right side of the passage inlet 171 is positioned below the lower end on the left side. Details of the lower end on the right side of the passage inlet 171 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the upper portion of the base body 181 a in the accommodating portion 181 is guided to the passage inlet 171 by the peripheral surfaces 188 a to 191 a (FIG. 5A) of any blade portion 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183. A passage recess 181f is formed so as not to obstruct the movement of the game ball B1.

  The passage recess 181f is formed from the left end to the right end of the passage inlet 171. On the left side of the passage recess 181f, the upper end of the base body 181a is below the upper end of the back surface of the blades 188 to 191 when any of the blades 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 faces upward. It is formed to be located.

  On the left side of the passage recess 181f, the upper end of the base body 181a is located at the same position as the lower end of the passage inlet 171 or above the lower end of the passage inlet 171. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), the game ball B1 that has come into contact with the blades 188 to 191 in an attempt to enter the intake port 185 in the intake prohibited state is the peripheral surface 188a of the blades 188 to 191. To 191a, the base body 181a of the accommodating portion 181 enters the passage entrance 171 without being obstructed by the course.

  As shown in FIG. 4, an escape passage 172 is formed in the front surface of the game board 24 as a recessed portion that is recessed rearward. The escape passage 172 is formed as a recess having a depth dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction and a width dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 in the lateral direction. Yes. For this reason, the escape passage 172 has a passage section that allows the game balls B1 to pass therethrough in one row.

  The upstream side of the escape passage 172 is formed from the passage inlet 171 toward the lower left, and the downstream side of the escape passage 172 is formed vertically downward. The escape passage 172 guides the game ball B1 entering from the passage entrance 171 to the lower left of the first through gate 35.

  On the front surface of the game board 24, a step is provided at the edge of the recess formed as the escape passage 172. The escape passage 172 is covered from the front by a transparent acrylic plate 172a formed in the same shape as a portion that does not overlap the base body 181a of the housing portion 181 in the outer shape when the escape passage 172 is viewed from the front. The acrylic plate 172a is fixed to a step portion formed at the edge of the escape passage 172 by an adhesive.

  The step formed at the edge of the escape passage 172 has the same depth as the thickness of the acrylic plate 172a in the front-rear direction, and the front surface of the acrylic plate 172a is located on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 24. ing. The escape passage 172 is closed by the acrylic plate 172a and the base body 181a of the housing portion 181, and the place where the game ball B1 can enter and exit is limited to the passage inlet 171 and the passage outlet 173.

  Since the acrylic plate 172a and the adjustment mechanism 180 fixed in front of the escape passage 172 are transparent, the movement of the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 can be visually recognized from the outside. If the movement of the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 cannot be grasped from the outside, the player cannot follow the moving process of the game ball B1 after the game ball B1 enters the passage entrance 171, and the game ball The flow of B1 is interrupted on the way. On the other hand, by making the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 visible from the outside, the flow of the game ball B1 that can be grasped by the player can be kept continuous.

  As shown in FIG. 4, in the game board 24, a passage outlet 173 that is an outlet of the escape passage 172 is provided at the lower left of the first through gate 35. The passage outlet 173 is formed in the front surface of the game board 24 as an opening directed forward. The passage outlet 173 has a shape and size that allows the game balls B1 guided by the escape passage 172 to be discharged one by one toward the front.

  As shown in FIG. 4, an exit for preventing the game ball B <b> 1 discharged from the passage exit 173 from colliding with the game ball B <b> 1 flowing forward from the front of the game board 24 is located near the upper side of the passage exit 173. A roof 174 is provided. The exit roof 174 is provided as a protruding portion that protrudes from the front surface of the game board 24 toward the window panel 52 (FIG. 1), and exists from the front surface of the game board 24 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52. ing. Since the upper surface of the exit roof 174 is inclined downward toward the right, the game ball B1 flowing down from above and contacting the exit roof 174 does not collide with the game ball B1 discharged from the passage exit 173. Guided to the right in a manner.

  The game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 and discharged from the passage outlet 173 forward of the front surface of the game board 24 flows down the game area PA. As shown in FIG. 3, the passage outlet 173 is located upstream of the first working port 33 and the second working port 34. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the passage outlet 173 reaches the area where the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are provided, and any of the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 is reached. It is possible to win a crab.

  As already described, the game ball B1 that has won the first through gate 35 can also flow down the game area PA and win either the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34. The game ball B1 guided to the first through gate 35 by the adjustment mechanism 180 and the game ball B1 guided to the escape passage 172 by the adjustment mechanism 180 and discharged from the passage outlet 173 are both the first operation port 33 and the second operation port. It is possible to flow down to the area where 34 is provided. For this reason, by providing the adjustment mechanism 180, the game ball B1 reaching the area where the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are provided does not decrease.

  Returning to the description of the taking-in of the game ball B1 at the take-in port 185, as shown in FIG. 4, in the transition process from the take-in permitted state to the take-in prohibited state, the distance between the blades 188 to 191 and the right standing wall 181d. When the game ball B1 flows down to the intake port 185 at a timing when the state changes from a state wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 to a narrow state, the game ball B1 moves to the blades 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 and the right standing wall 181d. It may be caught. Below, let the state which has changed from the acquisition permission state to the acquisition prohibition state be an intermediate state. Moreover, it is a surface which prescribes | regulates the right end of the intake port 185, and let the end surface located in the upper part of the right standing wall 181d which pinches | interposes the game ball B1 with the blade | wing parts 188-191 in the said intermediate state be the standing wall side end surface 182. .

  Here, a configuration for allowing the game ball B1 sandwiched between the blade portions 188 to 191 and the standing wall side end surface 182 in the intermediate intake port 185 to escape to the escape passage 172 will be described. First, the inclination of the front surfaces 188b to 191b, which are the side surfaces of the blade portions 188 to 191 and located on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating body 183, will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG.5 (b), the front surfaces 188b-191b of each blade | wing part 188-191 of the rotary body 183 incline toward the back of the rotation direction toward back. For this reason, in a state where the blade portions 188 to 191 face upward, the front surfaces 188b to 191b of the blade portions 188 to 191 are inclined leftward toward the rear.

  Regardless of the rotating state of the rotating body 183, the front surfaces 188b to 191b of the blade portions 188 to 191 located above are inclined leftward toward the rear. Therefore, at the intake port 185 in the intermediate state, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the second front surface 189b of the second blade portion 189 and the end wall-side end surface 182 and the third front surface 190b of the third blade portion 190 are raised. The game ball B1 sandwiched between the wall-side end surface 182 and the game ball B1 sandwiched between the fourth front surface 191b of the fourth blade portion 191 and the standing wall-side end surface 182 include the first front surface 188b of the first blade portion 188 and the first front surface 188b. It moves in the same direction as the game ball B1 sandwiched between the standing wall side end surface 182. Hereinafter, the movement of the game ball B1 sandwiched between the intake port 185 in the intermediate state will be described using the game ball B1 sandwiched between the first front surface 188b and the standing wall side end surface 182 as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the first front surface 188b of the first blade portion 188 facing upward is inclined leftward toward the rear. FIG. 10C is a cross-sectional view of the window panel 52 and the game board 24 in a case where a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24 is cut right above the intake port 185. As shown in FIG. 10C, the standing wall side end face 182 is inclined rightward toward the rear. Therefore, when the game ball B1 flows down to the intermediate intake 185 and is sandwiched between the first front surface 188b and the standing wall side end surface 182, the two surfaces 182 and 188b sandwiching the game ball B1 The relation of “C” is wider on the rear side (game board 24 side) than on the front side (window panel 52 side).

  When the rotating body 183 rotates clockwise while the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the two surfaces 182 and 188b, the distance between the two surfaces 182 and 188b gradually decreases from the front side. At this time, the force applied to the game ball B1 from the first front surface 188b and the force applied to the game ball B1 from the standing wall side end surface 182 are both components that move the game ball B1 rearward. have. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 10C, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the two surfaces 182 and 188b is a passage provided behind the intake 185 when the rotating body 183 rotates. It is pushed out toward the inlet 171. The pushed game ball B1 enters the escape passage 172 from the passage entrance 171 and is guided to the passage exit 173.

  As already described with reference to FIG. 5B, the front surfaces 188 b to 191 b of the blade portions 188 to 191 are surfaces extending in the radial direction of the rotating body 183. For this reason, when the game ball B1 comes into contact with both the front surfaces 188b to 191b and the right standing wall 181d (FIG. 10C) at the intake port 185, the game ball The front surfaces 188b to 191b that are in contact with B1 are inclined leftward downward. For this reason, a downward component is included in the force applied to the game ball B1 from the front surfaces 188b to 191b when the rotating body 183 rotates clockwise. This suppresses the game ball B1 from moving upward when the game ball B1 is pushed out toward the passage entrance 171.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (c), the game ball B1 sandwiched by using the inclination of the front surfaces 188b to 191b and the standing wall side end surface 182 and the rotation of the rotating body 183 is pushed out to the passage inlet 171. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the state in which the game ball B1 is sandwiched while avoiding the game ball B1 from stopping or rising.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the right side of the passage inlet 171 and the right side of the passage dent portion 181f include the game ball B1 sandwiched between the blades 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 and the right standing wall 181d in the intermediate state. 171 is formed so as to be able to enter the ball.

  The game ball B1 sandwiched between the blades 188 to 191 and the right standing wall 181d is lower than the game ball B1 that is in contact with the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of any of the blades 188 to 191 when the take-in is prohibited. Located in. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 4, the lower end on the right side of the passage inlet 171 is located below the lower end on the left side of the passage inlet 171, and the upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the recess 181f for passage is Further, it is located below the upper end of the base body 181a on the left side of the passage recess 181f.

  The upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the passage recess 181f is positioned below the lower end of the game ball B1 sandwiched between the blades 188 to 191 and the right standing wall 181d in the intermediate state. Further, the lower end on the right side of the passage inlet 171 is formed so as to be located at the same position as the upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the passage recess 181f or below the upper end of the base body 181a.

  However, the game ball B1 taken into any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 in the take-in permitted state passes through the passage recess 181f formed at the rear and enters the passage inlet 171. In order to prevent this, the upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the passage recess 181f is positioned slightly below the lower end of the game ball B1 sandwiched between the blades 188 to 191 and the right standing wall 181d in the intermediate state. Is set.

  Further, as already described, since each of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is inclined toward the axial center toward the front, the game ball B1 taken into each of the recesses 183b to 183e is in the game area PA. Hold on the front side. For this reason, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 taken into each of the recesses 183b to 183e may enter the passage inlet 171 through the passage recess 181f (particularly the right side of the passage recess 181f) located at the rear. Has been reduced.

  In a state where one game ball B1 has already been taken into the recesses 183b to 183e located at the intake port 185 (FIG. 7A), another game ball B1 is taken into the intake port. A case of reaching 185 can be considered. In this case, the recesses 183b to 183e are already held on the window panel 52 side. For this reason, there is a high possibility that the center of the game ball B1 that has reached the intake port 185 later is located behind the center of the game ball B1 that has already been taken into the recesses 183b to 183e. In this case, the game ball B1 that has reached the intake port 185 later comes into contact with the game ball B1 taken into the recesses 183b to 183e, rebounds back, and enters the passage entrance 171.

  Further, when the center of the game ball B1 that has reached the intake port 185 later is shifted to either the left or right with respect to the center of the game ball B1 taken into the recesses 183b to 183e, the intake port 185 is later inserted. The game ball B1 that has reached the point of contact with the game ball B1 taken into the recesses 183b to 183e and bounces back to the left or right, and is not taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 and moves to the side of the game area PA of the adjustment mechanism 180. It will flow downstream. As described above, when a plurality of game balls B1 arrive at the intake port 185 in a single capture-permitted state at the intake port 185, one game ball B1 is one of the recesses 183b to 183e. And the remaining game balls B1 can flow downstream of the game area PA without staying in the vicinity of the intake port 185.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration related to the discharge of the game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA.

  As already described, the game ball B1 that has entered any of the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is discharged from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball B1 launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is one of the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. By entering the ball, the game area PA is discharged. The game ball B1 that has entered any of the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

  On the back side of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed in correspondence with the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a, respectively. . The game ball B1 that has flowed into the discharge passage portions 42 to 48 flows down the flow of the discharge passage portions 42 to 48, thereby being led to the lower end portion of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and a discharge ball collection portion (not shown). It is collected at. Then, the game ball B1 collected by the discharge ball collection unit is discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

  Various detection sensors 42 a to 48 a for detecting the game ball B <b> 1 are provided in the discharge passage portions 42 to 48. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since the four general winning ports 31 are provided as described above, the discharge passage portions 42 to 44 exist corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the right general winning opening 31. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning port detection sensor 42 a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage 42, and the detection range is in the middle of the second discharge passage 43. A second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball B1 that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage portion 42, and has entered the general winning opening 31 adjacent to the right. The game ball B1 is detected by the second winning port detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join the two general winning ports 31 on the right side at a midway position is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an inlet side region corresponding to each of the two general winning ports 31, and has one outlet side region by joining the inlet side regions in the middle. doing. A third winning port detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side region in the third discharge passage portion 44. The game ball B1 that has entered one of the two general winning ports 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning port detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44.

  Corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32, a fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists. A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the game ball B1 that has entered the special electric prize device 32 passes through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. Then, it is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 exists corresponding to the first working port 33. The first working port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 46, and the game ball B1 that has entered the first working port 33 is placed in the fifth discharge passage portion 46. Is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second working port 34. A second operating port detection sensor 47 a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and the game ball B <b> 1 entering the second operation port 34 is in the sixth discharge passage portion 47. In the middle of passing through, it is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. The out-port detection sensor 48 a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage 48, and the game ball B 1 that has entered the out-port 24 a passes through the seventh discharge passage 48. And detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

  Note that the game ball B1 that is a detection target by any one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a is not a detection target of the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. In addition, a first gate detection sensor 49 a is provided for the first through gate 35 and a second gate detection sensor 50 a is provided for the second through gate 39. Therefore, the game ball B1 passing through the first through gate 35 in the middle of flowing down the game area PA is detected by the first gate detection sensor 49a, and the game ball B1 passing through the second through gate 39 is second. It is detected by the gate detection sensor 50a.

  As the various detection sensors 42a to 50a, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect the game balls B1. The various detection sensors 42 a to 50 a are electrically connected to a main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42 a to 50 a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 50a output a LOW level signal when the game ball B1 is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball B1 is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a display light emitting part 53 is provided above the window part 51. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker portions 54 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56 that bulge to the near side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls B1 paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a row. Further, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing the game balls B1 that are surplus in the upper tray 55a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main controller 60 that controls the main game is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 accommodated in a board box 60a. In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening to the board | substrate box 60a, or leaving the trace of the open. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 60a are inseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer remains on an adhesion target at the time of peeling. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise the board | substrate box 60a can be considered.

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism portion 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

  The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls B1 supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls B1 stored in the tank 75. Yes. The game ball B1 paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with a backpack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply, for example, while supplying a main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device assembly unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by an operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. And a power supply / launch control device 78 that controls the launch of the game ball B1. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 incorporates a main side ROM 64, a main side RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to the main side CPU 63 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

  The main ROM 64 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data. As shown in FIG. 12, the main-side ROM 64 has a low-frequency winning determination value table T1 and a high-frequency winning that are used in the public-power open lottery for determining whether or not to open or close the general electric utility 34a. A judgment value table T2 is stored. In the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 and the high-frequency winning determination value table T2, determination values that are to be won in the public power open lottery are recorded. Details of the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 and the high-frequency winning determination value table T2 will be described later.

  The main-side RAM 65 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 is capable of random access, and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

  The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the entrance mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA based on the information supplied from the main CPU 63. As will be described in detail later, the management IC 66 grasps the game history of the game ball B1 entering the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. The frequency of entering the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is determined in accordance with the recognized entering history.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout controller 77 provided in the main controller 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The power failure monitoring board 67 is connected to a power source / launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 62 is supplied with operating power via the power failure monitoring board 67.

  Various sensors such as various entrance detection sensors 42 a to 50 a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, the various winning detection sensors 42a to 50a are the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the first operation opening detection sensor. 46a, second working port detection sensor 47a, out port detection sensor 48a, first gate detection sensor 49a, and second gate detection sensor 50a. On the basis of the detection results of these entrance detection sensors 42a to 50a, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not to enter each entrance portion. Further, the main CPU 63 executes various lotteries based on winning in the first operating port 33 and various lotteries based on winning in the second operating port 34.

  A power failure monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, the payout control device 77 receives a prize ball command based on the fact that the game ball B1 has entered the prize ball-corresponding entrance part corresponding to the payout of the game ball B1 in the entrance part. Is output. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32 b that opens and closes the open / close door 32 a of the special electric prize winning device 32, a general electric drive unit 34 b that opens and closes the electric utility item 34 a of the second operating port 34, The figure unit 37, the universal figure unit 38, and the adjustment drive unit 184 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display part 37 a and a special figure holding display part 37 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the universal map unit 38 is provided with a universal map display unit 38 a and a universal map hold display unit 38 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 performs drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the main CPU 63 performs drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the power utility 34a is in the open state, the main CPU 63 performs drive control of the power drive 34b so that the power utility 34a is opened and closed. In each game round, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the general electric utility 34a is clearly indicated, the main CPU 63 performs display control of the normal display portion 38a. In addition, when a winning in the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 occurs, or when a variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the main CPU 63 performs display control of the special figure holding display unit 37b. Is executed, and when the winning display to the through gates 35 and 39 is generated, or when the variable display is started in the general map display unit 38a, the display control of the general map hold display unit 38b is executed in the main CPU 63. .

  The power failure monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power source / launch control device 78 and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source / launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

  The power / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, the adjustment drive unit 184, etc., and the generated operating power is generated. Supply. Incidentally, the power supply / launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor. Power for storing and holding is supplied to the main side RAM 65 and the payout control device 77 of the control device 60. In addition, the power source / launch control device 78 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound emission control device 81 controls the display control device 82 while driving and controlling the display light emitting portion 53 and the speaker portion 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. It is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main CPU 63 uses various counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the special symbol display unit 37a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the general symbol display unit 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 41 are changed. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the display duration in the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41 are determined. The fluctuation type counter CS is used. In addition, a general electric utility release counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the general electric utility 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the general electric open state, and initial value setting of the general electric utility release counter C4 are set. The opening initial value counter C5 to be used is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4, and C5 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4, and C5 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the big hitting type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as acquisition information storage means in the main RAM 65 when a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occurs. Stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

  The holding storage area 65a includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In the winning history to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, In addition, combinations of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → second Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the reserved area RE2 → the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls B1 to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 are stored and stored. Yes.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and starting one game round At this time, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Further, the information corresponding to the general electric utility release counter C4 is stored in the general electric power storage area 65c provided in the main RAM 65 when a winning to the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39 occurs. Is done.

  The general power hold storage area 65c includes a general power hold area HA and a general power execution area HB. The area reserved for power transmission HA includes a first power transmission reservation area HA1, a second power transmission reservation area HA2, a third power transmission reservation area HA3, and a fourth power transmission reservation area HA4. In accordance with the winning history to the second through gate 39, the numerical information of the utility utility release counter C4 is stored in the utility power reservation areas HA1 to HA4 as general power reservation information.

  In this case, in the first general electric power reservation area HA1 to the fourth general electric power reservation area HA4, when a winning to the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39 occurs continuously several times, the first general electric power reservation area HA4. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the reserved area HA1 → second public power reserved area HA2 → third general power reserved area HA3 → fourth general power reserved area HA4. As described above, by providing the four public power holding areas HA1 to HA4, a maximum of four winning histories of the game balls B1 to the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39 are held and stored. It has become.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The general electric power execution area HB is an area in which the general electric power holding information of the target for the electric power open lottery is stored when the variable display is started in the general signal display unit 38a (FIG. 3). Specifically, when starting the variable display of the general-purpose display unit 38a, the general power reservation information stored in the first general power reservation area HA1 is shifted to the general power execution area HB.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the common utility release counter C4 and the opening initial value counter C5 will be described. The utility power release counter C4 and the opening initial value counter C5 are loop counters that are incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 65535 and return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. When the general electric utility release counter C4 makes one round, the value of the initial value counter C5 for opening at that time is read as the initial value of the general electric utility release counter C4.

  As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery for opening a public train is executed in response to winning of the game ball B1 to the through gates 35 and 39. In the public power open lottery, numerical information updated by the public power utility open counter C4 is used. Specifically, the numerical information updated by the universal utility release counter C4 is acquired as an opening random number when the game ball B1 wins the through gates 35 and 39. In the following description, numerical information that is updated by the public power utility opening counter C4 and acquired upon winning through the through gates 35 and 39 and used in the public power opening lottery is described as a random number for opening. In the open train lottery, it is determined whether the random number for opening the lottery is a winning judgment value that is the subject of the open train winner, and if a positive determination is made, the open lottery is won. If a negative determination is made, a result is lost.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric utility 34 a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when the game ball PA is continuously fired in the same manner in the game area PA, the power utility 34a of the second operating port 34 is per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high.

  First, the public train opening lottery executed in the low frequency support mode will be described. The main-side ROM 64 (FIG. 12) stores a low-frequency winning determination value table T1 in which a winning determination value that is a target for a public power open win in the open-run lottery executed in the low-frequency support mode is recorded. ing. FIG. 14A is a low-frequency winning determination value table T1.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (a), the winning determination value of the public train opening lottery executed in the low frequency support mode is set to (250 × n−5) to (250 × n). Here, the variable n is a natural number of 1 to 262. The probability of winning the power train in the power train opening lottery executed in the low frequency support mode is about 1/42.

  As shown to Fig.14 (a), the winning determination value used as the object of a public power open winning is a serial number in units of six. Moreover, the update cycle of the random number for opening in the public utility accessory opening counter C4 is 4 msec. For this reason, in the general electric utility release counter C4, the period in which the updated random number for release is the winning determination value for the public electric open winning in the normal electric open lottery in the low frequency support mode continues for 24 msec.

  Assuming that the period of 24 msec in which the winning determination value that is the target of the public train open winning is the winning target period, as shown in FIG. 14A, in the low frequency support mode, the winning target period occurs at a 1 sec period. Here, assuming that the timing at which the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 (FIG. 4) wins the first through gate 35 is the winning possible timing, as described above, the cycle in which the winning possible timing occurs is low. It is 1 sec which is the same as the cycle in which the winning target period occurs in the frequency support mode.

  For this reason, in the low frequency support mode, a period in which the winning possible timing overlaps with the winning target period is a winning continuous period in which the public power open winning is continuously generated. The winning selection continuous period continues until the initial value of the utility utility release counter C4 is updated and the generation timing of the winning target period is deviated. When the generation timing of the winning target period is deviated, it becomes a non-winning continuous period in which the result of losing in the open train lottery executed in the low frequency support mode continues until the winning target period and the winning possible timing overlap again.

  As described above, the winning possible timing at which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 and a winning to the first through gate 35 occurs can occur at a 1 sec period. For this reason, in the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, the normal figure changing time during which the normal figure display unit 38a (FIG. 3) fluctuates is set to 0.5 sec, which is shorter than 1 sec. For this reason, even if the discharge of the game ball B1 from the adjustment mechanism 180 continues for a period of 1 sec, when the winning occurs, the variation of the general-purpose display unit 38a corresponding to the previous winning is finished. As a result, it is possible to prevent the normal status information from exceeding the upper limit number (4) from becoming normal.

  Next, the public train open lottery executed in the high frequency support mode will be described. The main-side ROM 64 (FIG. 12) stores a high-frequency winning determination value table T2 in which winning determination values that are subject to the public power open winning in the public power open lottery executed in the high-frequency support mode are recorded. ing. FIG. 14B is a high-frequency winning determination value table T2.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (b), the winning determination value of the public train opening lottery executed in the high frequency support mode is set to (m to m + 2). Here, the variable m is a natural number from 1 to 65501. The probability of winning a public power open in the public power open lottery executed in the high frequency support mode is approximately 3/5. In addition, the usual time fluctuation time in the high frequency support mode is set to 0.5 sec in order to expedite the use of the usual figure hold information.

  The opening mode of the public utility 34a when the public power release is won in the low frequency support mode is the same as the opening mode of the public power 34a when the public power release is selected in the high frequency support mode. . Specifically, a series of opening / closing operations in which the power utility item 34a is opened for 1 sec and closed for 1 sec are repeated five times, triggered by one electrification of public power open. Further, in the low frequency support mode, a minimum secured time (i.e., one time in the general map display unit 38a) is secured after the next public train opening lottery is performed. The display duration) is set to the same length as the secured time in the high frequency support mode.

  In the non-winning continuous period in the low-frequency support mode, the public power open winning is basically not generated in the public power open lottery performed with the winning of the first through gate 35 as a trigger. On the other hand, even in the non-winning continuous period in the low-frequency support mode, a winning to the second through gate 39 without the adjustment mechanism 180 above may occur. In this case, in the public power open lottery performed with the winning of the second through gate 39 as a trigger, the public power open winning is made with a low probability (approximately 1/42). In the non-winning continuous period in the low-frequency support mode, both winning of the game ball B1 at the first operating port 33 and winning at the second operating port 34 may occur. In the non-winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, it is unlikely that the opening of the electric train will occur and the opening / closing operation of the electric utility 34a will be executed. The direction is higher than the probability of winning a prize at the second working port 34.

  In the high frequency support mode, in the public power open lottery performed with the winning of the through gates 35 and 39 as a trigger, the public power open winning is made with a high probability (approximately 3/5). Here, the interval at which the game ball B1 is fired from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) is 0.6 sec at the shortest. On the other hand, the interval at which the game ball B1 is released from the adjustment mechanism 180 toward the first through gate 35 is 1 sec at the shortest. For this reason, in the high frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to aim at the second through gate 39 than to aim at the first through gate 35.

  In the high frequency support mode, both winning of the game ball B1 to the first operating port 33 and winning of the second operating port 34 can occur. In the high frequency support mode, the frequency of the opening of the power transmission 34a and the opening / closing operation of the power utility 34a is high, so the second operation port is more likely than the possibility of winning the first operation port 33. 34 is more likely to win. Since a predetermined number of game balls B1 are paid out in response to a winning at the second operating port 34, the player can play a game in the high-frequency support mode without reducing the number of held balls.

  In the low-frequency support mode, it is a continuous period for winning the electric power, and the electric power opening winning is continuously generated with a high probability in the electric power opening lottery performed with the winning of the first through gate 35 as a trigger. For this reason, the frequency at which the opening / closing operation of the power utility 34a is executed is increased, and the winning of the game ball B1 to the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are performed in the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode. Both winning and winning can occur.

  When the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode is set, the interval between consecutive occurrences of the opening of the public train is 1 sec at the shortest, and it is the second to launch the game ball B1 aiming at the first through gate 35. There is a higher possibility of winning the public train than launching the game ball B1 aiming at the through gate 39. For this reason, in the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to aim at the first through gate 35 than to aim at the second through gate 39.

  In the high frequency support mode, in the high frequency support mode, there is a possibility that the public ball opening lottery is performed by launching the game ball B1 aiming at the first through gate 35 during the low frequency support mode winning continuous period. It is higher than the possibility that the game ball B1 will be launched aiming at the 2 through gate 39 and the public power open lottery will be performed to win the general power open. In addition, as already described, the opening mode of the public utility 34a when the public power release is elected in the low frequency support mode is the common mode 34a when the public power is elected in the high frequency support mode. Is the same as the opening mode. For this reason, in the low-frequency support mode, when the winning continuous period is reached, it is temporarily in a state in which winning to the second working port 34 is more likely to occur than in the high-frequency support mode.

  The winning continuous period is set in the low-frequency support mode in which the player's expectation for winning the second operating port 34 is low, and the timing of transition from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period in the low-frequency support mode This is a configuration that is not notified to a person. For this reason, in the non-winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, the player performs the launch operation of the game ball B1 aiming at the first through gate 35 while expecting to shift to the winning continuous period.

  In the case of a pachinko machine that does not generate a winning continuous period, the possibility of winning the power transmission in the low frequency support mode is lower than the possibility of winning the power transmission in the high frequency support mode. For this reason, the player's degree of expectation for the public power open winning is lower in the low frequency support mode than in the high frequency support mode.

  On the other hand, like this pachinko machine 10, in the non-winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode, the initial value of the utility utility release counter C4 is changed to shift to the winning continuous period. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player have an expectation that the player may shift to a winning continuous period that is more likely to be a win-win win than the high-frequency support mode, even though it is in the low-frequency support mode. And, by adopting a configuration that does not notify the player of the transition timing from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period, the player may always have a sense of expectation that the transition to the winning continuous period may occur. it can.

  For this reason, while maintaining the state where the possibility of becoming a public power open winner in the low frequency support mode that combines the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period is lower than the possibility of becoming a public power open winner in the high frequency support mode In the low frequency support mode, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player to open the public train.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high-frequency support mode is in the open state of the normal power per unit time as compared with the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. Here, the low frequency support mode is a low frequency support mode in which the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period are combined. For example, after the first public train opening lottery is performed, the reserved time secured when the next public train opening lottery is performed (for example, executed in the general map display unit 38a based on winning to the through gates 35 and 39) In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. May be. In addition, increase the number of times of opening, lengthen the opening time, shorten the reserved time that will be secured after the next public power open lottery is performed after the first public power open lottery, The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

  Here, the winning continuous period and the non-winning continuous period that occur during the low frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 (a) to 15 (c) and FIGS. 16 (a) to 16 (d). First, in the comparative pachinko machine in which the winning continuous period and the non-winning continuous period do not occur, the timing of the public power open winning will be described based on the time charts of FIGS. FIG. 15A shows the timing at which winnings to the through gates 35 and 39 can occur in the comparative pachinko machine, and FIG. 15B shows the numerical values updated in the universal power release counter C4 of the comparative pachinko machine. The information (random number for opening) indicates the winning target period that is the winning determination value that is the target of the public power open winning, and FIG. 15 (c) shows the timing at which the open power winning can occur in the comparative pachinko machine.

  Here, the comparative pachinko machine is the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in which the game board 24 is not provided with the adjusting mechanism 180 (FIG. 4), and the release that is updated by the universal utility release counter C4. This is a pachinko machine configured so that the initial value of the random number for use is not updated. Further, at the timings t1 to t6 shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C, the comparative pachinko machine is in the low frequency support mode. In the comparative pachinko machine, the timing at which the winnings to the through gates 35 and 39 are generated is random, and the timing shown in FIG. 15A is an example.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, a winning for the through gates 35 and 39 of the game ball B1 occurs at the timing of t1. However, as shown in FIG. 15B, the timing of t1 is a timing outside the winning target period. The winning target period starts at the timing t2 after the timing t1. For this reason, a random number for opening is acquired in response to a winning that occurs at the timing of t1, and even if a lottery for opening a public train using the random number for opening is performed, a result is lost.

  As shown in FIG. 15B, when the next winning target period starts at the timing t3 after the timing t2, the winning target period continues for 24 msec. As shown in FIG. 15 (a), when a winning to the through gates 35 and 39 of the game ball B1 occurs at the timing of t4 within the winning target period, the winning is triggered by the winning generated at the timing of t4. A random number is obtained. And as shown in FIG.15 (c), in a public power open lottery performed using the open random number acquired at the timing of t4, it becomes a public power open winning.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (b), at the timing of t5 1 sec after the timing of t3, the next winning target period that continues for 24 msec is started. And as shown to Fig.15 (a), the winning to the through gates 35 and 39 of game ball B1 generate | occur | produces in the timing of t6 after the said winning object period end, and the random number for opening | release is acquired. As shown in FIG. 15 (c), the public train opening lottery performed using the opening random number acquired at the timing of t6 results in a miss.

  In this way, in the pachinko machine for comparison in which the game board 24 is not provided with the adjusting mechanism 180 and the initial value of the opening random number is not updated, the winning of the game ball B1 to the through gates 35 and 39 is won. Only when the generated timing is random and the winning timing overlaps with the winning target period started in a 1 sec cycle, the public power open win is won. For this reason, in the comparison pachinko machine, the winning continuous period and the non-winning continuous period do not occur.

  Next, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the timing at which the public power open winning is generated will be described based on the time charts of FIGS. FIG. 16A shows the timing at which a winning of the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 can occur, and FIG. 16B shows numerical information (opening random number) updated in the universal utility release counter C4. Indicates a winning target period that is a winning judgment value that is a target for public power open winning, and FIG. 16 (c) is an initial value update timing of numerical information (random number for opening) updated by the public power utility opening counter C4. FIG. 16 (d) shows the timing at which a public power open winning can occur. At timings t1 to t12 shown in FIGS. 16A to 16D, the pachinko machine 10 is in the low frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, the winning target period is started at the timing t1, and the winning target period continues for 24 msec. As shown in FIG. 16A, the timing of t2 when the winning to the first through gate 35 occurs is started at the winning target period that starts at the timing of t1 and the timing of t3 that is 1 sec after the timing of t1. It is located between the next winning period and the timing is outside the winning period. For this reason, even if a winning to the first through gate 35 occurs at the timing of t2, the public power open winning is not achieved.

  As already described, the interval at which the game ball B1 can be discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 toward the first through gate 35 is 1 sec. As shown in FIG. 16A, the timing of t4 at which a winning to the first through gate 35 can occur after the timing of t2 is a timing one second after the timing of t2. As shown in FIG. 16 (b), the timing of t4 is a timing outside the winning target period. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 16 (d), even if a winning to the first through gate 35 occurs at the timing of t4, it will not be a public power open winning.

  The period in which a winning to the first through gate 35 is possible and the generation period of the winning target period are the same period. For this reason, when the timing at which a winning to the first through gate 35 can occur is deviated from the winning target period, it becomes a non-winning continuous period in which the result of losing in the public power open lottery continues.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (c), the initial value of the universal utility release counter C4 is updated at the timing t5. When the initial value update of the general electric utility release counter C4 is performed, the winning possible timing to the first through gate 35 may be shifted and overlap the winning target period. In this case, as shown in FIG. 16B, the winning target period starts at a timing t6 that is later than the timing t5. Then, as shown in FIG. 16A, a winning to the first through gate 35 occurs at the timing t7 within the winning target period, and a random number for opening is acquired. As shown in FIG. 16 (d), when the public power open lottery is executed using the random number for opening acquired at the timing of t7, the public power open lottery is won in the public power open lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, the winning target period starts again at the timing t8, which is 1 sec after the timing t6. Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, a winning for the first through gate 35 occurs at the timing of t9, which is 1 sec after the timing of t7, and the opening random number is acquired. As shown in FIG. 16 (d), in the public power open lottery performed using the open random number acquired at the timing of t9, the public power open winning is generated. As described above, once the winning possible timing to the first through gate 35 overlaps with the winning target period, it becomes a winning continuous period in which the winnings for the opening of the electric power continuously occur in the lottery for the opening of the electric power.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 16 (c), the initial value of the universal utility release counter C4 is updated again at the timing of t10. Thereby, the winning possible timing to the first through gate 35 is deviated from the winning target period. As shown in FIG. 16A, a winning to the first through gate 35 occurs at the timing of t11 after the timing of t10, and the opening random number is acquired. As shown in FIG. 16B, the timing of the t11 is a timing outside the winning target period, and the next winning target period is started at a timing t12 later than the timing t11. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 16 (d), when the public power open lottery is executed using the random number for opening acquired at the timing of t11, a result of losing is obtained. In this way, if the winning timing for the first through gate 35 deviates from the winning target period due to the initial value update of the general electric utility opening counter C4, the non-winning in which the winning results are consecutive in the public electric opening lottery Return to a continuous period.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the main side RAM 65, when a value “1” is set at the start timing of the winning continuous period, a postponing flag that enables execution of an initial value update in the utility utility release counter C4 can be executed. 65d, a see-through completion flag 65e that is set to “1” when the initial value update in the universal utility release counter C4 has already been sent off during the winning continuous period. And are provided.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the winning continuous period is reached, the initial value update of the universal utility release counter C 4 is postponed once at the initial update timing of the universal utility release counter C 4 that is first met. It has a configuration. By frequently updating the initial value of the general electric utility release counter C4, the possibility of becoming a winning continuous period in the non-winning continuous period is increased, and when the winning continuous period is reached, This is a configuration in which the winning continuous period is continued for a long time by seeing off the initial value update. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of a winning continuous period can be made attractive to a player. By making the occurrence of the winning continuous period an event that the player expects, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball B1 wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a success / failure table. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the success / failure lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball B1 wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are as follows: (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the special prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) a second after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by making a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the general electric utility 34a of the two operation ports 34.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the special electricity prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of winning in the special electricity prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in any of the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the game is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit.

  Here, in the round game, a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls B1 wins the special electric prize device 32 until either condition is satisfied. It is a game that continues. In addition, the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  Moreover, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special electricity prize winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from when the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened until it is closed. Specifically, a long-time mode set to 29 sec, which is a long open duration, and a short-time mode set to 0.06 sec, which is a short duration shorter than the above long time, are set. Has been.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball B1 is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Be controlled. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time longer than the product of the launch period of the game ball B1 and one round game is set. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, an opening continuation time is set that is shorter than the product of the launch period of the game ball B1 and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the launch period of the game ball B1. Yes. Therefore, when the opening is performed once in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric prize winning device 32 will receive the maximum number of winnings in one round game. When the number of times is released, it is expected that no prize will be given to the special electric prize winning device 32 or that there will be about one even if a prize is generated.

  In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once in a long-time manner in each round game. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special prize winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a short time mode.

  In addition, the number of times of opening / closing the special electric prize device 32 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high frequency winning mode. However, the value is not limited to the above value as long as the occurrence frequency of the winning to the special electricity winning device 32 is higher than the low-frequency winning mode until the opening / closing execution mode starts and ends. It is.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table. And as such a distribution destination, a low probability big hit result, a low winning high probability big hit result, and the most advantageous big hit result are set.

  The low probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The low-winning high-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. is there. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / raising lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that.

  Note that the normal game state in relation to each of the above-described game states refers to a state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, not the open / close execution mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure in which the low prize-winning high probability hit result is not set as a game result. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode in the low winning and winning big hit result, the number of round games may be smaller than in the case of the low winning big hit result and the most advantageous big hit result.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the low winning high probability big hit result. “15 to 29” corresponds to the most favorable jackpot result.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 238, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 41 that can display a variation of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is an assignment corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 41 This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to be the above-mentioned giving correspondence result at the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started. In addition, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the result of giving correspondence at a stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining combinations in that state are displayed. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is displayed in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen, and the reach effect is performed. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  The notice display includes a plurality of symbol strings in a situation where symbols are variably displayed in all symbol columns after the symbol variable display is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect, and what makes the symbol on a symbol row the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also included. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped. In addition, the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed are not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the losing result, it is executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. .

  On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is performed not by the main controller 60 but by the sound emission controller 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 is more prone to generate a notice display in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than the game times corresponding to the miss results, and displays a notice display with a low appearance rate. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being easily generated. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 41.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main CPU 63 determines the display duration in the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display duration in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display unit 37a and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed in order for the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 is roughly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main CPU 63 is set (step S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasure switch provided in the power supply / launch control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is determined. Determination is made (step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data ( Step S107).

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is executed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. In addition, after executing the process of step S109, a recognition process (step S110) for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and a data output for outputting various data to the reader connected to the MPU 62 Processing is executed (step S111). Details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be described later.

  The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but the timer interrupt process is prohibited from occurring at the stage where the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at the timing before the process of step S111 is completed and the process of step S112 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process in step S111 is completed, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S112 is started. Therefore, the process for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until this situation is reached.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S112 to S115. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time occurs between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S112 to S115 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S112 to S115 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S112, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the following step S113, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the opening initial value counter C5 is executed, and the variable counter update process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed in step S114. To do. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 65, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed. If the process of step S115 is performed, it will return to step S112 and will repeat the process of step S112-step S115.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, at a cycle of 4 msec).

  First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received from the power failure monitoring board 67. Become. In the power failure process, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, and a checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored.

  Thereafter, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and after the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, Execute the overwriting process. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  After step S202, in step S203, an opening counter update process is executed to update the utility utility release counter C4 (FIG. 13). Details of the release counter update processing will be described later. Thereafter, in step S204, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the opening initial value counter C5 (FIG. 13) is executed as in step S113, and in step S205, as in step S114. The variation counter update process is executed.

  The general electric utility release counter C4 is a loop counter, and an open counter update process for updating the general electric utility release counter C4 is periodically executed. For this reason, the initial value update timing of the universal utility release counter C4, which occurs when the universal utility release counter C4 makes one round, periodically occurs.

  Here, when the opening initial value counter C5 for updating the initial value of the general electric utility release counter C4 is a loop counter and the opening initial value counter C5 is periodically updated, The numerical value information acquired as the initial value from the opening initial value counter C5 at the initial value update timing of the electric utility release counter C4 is limited to a part of the numerical information updated by the opening initial value counter C5. .

  In this case, the generation timing of the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode already described is not random. There is no overlap between the winning target period and the winning possible timing, the winning continuous period does not occur, the winning target period and the winning possible timing frequently overlap, the winning continuous period frequently occurs, and the winning consecutive period is regular May occur, and the player can easily guess the generation timing of the winning continuous period.

  In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 performs random number initial value update processing for updating the opening initial value counter C5 both in the periodic timer interrupt processing and in the non-periodic residual processing of the main processing. It is the structure which is executed with. For this reason, the winning target period and the winning possible timing overlap at an appropriate frequency. As a result, in the low frequency support mode that combines the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period, the possibility that the public power open winning will occur is lower than the possibility that the public power open winning will occur in the high frequency support mode. It is possible to generate consecutive winning periods.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 18, after the variation counter update process is executed in step S205, in step S206, a rotation control process for rotating the rotating body 183 once every 4 sec is executed. In the rotation control process, it is determined whether it is time to rotate the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184 communicated with the rotating body 183, and if it is time to rotate the output shaft 184a, adjustment is performed. A pulse signal is transmitted to the driving unit 184 to rotate the output shaft 184a. In this rotation control process, a pulse signal for rotating the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184 by 0.72 ° is transmitted at a rate of once every 8 msec. That is, in the timer interrupt process executed at a cycle of 4 msec, the adjustment drive unit 184 is driven by transmitting a pulse signal once every two times.

  Thereafter, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed (step S207). In the fraud detection process, occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, “1” is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65. In subsequent step S208, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S208, the processing after step S209 is executed.

  In step S209, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when information for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information for switching the general utility 34a of the second working port 34 to the open state is set, output of the drive signal to the general power drive unit 34b is started, and the closed state should be switched to. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  Thereafter, a reading process is executed (step S210). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Thereafter, the incoming ball detection process is executed (step S211). In the entrance detection process, signals received from the entrance detection sensors 42a to 50a are read, and based on the read results, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the first operation port 33 are read. The presence / absence of a ball entering the second working port 34, the first through gate 35, and the second through gate 39 is specified. The details of the incoming ball detection process will be described later.

  After that, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S212). In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  Thereafter, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball B1 is executed (step S213). In a situation where the launch operation to the launch operation device 28 is continued, one game ball B1 is launched at 0.6 sec which is a predetermined launch cycle. In the subsequent step S214, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S210, the disconnection confirmation of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 50a and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. I do.

  After that, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (step S215). In the special figure special electric control process, when a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occurs in a situation where the number of the holding information stored in the holding storage area 65a is less than the upper limit number, A process of storing the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the time as the hold information in the hold storage area 65a in time series is executed.

  Here, assuming that the period during which the opening / closing operation of the electric utility 34a is performed is the support execution period, if a prize for the second operation port 34 occurs during the support execution period, the support winning counter is displayed. A process of adding “1” is performed. Then, when the value of the supported winning counter reaches the upper limit number of winnings set in the support execution period, “1” is set to the support end flag. The in-support winning counter is a counter that the main CPU 63 refers to in order to grasp the total number of winning times to the second operating port 34 that occurred during the support execution period, and is provided in the main RAM 65. Yes. The in-support winning prize counter is cleared to “0” at the start timing of the support execution period. Further, the support end flag is referred to by the main CPU 63 in order to grasp that the number of winnings to the second operation port 34 that has occurred during the support execution period has reached the upper limit number and has reached the end timing of the support execution period. It is a flag and is provided in the main RAM 65.

  In the special figure special electric control process, whether or not the hold information corresponds to the jackpot winning condition on the condition that the hold information is not stored during the game rotation and the open / close execution mode is stored, And when it corresponds to the jackpot winning, a distribution determination process for determining which jackpot result the hold information corresponds to is executed.

  Here, in the success / failure determination process, when the big win is won, “1” is set to the high-frequency flag. The high-frequency flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the support mode for winning a prize to the second operation port 34 is the high-frequency support mode. The main CPU 63 specifies whether the support mode for winning a prize to the second operation port 34 is the high frequency support mode or the low frequency support mode by referring to the high frequency flag. As already described, when a jackpot result is obtained, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends for any jackpot.

  In the special figure special electric control process, not only the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process, but also if the hold information does not correspond to the big win, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponds to the occurrence of reach. A reach determination process is executed, and a process of selecting a game time duration using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is executed. Then, the change command including the duration information according to the result of each process and the type command including the game result information are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, and the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a is displayed. Start the variable display. The sound emission control device 81 receives the change command and the type command, and causes the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to start the effect for game play corresponding to the contents of these commands. Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a change pattern command corresponding to the contents of the change command and the type command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the variation pattern command, the symbol display device 41 starts the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the content of the variation pattern command. As a result, one game is started.

  In the special figure special electric control process, whether or not it is the end timing of the game time by determining whether or not the duration of the game time determined at the start of the game time has elapsed during the execution of one game time. Determine. When it is the end timing, a process for ending the game round is executed in a state where the display corresponding to the game result is performed. In this case, if the current game time corresponds to the occurrence of any jackpot result, the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. When the game times correspond to the losing result, the pattern corresponding to the losing result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, a final stop command indicating that the game times should be ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the final stop command, the sound emission control device 81 ends the effect for the current game round in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a final stop command to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 receives the final stop command, and ends the effect for the current game round on the symbol display device 41.

  In the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game times is a result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a process for starting the opening / closing execution mode is executed. At the start, an opening command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. In the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. When the round game is started, the special electricity prize device 32 is opened, and when the round game is finished, the special electricity prize device 32 is closed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, and a close command indicating that the round game is ended is transmitted to the sound light control device 81. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the open / close execution mode is ended, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. The sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening / closing execution mode. Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the command received during the opening / closing execution mode to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to execute an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening / closing execution mode. Also, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends correspond to the type of jackpot result that triggered the execution of the opening / closing execution mode. Execute the process for setting the mode.

  Specifically, when the type of jackpot result is a low probability jackpot, “100” is set as the end criterion for the high frequency support mode in the game number counter. The game number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the end reference number of game times has been consumed in the state set in the high frequency support mode. The numerical information set in the game number counter is updated so that “1” is subtracted based on the end of the game number. In addition, when the type of the jackpot result is a low winning / high-probability jackpot or the most advantageous jackpot result, “1” is set to the indefinite flag. The indefinite flag is a flag for continuing the high-frequency support mode until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state winning after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the state shifts to the big hit state. In the high frequency support mode in which “1” is set in the indefinite flag, if the generated jackpot result is a low probability jackpot, the indefinite flag is cleared to “0” and the game counter is set to “100”. Is set, and the indefinite flag is set to “1” again when the generated jackpot result is a low winning high-precision jackpot and when it is the most advantageous jackpot.

  After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S215 in the timer interruption process, the ordinary figure electric power control process is executed (step S216). In the ordinary map electric power control process, when winning through the through gates 35 and 39 has occurred, a process of executing a lottery opening lottery to determine whether or not to open and close the electric utility 34a. And the process which performs the display of the general map display part 38a and the opening / closing of the general electric utility 34a in the aspect according to the result of the said electric power open lottery is performed. Details of the ordinary map / electric power control process will be described later.

  In subsequent step S217, based on the processing results of immediately preceding step S215 and step S216, output information is set for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the special figure display unit 37a in the special figure hold display unit 37b. The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the general map display unit 38a to the general map hold display unit 38b is set. In step S217, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S215 and S216, and the display content of the general map display unit 38a is set. Set the output information to be updated.

  Thereafter, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the check result is executed (step S218). Further, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S219). In addition, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S220). Thereafter, a management output process for outputting information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball B1 in the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S221). Details of the management output process will be described later.

  Next, the release counter update process executed in step S203 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an opening counter update process executed by the main CPU 63.

  First, in step S301, the current numerical value information in the utility utility release counter C4 is read. In step S302, whether the current numerical value information read in step S301 is a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the current initial value. Determine whether or not. Here, the current initial value is numerical information that is newly stored each time the initial value of the utility utility release counter C4 is updated.

  If the current numerical information is a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the current initial value (step S302: YES), this means that the current value is the initial value update timing of the utility utility release counter C4. In this case, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the high-frequency flag in step S303. If “1” is not set in the high frequency flag in step S303, it means that the low frequency support mode is set. In this case, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the postponing completion flag 65e (FIG. 12) in step S304.

  As already described, the main RAM 65 (FIG. 12) includes a see-off flag 65d (FIG. 12) and a see-off completion flag 65e (FIG. 12). The see-off flag 65d is a flag that is set to “1” when the public power open lottery is generated three consecutive times in the public power open lottery performed in the low frequency support mode, and the public power open winner is generated three times in succession.

  In the low-frequency support mode, when the public power open winning can occur, if the winning through the second through gate 39 occurs during the non-winning continuous period, the winning through the first through gate 35 occurs during the winning continuous period. In some cases, and in the winning continuous period, a winning to the second through gate 39 may occur. Of these, the probability of winning the public power when the second through gate 39 is won is approximately 1/42 in both the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period.

  For this reason, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric power open three consecutive times is low (approximately 1/74000) in the electric power open lottery performed when the second through gate 39 is won. There are almost no wins for open trains. Also, even if it happens by accident, the see-off flag 65d is cleared to “0” if a result of losing in the next public train opening winning is obtained.

  On the other hand, during the winning continuous period, when the public power open lottery is performed in response to the winning of the first through gate 35, the public power open winning is determined. For this reason, when the player is operating the game ball launching device aiming at the first through gate 35 and the winning continuous period is reached, the winning to the first through gate 35 is made after the winning continuous period. When it occurs three times, “1” is set in the see-off flag 65d. At the initial value update timing that is reached in a state in which “1” is set in the postponing flag 65d during the winning continuous period, the initial value update of the utility utility release counter C4 is postponed.

  Further, the see-off completion flag 65e is set to “1” when the initial value update timing is reached in a state where “1” is set in the see-off flag 65d, and the initial value update of the universal utility release counter C4 is postponed. Flag to be Here, the see-off flag 65d is a flag in which “1” is set on the condition that the low-frequency support mode is set. For this reason, in the high frequency support mode, “1” is not set in the see-off flag 65d. In the high frequency support mode, “1” is not set in the see-off flag 65d, and therefore “1” is not set in the see-off completion flag 65e. The process of setting “1” in the see-off flag 65d will be described later.

  If “1” is set in the postponing completion flag 65e in step S304 of the opening counter updating process (FIG. 19), the initial value update of the utility utility opening counter C4 has already been postponed during the current winning continuous period. Means that

  If “1” is not set in the see-off completion flag 65e in step S304, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the see-off flag 65d in step S305. When “1” is set in the see-off flag 65d (step S305: YES), it means that the current initial value update timing is the initial value update timing to be sent off. In this case, the see-off flag 65d is cleared to “0” in step S306, and “1” is set to the see-off completion flag 65e in step S307.

  After determining that it is not the initial value update timing in step S302, or after clearing the see-through completion flag 65e to “0” in step S307, in step S308, the current numerical information is the maximum value of the utility utility release counter C4. ("65505").

  If the current numerical information is not the maximum value in step S308, “1” is added to the current numerical information and the numerical information is updated in step S309. If the current numerical information is the maximum value in step S308, the numerical information is updated by clearing the current numerical information to “0” in step S310.

  When “1” is set in the postponing completion flag 65e in step S304, after the initial value update is postponed, the utility utility release counter C4 makes one round and the initial value update timing comes again. Means that. In this case, the postponing completion flag 65e is cleared to “0” in step S311.

  After determining in step S303 that the high-frequency support mode is set, in step S305 it is determined that “1” is not set in the see-through flag 65d, or in step S311 the see-off completion flag 65e is cleared to “0”. After that, the initial value of the general electric utility release counter C4 is updated. Specifically, in step S312, the current numerical value information in the opening initial value counter C5 is acquired. In step S313, the numerical value acquired in step S312 is overwritten on the current initial value as a new initial value, and the initial value is updated. In this way, the winning target period is shifted by changing the initial value of the utility utility release counter C4. Thereby, the transition from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period can be generated at a timing not notified to the player. The initial value updated in step S313 is used for determining whether or not it is the initial value update timing in step S302.

  In the following step S314, the initial value updated in step S313 is overwritten on the universal utility release counter C4, thereby updating the numerical information of the universal utility release counter C4 and ending this release counter update process. To do.

  In this way, by setting up the initial value update timing at the initial value update timing of the universal utility release counter C4 that reaches the first after the winning continuous period, the winning continuous period is extended, The continuous period can be a more attractive period for the player. On the other hand, when the initial value update timing comes in the high-frequency support mode (step S303: YES), the initial value update of the utility utility release counter C4 is always executed.

  Next, the ordinary power transmission control process executed in step S216 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a normal power control process executed by the main CPU 63.

  In the ordinary map power control process, when winning to the through gates 35 and 39 is generated, a process for acquiring the reserved information on the universal map side is executed, and the reserved information on the universal map side is stored. If there is, the public information open lottery is performed using the hold information, and further, a process for performing an effect for ordinary drawing is executed by using the open pop lottery as a trigger. Moreover, the process which opens and closes the general electric utility 34a of the 2nd operation port 34 based on the result of a public power open lottery is performed.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, in the ordinary map / electric power control process, first, in step S401, the retained information acquisition process on the universal map side is executed, and the retained information corresponding to the winning to the through gates 35 and 39 is obtained. get. Here, the hold information acquisition process on the normal side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the hold information acquisition process on the normal side executed by the main CPU 63.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not a winning of the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 has occurred by determining whether or not “1” is set in the first gate winning flag. Here, the first gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the first through gate 35. If “1” is set in the first gate winning flag, the first gate winning flag is cleared to “0” in step S502.

  If “1” is not set in the first gate winning flag in step S501, the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the game ball B1 has won the second through gate 39 by determining whether or not the second gate winning flag is set to “1”. Here, the second gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the second through gate 39.

  If “1” is not set in the second gate winning flag in step S503, the reservation information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if “1” is set in the second gate winning flag, In step S504, the second gate winning flag is cleared to “0”.

  After the first gate winning flag is cleared to “0” in step S502, or after the second gate winning flag is cleared to “0” in step S504, in step S505, the current power transmission in the power transmission suspension area HA is performed. It is determined whether or not the hold information is less than the upper limit number (4). Then, when the ordinary power reservation information is the upper limit number (step S505: NO), the reservation information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and when the ordinary power reservation information is less than the upper limit number (step S505: YES), the step is ended. The process moves to S506. In step S506, the numerical information of the general electric utility release counter C4 is stored in the main electric power reservation areas HA1 to HA4 having the highest priority among the empty electric power reservation areas HA1 to H4, and this reservation information acquisition process is performed. Exit.

  In one processing round, acquisition of holding information corresponding to “1” set in the first gate winning flag, and acquisition of holding information corresponding to “1” set in the second gate winning flag; If both are configured to execute both of these, the two pieces of hold information acquired in the processing times become the same hold information.

  On the other hand, in the hold information acquisition process on the normal side, if both the first gate winning flag and the second gate winning flag are set to “1” in the current processing round, the first gate Only the holding information corresponding to the fact that “1” is set in the winning flag is executed. The holding information corresponding to the fact that “1” is set in the second gate winning flag is executed in the next processing round.

  Therefore, when the period in which “1” is set in the second gate winning flag overlaps with the period in which “1” is set in the first gate winning flag, the second through gate 39 of the game ball B1. The opening random number acquired when the winning is won can be different from the opening random number acquired when the first through gate 35 is winning.

  Returning to the description of the general-purpose power transmission control process (FIG. 20), after executing the general-purpose hold information acquisition process in step S401, in step S402, information on the general-purpose general power counter provided in the main RAM 65 is displayed. In step S403, a process for reading the ordinary power address table from the main ROM 64 is executed. Then, in step S404, a process of acquiring a start address corresponding to information on the general-purpose / general power counter from the general-purpose / general-service address table is executed.

  Here, the processing content of step S402-step S404 is demonstrated. As already described, the general-purpose power control process includes a process related to a general-purpose effect and a process related to the opening / closing of the general-purpose character 34a. In this case, as a process related to the effect for the normal map, a normal map change start process, a normal map change process, and a normal map determining process are set. Further, as a process related to the opening / closing of the power utility 34a, a process during the opening of the power transmission and a process during the closing of the power transmission are set.

  In such a processing configuration, the ordinary power transmission counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing is to be executed. Is set with a start address in a program for executing the above-described plural types of processing in correspondence with the numerical information of the ordinary power counter.

  It is possible to set numerical information of "0" to "4" for the general-purpose power counter, and the general-purpose power-address table starts with one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information of the general-purpose power counter. Address information ("NSA0" to "NSA4") is set. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal change start process, the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the normal change change process, and the start address NSA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the processing during normalization, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the processing during open power, and the start address NSA4 is closed This is the start address of the program for executing the process.

  When the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is finished, the general-purpose public power counter is triggered by the fact that the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied. 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared corresponding to the process executed in the electric control process. Therefore, in the ordinary power / general power control processing at each processing time, it is only necessary to execute processing according to the numerical information set in the common power / electric power counter.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp which process is to be executed as the normal power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  The following is the process for starting the normal map change, the process for changing the normal map, the process for confirming the normal map, the process for opening the power grid, and the process for closing the power grid using the general map / general counter and the general map / general address table. A processing configuration for execution will be described.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 20, after executing the process of step S <b> 404, in step S <b> 405, the process of setting the zero flag on the normal map side is executed. In the setting process of the zero flag on the general map side, the numerical information of the general power timer counter is read, and when the numerical information of the general power timer counter is “0”, the general information provided in the register of the main CPU 63 is read. A process of setting “1” to the zero flag on the drawing side is executed. The general power timer counter is a counter used for the main CPU 63 to specify the update timing of the general power counter according to the passage of time, and numerical information corresponding to a predetermined time is shown in step S407. The numerical information is updated in the timer update process in step S212 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

  In the subsequent step S406, a process of jumping (shifting) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S404 is executed. Specifically, if the acquired start address is NSA0, the process jumps to the common map change start process of step S407, and if the acquired start address is NSA1, the process jumps to the process of normal map change of step S408. If the acquired start address is NSA2, the process jumps to the processing for determining the normal time in step S409, and if the acquired start address is NSA3, the process jumps to the process for releasing the general power in step S410, If the address is NSA4, the process jumps to the processing during power transmission closing in step S411. And after performing any process of step S407-step S411, this common figure normal power control process is complete | finished. Hereinafter, the process of step S407-step S411 is demonstrated separately.

  First, the general diagram fluctuation start process (step S407) in the general map normal power control process (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the universal change start process executed by the main CPU 63.

  In the normal change start process, first, in step S601, whether or not the high frequency support mode is set is determined by referring to the high frequency flag provided in the main RAM 65. If “1” is set in the high frequency flag in step S601 and the high frequency support mode is set, it is determined in step S602 whether “1” is set in the indefinite flag. As already explained, when “1” is set in the indefinite flag, it means that it is a low winning high probability winning winning or the most advantageous winning winning, and that the high frequency support mode is entered after the opening / closing execution mode ends. means.

  If “1” is not set in the indefinite flag in step S602, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the value of the game number counter is “0”. If the value of the game number counter is “0” in step S603, it means that the high frequency support mode end reference number has been reached. In this case, in step S604, the high frequency flag is cleared to “0”. As a result, the support mode of the utility model 34a shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the general map change start process is a situation in which the numerical information of the general map / general counter corresponds to the processing during the opening of the general power or the processing during the closing of the general power, that is, when the public power is elected It is not executed during the opening / closing operation of the object 34a. Therefore, even if the end reference number of game times is ended during the opening / closing operation based on the fact that the public power open win was made before the end of the end number of game times, the support mode is maintained in the high frequency support mode. Then, after the opening / closing execution operation of the utility model 34a is completed, the mode is switched to the low frequency support mode.

  In the subsequent step S605, an external output setting process for high-frequency release is executed. In the external output setting process, data is set in the main RAM 65 so that the high-frequency signal output from the external terminal board 97 (FIG. 2) to the gaming hall management computer is stopped. The high frequency signal is output when the high frequency support mode is entered. Incidentally, the output stop of the high-frequency signal is executed in the external information setting process in step S220 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

  After making a negative determination in step S601, after making a positive determination in step S602, after making a negative determination in step S603, or after executing the processing of step S605, in step S606, It is determined whether or not the total number NS of the hold information is 1 or more. Then, when the total number NS of the hold information on the normal map side is “0” (step S606: NO), the normal map change start process is finished as it is, and when it is 1 or more (step S606: YES). Advances to step S607.

  In step S607, a general-use opening lottery process for determining whether or not the opening-and-closing operation for executing the opening / closing operation of the general-purpose object 34a is performed is executed, and the normal-view fluctuation start process is ended. Here, the public train opening lottery process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a general map opening lottery process executed by the main CPU 63.

  In the public power open lottery process, first, in step S701, a shift process of the public power holding area HA (FIG. 13) is executed. In the shift process, the random number for opening stored in the first general power reservation area HA1 (FIG. 13) of the general power reservation area HA is shifted to the general power execution area HB (FIG. 13). 1 Clear the normal power reservation area HA1. In addition, the second general power reservation area HA2 (FIG. 13) → the first general power reservation area HA1, the third general power reservation area HA3 (FIG. 13) → the second general power reservation area HA2, the fourth general power reservation area HA4 ( (FIG. 13) → Random numbers for opening in each area are shifted in a manner such as the third normal power reservation area HA3.

  In the subsequent step S702, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the high-frequency flag. It is determined whether or not it is in the execution mode. If a negative determination is made in step S702 or an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S704.

  In step S704, the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 (FIG. 14A) is read from the main ROM 64, and in step S705, a normal-winning determination determination process (general power open lottery) is performed. In the public train opening lottery, when the random number for opening stored in the public train execution area HB matches one of the winning determination values stored in the low-frequency winning determination value table T1, In addition, if it does not coincide with any of the winning determination values, a result of losing is obtained.

  In a succeeding step S706, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal signal success / failure determination process in the step S705 is a public power open winning. If the result of the normal signal success / failure determination process is a public power open winning (step S706: YES), it is determined in step S707 whether or not the high frequency flag is set to “1”. If “1” is not set in the high frequency flag and the low frequency support mode is set (step S707: NO), it is determined in step S708 whether “1” is set in the winning continuous flag. To do. Here, the winning continuous flag is a flag for grasping that it is a winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, and is provided in the main RAM 65 (FIG. 12).

  The main RAM 65 is provided with a winning continuation counter for grasping the number of times that the public power open winning is continuously generated during the non-winning continuation period of the low frequency support mode. The main CPU 63 (FIG. 12) recognizes that the winning continuation period is reached when the value of the winning continuation counter is “3”, and sets “1” in the winning continuation flag.

  If “1” is not set in the winning continuation flag in step S708, “1” is added to the winning continuation counter in step S709, and the value of the winning continuation counter is “3” in step S710. It is determined whether or not. Then, when the value of the winning continuous counter is “3” (step S710: YES), it is grasped that the winning continuous period is reached.

  In this case, the winning continuous counter is cleared to “0” in step S711, and “1” is set to the see-off flag 65d in step S712. As a result, the initial value update of the universal utility release counter C4 is postponed at the initial value update timing of the universal utility release counter C4 that comes first after the current winning continuous period occurs. In step S713, the winning continuous flag is set to “1” and the winning continuous period is stored.

  In the case where a result of losing in the normal signal win / loss determination process (normal electric open lottery) in step S705 (step S706: NO), the winning continuation counter is cleared to “0” in step S714, and the winning continuation in step S715. Clear the flag to “0”. For this reason, during the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, when the winning of the electric train is generated only once due to the winning of the game ball B1 to the second through gate 39, or when it happens twice consecutively by chance In this case, it is not determined that the winning continuous period has started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S703, it is the high frequency support mode and not in the opening / closing execution mode, so in step S716 the high frequency winning determination value table T2 (FIG. 14B) ) Is read, and in step S717, the normal-use determination processing is performed in the same manner as in step S705. In the normal signal success / failure determination processing, when the random number for opening stored in the normal power execution area HB matches one of the winning determination values stored in the high-frequency winning determination value table T2, the normal power release is performed. In addition to winning, if any of the winning determination values does not match, a result is lost.

  After determining in step S707 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect, after determining in step S708 that the winning continuous period has already been reached, in step S710 after determining that the value of the winning continuous counter is “2” or less. After setting “1” in the winning continuation flag in step S713, clearing the winning continuation flag “0” in step S715, or after executing the normal-winning determination processing in step S717, in step S718 The normal time fluctuation time stored in the main ROM 64 is read out. The main ROM 64 stores in advance information for setting the normal time change time to 0.5 sec.

  In the following step S719, the information on the normal map fluctuation time read out in step S718 is set in the general map normal power timer counter, and in step S720, the process for starting the fluctuation display on the general map display unit 38a (FIG. 3). Execute. In step S721, the numerical information of the general-purpose power system counter is updated from “0” to “1” by adding “1” to the numerical value information of the general-purpose power system counter. Exit.

  As already described, even if the power train opening winning occurs three times continuously in the high frequency support mode, “1” may be set in the postponing flag 65d as a trigger of the three consecutive power opening winnings. If it is determined in step S707 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect, the processing from step S708 to step S713 is not executed.

  Next, a process during normal map fluctuation (step S408) in the general map normal power control process (FIG. 20) will be described. In the process of changing the normal map, first, by referring to the zero flag, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the display on the general map display unit 38a. If it is not the end timing of the variable display, the pattern displayed on the general map display unit 38a is updated to the next pattern on the condition that the display content of the general map display unit 38a is updated. To do. On the other hand, if it is the end timing of the variable display in the general-purpose display unit 38a, the general-purpose display unit 38a executes a pattern stop process for displaying the current final stop pattern. In the pattern stop process, information on the final stop time is set in the ordinary power transmission timer counter. After executing the pattern stop process, the ordinary power counter is updated from “1” to “2”.

  Next, a process for determining a general map (step S409) in the general map / electric power control process (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the process of determining the general map, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the final stop time set in the general-purpose power timer counter in the process of changing the normal map has elapsed. Specifically, the determination process determines whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag.

  If the final stop time has not elapsed (step S801: NO), the process for determining the normal map is terminated as it is, and if the final stop time has elapsed (step S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S802. It is then determined whether or not the result of the lottery opening lottery that triggered the change display this time is a lottery opening. And when it is a public power open winning (step S802: YES), it progresses to step S803.

  In step S 803, “5” is set in the public power open counter provided in the main RAM 65, and in step S 804, “10” is set in the general power prize counter provided in the main RAM 65. The general electric power release counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of remaining open times of the general electric utility 34a in the opening / closing operation of the general electric utility 34a. This is a counter for specifying in the main CPU 63 whether or not the upper limit number of winnings to the second operation ports 34 has occurred during the opening / closing operation of 34a. After that, in step S805, the supported winning counter is cleared to “0”, and in step S806, numerical information on the opening duration (specifically, 1 sec) is set in the ordinary power timer counter.

  In the subsequent step S807, the numerical value information of the general-purpose power counter is updated from “2” to “3” by adding “1” to the general-purpose power counter, and this normal-number fluctuation start processing is terminated. .

  Also, in step S802, if the result of the lottery opening lottery that triggered the change display this time is not a lottery opening lottery, in step S808, the numerical value information of the ordinary map counter is set to “0”. After clearing, the process for determining the normal figure is terminated.

  Next, the process of opening the normal power (step S410) in the normal power control process (FIG. 20) will be described. In the process of opening the electric utility, it is first determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the electric utility 34a. If it is not the closing timing, the open state of the electric utility 34a is maintained. On the other hand, when it is the closing timing of the utility model 34a, a process for bringing the utility model 34a into a closed state is executed. In this case, the value of the utility power open counter is updated so that “1” is subtracted, and when the value of the utility power open counter is “0”, the numerical information of the utility power counter is cleared to “0”. Then, the opening / closing operation of the general electric utility 34a is completed. Further, when “1” is set in the support end flag, it means that the number of winnings to the second operation port 34 has already reached the upper limit number. In this case, the normal power open counter and the support end flag are cleared to “0”, and the numerical information of the general power counter is cleared to “0”, and the opening / closing operation of the general utility 34a is ended. In addition, when the numerical information of the general electric utility release counter is “1” or more and the support end counter is not set to “1”, the information on the closing time of the general electric utility 34a is usually displayed. In addition to setting to the electric timer counter, the ordinary power counter is updated from “3” to “4”.

  When the opening / closing operation of the power utility 34a reaches the reference number, or when the number of winnings to the second operating port 34 generated during the current support execution period reaches the upper limit number, the current support execution period is finish.

  Next, a process for closing the power transmission (step S411) in the power transmission control process (FIG. 20) will be described. In the process of closing the ordinary electric power, the process for maintaining the closed state of the electric utility item 34a and making the electric utility item 34a open again when the closing time has elapsed is executed. Specifically, the information on the opening duration for high frequency is set in the normal-use normal power timer counter, and the normal-purpose normal power counter is updated from “4” to “3”.

  Next, in the main CPU 63, based on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 50a, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the first A configuration for specifying whether or not the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 and the second through gate 39 will be described. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42 a to 50 a are input to the main CPU 63.

  The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as a 9-bit parallel interface so that nine types of signals can be handled simultaneously. An area for storing “0” or “1” information according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 8th bit D8. Further, more than 10 types of signals are input to the input port 63a, but in order to limit the number of simultaneously input targets to nine types, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a depends on the driver IC. It is switched through switching control.

  In the entrance detection process (step S211) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), a signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set as a signal group from each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 50a. In such a situation, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning port detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning port detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a. The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6 bits D6 store information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first gate detection sensor 49a. Stored, the eighth bit D8 information corresponding to the detection signal from the second gate detection sensor 50a is stored.

  Each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 50a outputs a LOW level signal indicating that the game ball B1 is not being detected as a detection signal when the passage of the game ball B1 is not detected, and detects the passage of the game ball B1. If it is, a HI level signal indicating that the detection is being performed is output as a detection signal. The input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when the LOW level signal is received, and "1" for the corresponding bit when the HI level signal is received. Stores the information. That is, in the situation where the passing of the game ball B1 is not detected in the ball detection sensors 42a to 50a, information of “0” corresponding to the information indicating that the game bit B1 is not being detected is stored for the corresponding bit. In a situation where passage is detected, information “1” corresponding to information indicating that the bit is being detected is stored.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the entrance detection process executed in step S211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the 0th bit D0 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S901: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S902), and 1 is added to the value of the ten prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S903). . The first output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag. The ten award ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times the ten game balls B1 should be paid out. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, 10 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process in step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), and 10 prize balls are awarded. When the command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls B1 are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of “0” is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the situation in which the information of “1” is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a receives one It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S904: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S905), and 1 is added to the value of the ten prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S906). . The second output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball B1 is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of “0” is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of “1” is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S907: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the third output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S908), and 1 is added to the value of the ten prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S909). . The third output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball B1 is detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the special electricity detection sensor 45a makes one game ball B1. Is detected (step S910: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the special electricity prize flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S911), “1” is set to the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S912), and further The value of the counter for 15 prize balls provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S913). The special power prize flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the special power prize apparatus 32 in the round game in the open / close execution mode. In the special figure special electric control process (step S215) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 18), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the special electric prize winning flag. It is determined that the entry has occurred, and 1 is subtracted from the remaining possible entry number to the special prize winning device 32 in the round game. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of balls that can be entered is executed, the special electricity prize flag is cleared to “0”. The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be executed to the management IC 66. is there. The counter for 15 prize balls is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times to pay out 15 game balls B1. When the value of the counter for 15 prize balls is 1 or more, 15 prize balls are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), and 15 prize balls are received. When the command is output once, the counter value for 15 prize balls is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives 15 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls B1 are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that the game ball B1 is detected (step S914: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S915), and “1” is set to the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S916). Further, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S917). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the first operation port 33. In the special drawing special power control process (step S215) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), it is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a by confirming that “1” is set in the first operation winning flag. On the condition that the number of reserved information being held is less than the upper limit number of four, processing for newly storing the reserved information is executed. In the special electric control process (step S215), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the first operation winning flag, and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to “0”. . The fifth output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag. The one award ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that one game ball B1 should be paid out. When the value of the single prize ball counter is 1 or more, a single prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process in step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), and one prize ball is obtained. When the command is output once, the value of one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives a single prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball B1 is paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the second working port detection sensor 47a It is determined that the game ball B1 is detected (step S918: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S919), and “1” is set to the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S920). Further, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S921). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the second operation port 34. In the special signal special electric control process (step S215) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 18), it is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a by confirming that the second operation winning flag is set to “1”. On the condition that the number of reserved information being held is less than the upper limit number of four, processing for newly storing the reserved information is executed. In the special electric control process (step S215), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the second operation winning flag, and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to “0”. . The sixth output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the sixth bit D6 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. It is determined that B1 is detected (step S922: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S923). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball B1 is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be executed to the management IC 66. It is.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the seventh bit D7 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first gate detection sensor 49a performs one game. It is determined that the sphere B1 has been detected (step S924: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S925). The first gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the first through gate 35. In the ordinary power transmission control process (step S216) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), as already described in FIG. 21, it is confirmed that “1” is set in the first gate winning flag. On the condition that the number of reserved information on the normal map side stored in the general electric power storage area 65c is less than the upper limit number of four, the numerical information of the current general electric utility release counter C4 is displayed The process of storing in the power transmission storage area 65c as the hold information on the side is executed. It is confirmed that “1” is set in the first gate winning flag in the ordinary power control process (step S216), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first gate winning flag is set to “0”. "clear.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the eighth bit D8 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the second gate detection sensor 50a makes one game. It is determined that the sphere B1 has been detected (step S926: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S927). The second gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the second through gate 39. In the ordinary power transmission control process (step S216) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), as already described in FIG. 21, it is confirmed that “1” is set in the second gate winning flag. On the condition that the number of reserved information on the normal map side stored in the general electric power storage area 65c is less than the upper limit number of four, the numerical information of the current general electric utility release counter C4 is displayed The process of storing in the power transmission storage area 65c as the hold information on the side is executed. It is confirmed that “1” is set in the second gate winning flag in the ordinary power control process (step S216), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second gate winning flag is set to “0”. "clear.

  Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is started at a cycle of 4 msec as described above, when detection of one game ball B1 is started by one of the ball detection sensors 42a to 50a, In the situation where the detection of one game ball B1 is continued by the ball detection sensors 42a to 50a, it is the main side that one game ball B1 is detected by the ball detection sensors 42a to 50a. This is performed by the CPU 63. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

  Next, processing contents executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 incorporates a payout-side ROM 93, a payout-side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like in addition to a payout-side CPU 92 that is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit.

  The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The payout-side ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the payout-side CPU 92 and fixed value data.

  The payout-side RAM 94 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the payout side RAM 94 requires a faster time for reading than the payout side ROM 93. The payout-side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout-side ROM 93.

  The payout side CPU 92 can perform bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. When the payout side CPU 92 receives the prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls B1 corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game ball B1 can be normally paid out, and if it is determined that the game ball B1 cannot be normally discharged, the payout side RAM 94 is determined. The payout device 76 is stopped even if the information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a payout limit command indicating that the payout is not normally possible to the main CPU63. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 notify that the game ball B <b> 1 cannot be paid out normally. A notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 so as to be executed. As a state where it is not possible to normally pay out the game ball B1, a state where the lower plate 56a is full with the game ball B1 and a state where there is no ball in which the game ball B1 is not replenished in the tank 75, There are a payout abnormality state in which the payout device 76 does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is released from the inner frame 13. doing.

  A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball B1 passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball B1 is continuously filled when the game ball B1 is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and cancels the state where the game ball B1 is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor. When it is done, it is specified that the full tank state has been released.

  A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball B1 passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball B1 is not detected when the game ball B1 is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and the state where the game ball B1 is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor is released. In this case, it is determined that the ballless state has been released.

  The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the game ball B1 paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball B1 has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball B1 is detected by the payout detection sensor. The payout side CPU 92 is in a payout abnormality state when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect the game ball B1 even though the payout device 76 is driven and controlled so that the game ball B1 is paid out. When the state where the game ball B1 is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released, it is specified that the payout abnormal state is released.

  A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95 and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It specifies that the front door frame 14 is an open state. Also, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main CPU 63 at the timing when the front door frame 14 is determined to be opened from the closed state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is changed from the opened state to the closed state. At this timing, a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 has been opened when the front door opening command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has been closed when the front door closing command is received.

  A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when a closing detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96, and a gaming machine when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It is specified that the main body 12 is open. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it is determined that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state from the closed state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state from the open state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state when receiving a main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when receiving a main body closing command.

  The timer interruption process executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  First, a full tank process is executed (step S1001). In the full tank process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the full tank state is reached based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor. The process is executed and a command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the full tank state is released, a process for enabling the game ball B1 to be paid out is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state has been released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a ball useless process is executed (step S1002). In the ball-free process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball is in the non-ball state based on the detection result of the ball-free detection sensor. And a command indicating that there is no ball is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the no-ball state is released, a process for enabling the game ball B1 to be paid out is executed, and a command indicating that the no-ball state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S1003). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the payout abnormality state is based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor. In addition, a command indicating that the payout is abnormal is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, a process for enabling the game ball B1 to be paid out is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state has been released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S1004). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95. When the front door frame 14 is in the open state, A process for stopping the payout of the game ball B1 is executed, and a front door opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for enabling the game ball B1 to be paid out is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S1005). In the main body opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96. If the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, A process of stopping the payout of B1 is executed, and a main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process for enabling the game ball B1 to be paid out is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a command reading process is executed (step S1006). In the command reading process, a process of reading a prize ball command transmitted by the main CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing a prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the information on the number of unpaid prize balls in the payout side RAM 94 (step S1007), A payout control process for performing payout execution control is executed (step S1008). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and one game ball B1 is detected by the payout detection sensor. When detected, the value of the prize ball number information is decremented by 1. When the value of the prize ball number information becomes “0”, the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S1009).

  Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97. The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, which are some external terminals and a plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some external terminals. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 as described above, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 send information to the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

  One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. In detail, the signal connection board 98 is provided in the middle of the signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout CPU 92 with regard to the configuration of this electrical connection. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from the signal path SL1 from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal for opening the front door in the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, an electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout-side CPU 92 but also to an external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 97. Thus, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

  In detail, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 that branches from the signal path SL3 from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result in the main body opening sensor 96 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92 but also input to the external terminal for opening the main body on the external terminal plate 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

  Next, the contents of information output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of information output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

  In the external information setting process (step S220) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), the main CPU 63 performs output setting of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode, and one game round is completed. And a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls B1 through one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the game ball B1 has been discharged from the first operation port 33, and information indicating that the game ball B1 has entered the second operation port 34. It is.

  In the external information setting process (step S1009) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 28), the payout side CPU 92 performs output setting of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls B1 have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of the payout of the game ball B1 in the pachinko machine 10. For example,
A normal game state that is not a payout rate that is the ratio of the number of payouts of game balls B1 generated until 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10, and is not in the opening / closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode The rate at which the ball is played (hereinafter referred to as “B”)
-Number of games played in the opening / closing execution mode-Number of games played in the high-frequency support mode-Number of game times executed until 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio) To “S”)
B-S × “number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34”
-Number of game balls B1 entering the first operating port 33 that are generated before 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
The number of game balls B1 entering the second operation port 34 that are generated before 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “S2”).
B- (S1 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + S2 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
Etc. are calculated. Thereby, it is possible to manage the entrance mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the corresponding entry part.

<Configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball B1>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball B1 using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the management IC 66. The MPU 62 includes an I / F 101 and a reading terminal 102 in addition to these.

  The I / F 101 is an interface for transmitting / receiving a signal to / from an external device of the MPU 62. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. Detection results from the sensors such as the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 50a and commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I / F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands. As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. As a result of executing various processes by the main CPU 63, when a signal is output to a device such as the special electric drive unit 32b, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101 and the main side As a result of executing various processes by the CPU 63, when a command output is performed to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81, the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

  The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting a reading device that is an external device of the pachinko machine 10 to the MPU 62, and is provided so that a connecting terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. . However, as described above, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is accommodated in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main control apparatus 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the substrate box 60a to expose the MPU 62. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 from being performed illegally. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an opening for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main controller 60 is formed in the substrate box 60a. The reader 102 may be electrically connected to the terminal 102.

  The management IC 66 includes a management-side I / F 111, a management-side CPU 112, a management-side ROM 113, a management-side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117. Each of these devices is connected to be capable of bidirectional communication through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66.

  The management-side I / F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and uses the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. An interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the interface. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I / F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management side I / F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a bidirectional signal path group 120 built in the MPU 62.

  The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management ROM 113 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The management ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management-side RAM 114 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storing and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 can be accessed at random, and when compared with the same data capacity, the management-side RAM 114 requires a faster time for reading than the management-side ROM 113. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113.

  The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, and is configured to always measure date information and time information and output the date information and time information being measured in accordance with an instruction from the management CPU 112. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power source, and it is possible to measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

  The correspondence relationship memory 116 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 stores information on the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

  The history memory 117 is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory (that is, nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information related to the entry of the game ball B1 received from the main CPU 63 through the management-side I / F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

  Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I / F 111 will be described. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111.

  The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p is an input target signal. “0” is stored as the first data when the signal is at the LOW level, and “1” information is stored as the second data when the signal to be input is at the HI level. The relationship between LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

  A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning port detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the first signal of the LOW level in the situation where the new game ball B1 is not detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one first winning opening detection sensor 42a outputs one signal. When the game ball B1 is detected, the HI level first signal is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level first signal is input to the first buffer 122a.

  A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second prize opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball B1 is not detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and one second winning opening detection sensor 43a outputs one signal. When the game ball B1 is detected, the second signal of the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level second signal is input to the second buffer 122b.

  A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a third signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball B1 is not detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, and one signal is output by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the third signal of the HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level third signal is input to the third buffer 122c.

  A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a fourth signal at the LOW level in a situation where no new game ball B1 is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a, and one game ball B1 is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. In this case, the fourth signal of the HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

  A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a fifth signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball B1 is not detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a, and one signal is output by the first operation port detection sensor 46a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the fifth signal at the HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fifth signal is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

  A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a sixth signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball B1 is not detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a, and one second operation port detection sensor 47a outputs one signal. When the game ball B1 is detected, the sixth signal of the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

  A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW-level seventh signal in a situation where a new game ball B1 is not detected by the out-port detection sensor 48a, and one game ball B1 is output by the out-port detection sensor 48a. When detected, the seventh signal of the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the situation that is in the opening / closing execution mode.

  A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at the LOW level when the high frequency support mode is not set, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at the HI level when the high frequency support mode is set.

  A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. And output.

  The sixteenth buffer 122p receives an output instruction signal for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize when the history information stored in the history memory 117 is output to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal in a situation where it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. To do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

  The eleventh buffer 122k, the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, the fourteenth buffer 122n, and the fifteenth buffer 122o can receive signals from the main CPU 63, but the pachinko machine 10 does not receive normal signals. It is blank. As described above, by providing a larger number of buffers 122a to 122p than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10 as the input port 121 of the management I / F 111, It is possible to divert the management IC 66 to a different model from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be enhanced. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p on a one-to-one basis. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118k to 118o may not be formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked.

  It is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111. The management-side CPU 112 receives no instruction from the main-side CPU 63. Can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, what type of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Although the details of the types of these signals in the management side CPU 112 will be described later, when control is started in the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 in accordance with the supply of operating power to the MPU 62, the main side CPU 63 changes to the management side CPU 112. This is done by sending a type identification command. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the various types of signals are specified by the management CPU 112 in a situation where operating power is supplied. Information stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is referred to.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence relationship memory 116 has first to fifteenth correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111. Is provided.

  In the first correspondence relationship area 123a, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. In addition, information indicating the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces) together with information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 in the first correspondence area 123a. ) Is also stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management CPU 112. Further, in the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the general prize opening 31 together with information indicating the general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). ) Is also stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition, information indicating the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces) together with information indicating the general winning opening 31 in the third correspondence area 123c. ) Is also stored.

  In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating the special prize winning device 32 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, together with information indicating that it is a special prize winning device 32, information on the number of game balls B1 paid out when one gaming ball B1 enters the special prize winning device 32 (15 pieces). ) Is also stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating the first working port 33 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. In addition, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the first operation port 33 together with information indicating the first operation port 33 ( 1) is also stored. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second working port 34 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f by the management CPU 112. In addition, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the second operation port 34 together with information indicating the second operation port 34 ( 1) is also stored. In the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating the out port 24a is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  In the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. In the ninth correspondence area 123i, information indicating the high-frequency support mode is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. In the tenth correspondence area 123j, information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

  In the eleventh corresponding relationship area 123k, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k by the management CPU 112. In the twelfth correspondence area 123l, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management CPU 112. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management CPU 112. In the fourteenth correspondence area 123n, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n by the management CPU 112. In the fifteenth corresponding relationship area 123o, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o by the management CPU 112.

  As described above, the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is specified by the management CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The management IC 66 can be used for a different model from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be enhanced.

  In addition, every time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, information for recognizing the signal type is not output, but the signal type is recognized in advance. Information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o based on the output information in the management CPU 112 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This is a configuration. As a result, each time a signal is output, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o output information for recognizing the type of the signal each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output. The amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the output of information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management CPU 112 is performed when the supply of operating power is started. Thereby, in the situation where a game is started in the pachinko machine 10, the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o can be specified by the management CPU 112.

  Further, information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the type of signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is specified for the output instruction signal that is surely used not only for the pachinko machine 10 but also for other types of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. Therefore, it is possible to omit the processing for this. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the processing load of processing for specifying the type of such signal.

  Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pointer information is set in serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in correspondence with each pointer information on a one-to-one basis. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information and correspondence information can be stored. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence information according to the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10) First, the date information and time information measured in the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing the RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the current write target. After that, the corresponding relationship information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time is read from the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the corresponding relationship memory 116, and the read corresponding relationship information. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is currently written.

  Specifically, regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a as described above. Therefore, information corresponding to the types of the incoming detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of the entrance portion corresponding to each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In the pachinko machine 10, since the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a all detect the game ball B1 that has entered the general winning opening 31, as described above, the first to third winning prizes are detected. The first to third correspondence relation areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the mouth detection sensors 42a to 44a store information indicating that they are general winning holes 31. The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special prize winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operation port 33. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored, and in the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating the out port 24a is stored. When the buffer 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time is any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the entrance part corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to first buffers 122a to 122g. The information is read from any one of the seventh correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123g, and the read information on the type of the ball-entry part is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

  On the other hand, a signal indicating whether or not the eighth buffer 122h is in the open / close execution mode is input, a signal indicating whether or not the ninth buffer 122i is in the high frequency support mode is input, and the tenth buffer 122j is A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input. Therefore, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and the tenth correspondence area Information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the situation in the opening / closing execution mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the opening / closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the opening / closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. Then, in both cases where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identifies That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information storage area 125 includes not only the information indicating the opening / closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information. Further, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating that it is the opening / closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information together with the history information storage area 125 Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at the HI level in the situation that is the high frequency support mode. The management CPU 112 identifies that the high frequency support mode has started when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and ends the high frequency support mode when the ninth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. It is possible to specify that Then, in both cases where the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identifies That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high-frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information together with the history information storage area It stores in the area for storing 125 correspondence information. When the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the history information storage area includes not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information. It stores in the area for storing 125 correspondence information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In order to continuously output, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. The management CPU 112 is triggered to store the corresponding information in the history information storage area 125 both when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Identifies That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information. The correspondence information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing. Further, when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information. The correspondence information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing.

  The history information storage area 125 stores all the history information generated during the ten consecutive business days when the game ball B1 is continuously fired in the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. There are as many as possible. For example, if history information is generated 60000 times a day, 600000 or more history information storage areas 125 are provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and retained in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

  The history memory 117 includes a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify pointer information that is currently written in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating pointer information of “0” as a write target is set in the pointer area 126. Each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last-order pointer information and the last-order pointer information is to be written, the pointer is set so that the pointer information “0” becomes the write-target. The information in the service area 126 is updated. As a result, when there is an opportunity to store history information exceeding the number of storable history information, new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage area 125 in which old history information is stored. Become.

  Further, when history information is read from the history memory 117 by the reading device, all the history information storage areas 125 are cleared to “0” and pointer information “0” is to be written. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent history information that has been read once from becoming read again.

  Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball B1 using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 17).

  First, “15” is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1101). The recognizing output counter indicates the remaining necessary number of information outputs for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal each buffer 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I / F 111 corresponds to. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify. As already described, since 15 of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be recognized as signal types, “15” is set in the recognition output counter.

  Thereafter, an output process of the identification start command is executed (step S1102). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order for the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. When this command is output, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) that are used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store the history information. A command output for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize which kind of signal corresponds to .about.122o is performed. As a result, the number of signal paths can be reduced compared to a configuration in which signal paths for performing the command output are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification start command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification start command, the management-side CPU 112 should start processing for storing information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116. Identify.

  Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S1103). In this case, the first buffer 122a becomes the signal type setting target first, and the n + 1th buffer becomes the signal type setting target next to the nth buffer, and then corresponds to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. The signal type recognition setting is performed. Accordingly, if the recognition output counter is “15” to “13”, the type identification command indicating the general winning opening 31 and the number of the winning balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “12”, the special electric prize is received. The type identification command indicating the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “11”, the type identification command indicating the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “10”, it is the second operation port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “9”, it is determined that the output port 24a is. The type identification command is read, and if the recognition output counter is “8”, the type identification command indicating the open / close execution mode is read, and the recognition output counter is read. If “7”, the type identification command indicating the high-frequency support mode is read, and if the recognition output counter is “6”, the type identification command indicating the front door frame 14 is read and the recognition output is output. If the counter is “5” to “1”, a type identification command indicating blank is read.

  Thereafter, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S1104). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity like the identification start command, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output process of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification type command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification type command, the management-side CPU 112 corresponds to the identification type command in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffer to be set this time among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. Store information to be used.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 (step S1105), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1106). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S1106: NO), processing for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed (steps S1103 and S1103). Step S1104).

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S1106: YES), an output process of the identification end command is executed (step S1107). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output process of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification end command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification end command, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is completed. To do.

  Next, management processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started. Note that the processing speed of the management CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main CPU 63, and the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) is started in the main CPU 63. In the management process, the combination of processes after step S1206 is executed 16 times or more before the process is started.

  When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1201: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S1202). The setting target counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffer 122a to 122o that is the target of signal type setting. The first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and then the n + 1th buffer is the signal type setting target next to the nth buffer.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S1204). In the correspondence setting process, the type identification received this time in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. Stores information on the signal type set in the command. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1205).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, or if the process of step S1205 is executed, it is determined whether an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206). If an identification end command has not been received (step S1206: NO), the process returns to step S1203, and on condition that a type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), steps S1204 and S1205 Run the process again.

  If an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206: YES), the processes of steps S1207 and S1208 are repeatedly executed. Although details will be described later in step S1207, a history setting process for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. In step S1208, although details will be described later, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is executed.

  FIG. 35 is a time chart showing how correspondence information between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122o are stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 35A shows a period in which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). b) shows a period in which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 35C shows the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o. FIG. 35 (d) shows the timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S1204) is executed by the management CPU 112. FIG.

  As the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 35 (a). The Further, at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 35B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereafter, at the timing t2, which is the situation where the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped by confirming the above information. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S1201 of the management process (FIG. 34). Thereafter, the output of the identification start command is stopped at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 35A, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t4. Further, at the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 35B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Then, at the timing t5 when the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level. By confirming the information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 35 (d) at the timing of t5. In the correspondence setting process, information indicating the general winning opening 31 and information on the number of winning balls are stored in the first correspondence relationship area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, the output of the type identification command is stopped at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG.

  After that, at the timings t7 to t9, t10 to t12, t13 to t15, and t16 to t18, respectively, Correspondence setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the fifteenth type identification command is completed at the timing from t16 to t18.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 35A, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. Also, at the timing t19, as shown in FIG. 35B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereafter, at the timing t20 when the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 35 (b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level. By confirming the information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management CPU 112 ends at the timing t20 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the output of the identification end command is stopped at the timing of t21 as shown in FIG.

  In order to instruct the management CPU 112 to store the history information, the management CPU 112 recognizes whether the command is output using the ninth signal as described above. Even if the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) used, it is clearly shown to the management CPU 112 that the command is being output. It can be recognized.

  Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S221 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

  First, “10” is set to the management target counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1301). The management target counter specifies in the main CPU 63 whether or not there is a management target that is not specified as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which of the management targets the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed. The management target to be specified by the main CPU 63 as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process is seven entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, The total number of opening / closing execution modes, whether or not the high-frequency support mode is executed, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened or closed. Therefore, first, “10” is set in the management target counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current management target counter value is HI level (step S1302). If it is not the HI level (step S1302: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter is 4 or more, whereby the management target corresponding to the value of the management target counter is seven in-bound detection sensors 42a. -48a is specified (step S1303).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S1304). Specifically, if the value of the management target counter is “10” and corresponds to the first winning mouth detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first output flag. If the value of the management target counter is “9” and corresponds to the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second output flag, and the value of the management target counter is determined. Is “8” and corresponds to the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the third output flag, and the value of the management target counter is “7”. In the case of corresponding to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the fourth output flag, the value of the management target counter is “6”, and the first working port detection sensor 46a. If it corresponds to "5", the fifth output flag is set to "1" Whether the management target counter is “5” and corresponds to the second operating port detection sensor 47a, is “6” set in the sixth output flag? If the value of the management target counter is “4” and corresponds to the out port 24a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the seventh output flag. As described above, “1” is set to the first to seventh output flags in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 26).

  When “1” is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S1304: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. (Step S1305). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter is cleared to “0” (step S1306).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1303, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the HI level has occurred (step S1307). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is “3”, it is determined whether or not a transition to the opening / closing execution mode has occurred, and when the value of the management target counter is “2”, it is high. It is determined whether or not the shift to the frequency support mode has occurred. When the value of the management target counter is “1”, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 has been opened. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1307, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the HI level (step S1308).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1309). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is 4 or more and the current management target is any of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is set. It is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the corresponding signal output state was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S1007) of the management process (FIG. 34) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level. It is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management CPU 112. Further, when the value of the management target counter is “3” and the current management target is the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is “2”. If the current management target is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode has ended, the value of the management target counter is “1”, and the current management target is the front door frame 14. In this case, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. When an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1309: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S1310).

  When a negative determination is made at step S1304, when a process at step S1306 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S1307, when a process at step S1308 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S1309, or step When the processing of S1310 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the management target counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1311). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1312). If the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S1312: NO), the processing from step S1302 is executed on the management target corresponding to the new management target counter value.

  Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S1207 of the management process (FIG. 34).

  First, the number of buffers subject to confirmation in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in a confirmation object counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S1401). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating that it is blank is stored in the first to tenth corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123j as already described, in step S1401, "10" is set in the check target counter. To do.

  Thereafter, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from “0” to “1”. Thus, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1402). In addition, when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth buffer 122j is a check target for numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is a check target for numerical information. .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, RTC information that is date information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1403). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1404). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 and corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S1403 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Also, the correspondence information is read out from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the write target. In addition, when the correspondence information is any one of information indicating that it is an opening / closing execution mode, information indicating that it is a high-frequency support mode, and information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, the above In addition to the correspondence information, start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Note that when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o are the correspondence information readout targets. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “10”, the tenth correspondence area 123j is a target for reading correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123e is correspondence. Information is to be read out.

  When the write process is executed as described above, the value of the confirmation target counter is one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. In the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are displayed. The combination with the corresponding relationship information indicating any of the above is stored as history information. Further, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. And the combination of the correspondence information indicating that it is one of the opening / closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 and the start information is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1405). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1402 or if the process of step S1405 is executed, whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter. It is determined whether correspondence information to be checked is stored (step S1406). Specifically, when the value of the current confirmation target counter is “8” to “10”, information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode is displayed in the corresponding relationship areas 123h to 123j. Since either the information indicating the presence or the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1406.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from “1” to “0”. It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S1407). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1407, RTC information is read in the same manner as in step S1403 (step S1408), and further a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1409). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S1408 is written into the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, the correspondence information is read out from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the write target. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the confirmation target counter is one of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, it corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. In the history information storage area 125, the combination of the RTC information, the correspondence information indicating any one of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 and the end information is stored as history information. It will be in the state. After that, the target pointer update process is executed in the same manner as in step S1405 (step S1410).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1406, a negative determination is made in step S1407, or if the processing in step S1410 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S1411). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1412). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S1412: NO), the processing after step S1402 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 38A shows a period in which a HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 38B shows a HI level signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. FIG. 38C shows a period during which a HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 38D shows a period during which a HI level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j. The period is shown, and FIG. 38E shows the writing timing of history information to the history memory 117.

  At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 38A, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, history information is written in the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 38A, the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level. However, since the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and switching of the LOW level is not an object for storing history information, the timing of t2 in FIG. As shown in e), writing of history information is not executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38A, the first to seventh buffers 122a at the timing t3, the timing t5, the timing t6, the timing t9, the timing t10, the timing t13, and the timing t14, respectively. The output state of the signal input to any of -122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Accordingly, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 38B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes the HI level from the timing t4 to the timing t7. The eighth buffer 122h corresponds to the presence / absence of the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (e), the timing t4 when the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t7 includes end information. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  Also, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is in the open / close execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the open / close execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 38C, the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes the HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high frequency support mode has occurred. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (e), the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the high frequency support mode by confirming the history information in the history memory 117.

  Also, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Accordingly, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is also in the high frequency support mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the high frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 38D, the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j becomes the HI level from the timing t12 to the timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (e), the timing t12 when the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing t15 includes end information. As a result, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is open by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  Also, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Therefore, history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is being opened. It becomes possible to distinguish whether it is a thing. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the door is in the state where the front door frame 14 is being opened.

  Next, a processing configuration for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 17).

  In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is received from the reading terminal 102 (step S1501). The reading apparatus is configured to output a connection signal when electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the connection signal is received through the reading terminal 102, an affirmative determination is made in step S1501. do.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the data output process is terminated as it is. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the MPU 62. Thus, in order to perform external output of history information, it is necessary to start supply of operating power to the MPU 62 in a state where the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. . Since a power supply operation unit for performing a stop operation and a start operation of supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, in order to perform these stop operations and start operations, the outer frame 11 is operated. Thus, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 and expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to output the history information externally, it is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the MPU 62 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for an operator other than the game hall administrator to perform an operation of reading history information.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a control information confirmation signal has been received from the reading terminal 102, whereby the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is determined by the main ROM 64. It is determined whether or not the control information (program and data) is confirmed (step S1502). The reading device is configured to be able to perform both control information confirmation and history information confirmation. When control information confirmation is selected by manual operation on the reading device, the reading device confirms control information. When a signal is transmitted and confirmation of history information is selected by a manual operation on the reading device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the reading device for checking control information and the reading device for checking history are different. In this case, when a reading device for confirming control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for confirming control information is transmitted from the reading device, and reading for history confirmation is performed to the reading terminal 102. When the apparatus is electrically connected, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the reading apparatus.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, output processing for confirming control information is executed (step S1503). In the output process, a program and data are read from the main ROM 64 as control information, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the control information can be read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and it is confirmed whether or not the control information is normal or normal. Can be performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1502, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S1504). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information. This process will be described in detail later.

  When the process of step S1503 is executed, or when the process of step S1504 is executed, it is determined whether the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S1505). If it is continued (step S1505: YES), the process stands by in step S1505. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S1505: NO), the data output process is terminated.

  Next, external output processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output process is executed in step S1208 of the management process (FIG. 34).

  When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1601: YES), processing for outputting history information after step S1602 is executed. Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the outlets 24a in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is stored, The number of entered balls is calculated (step S1602). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, it is possible to enter the general winning opening 31. The number is calculated (step S1603). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the special power prize winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, it is possible to enter the special power prize winning device 32. The number is calculated (step S1604). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the first operating port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of entered balls is calculated (step S1605). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of entered balls is calculated (step S1606).

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating the front door frame 14 An outlet that occurs in a situation where the front door frame 14 is open by referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in a period between the information and the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are calculated (step S1607). The history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are stored, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and A period with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the history information storage area 125 in which the start information is stored, and the correspondence indicating the front door frame 14 When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the number of balls entered for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating start door frame 14 and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 Is stored in the history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the start information are not stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1602 to S1607 (step S1608). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1607 is subtracted from the number of balls calculated in steps S1602 to S1606. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of incoming balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entrances in the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1607 with respect to the number of entrances calculated in step S1602 is defined as the entrance number K1, and the calculation is performed in step S1607 with respect to the number of entrances calculated in step S1603. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 is set as the number K2 of balls entered, and the difference in the number of balls entered in the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1607 with respect to the number of balls entered calculated in step S1604 is defined as the number K3 entered The difference in the number of balls entered in the first working port 33 calculated in step S1607 with respect to the number of balls calculated in step S1605 is defined as the number of balls K4, and the number calculated in step S1606 is calculated in step S1607. The difference in the number of entering balls of the second working port 34 is defined as the number of entering balls K5.
First parameter: Total number of game balls B1 to be paid out (K2 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K4 × “first operating port” Number of prize balls for winning to 33 ”+ K5 ד number of prize balls for winning to the second operation port 34 ”) / total percentage of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) To “D1”)
Second parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls B1 entering the general winning opening 31 K2 / the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5). Third parameter: special prize winning device 32 Total number of game balls B1 entering K3 / Proportion of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5). Fourth parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entering the first operating port 33 K4 / Ratio of the total number (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D2”)
The fifth parameter: the ratio of the total number K5 of the game balls B1 entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of the game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter this ratio is referred to as “D3”) To do)
Sixth parameter: D1- (D2 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
Seventh parameter: (K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K5 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total payout number of game balls B1 (K2 × “ The number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31 + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K5 × “second operating port” Ratio / eighth parameter: K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning the special electricity winning device 32” / the total number of game balls B1 to be paid out (K2 × “to the general winning hole 31”) Number of winning balls for winning ”+ K3 ד Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize device 32 ”+ K4 ד Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33 ”+ K5 ד Award for winning in the second operating port 34 ” The number of balls ”)) Using the oldest RTC information and the newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the memory 117, the total time required until all the history information that has been subjected to the current calculation is extracted is calculated (step S1609). ). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1610). In the first output process, all history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. In addition, the various parameters calculated in step S1608 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1609 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each information to be output in the first output process is read.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored, correspondence information indicating the switching execution mode, and By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the end information and the history information storage area 125, the out port 24a and the general winning port 31 generated in the state of the open / close execution mode are referred to. Then, the number of balls entered into each of the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1611). The history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information and end information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored. Is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored, correspondence information indicating the opening / closing execution mode, and If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the number of balls entered for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating start / close execution mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. When correspondence information and start information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode is not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, correspondence information and start information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode is stored. Any history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is handled in the open / close execution mode.

  Thereafter, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the like that occurred in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state during the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1611. The number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1612). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as in the case of step S1607, except that the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1611 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1611 and S1612 (step S1613). Specifically, first, the number of entered balls generated while the front door frame 14 is opened calculated in step S1612 is subtracted from the number of entered balls calculated in step S1611. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of incoming balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entered balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1612 with respect to the number of entered balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1611 is defined as the number of entered balls K11, and the entry of the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1611. The difference in the number of balls entered at the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1612 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number K12 of balls entered, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1612 with respect to the number of balls entered in the special prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1611. The difference in the number of entering balls 32 is defined as the number of entering balls K13, and the difference in the number of entering balls in the first working port 33 calculated in step S1612 with respect to the number of entering balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1611 is entered. The number K14 is calculated in step S1612 with respect to the number of balls in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1611. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K15 was.
Eleventh parameter: Total number of game balls B1 to be paid out (K12 × “number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K13 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K14 × “first operating slot Number of winning balls for winning 33 ”+ K15 ד number of winning balls for winning to the second operating port 34 ”) / total number of gaming balls B1 discharged from the gaming area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) To “D11”)
The twelfth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls B1 entering the general winning opening 31 K12 / the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) The thirteenth parameter: to the special prize winning device 32 Total number of game balls B1 entering K13 / Ratio of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15). Fourteenth parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entering the first operating port K14 / Ratio of the total number (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) of the game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D12”)
Fifteenth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls B1 entering the second operation port K15 / the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”) To do)
16th parameter: D11− (D12 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D13 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
17th parameter: (K13 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K15 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total payout number of game balls B1 (K12 × “ Number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31 + K13 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K14 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K15 × “Second operating port” Ratio / 18th parameter: K13 × “the number of winning balls for winning the special electricity winning device 32” / the total number of game balls B1 to be paid out (K12 × “to the general winning hole 31”) “Number of winning balls for winning” + K13 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K14 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K15 × “Award for winning in the second operating port 34” ball Then, the second output process is executed (step S1614). In the second output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1613 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information to be output in the second output process is read.

  Thereafter, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the correspondence relationship indicating the high frequency support mode are stored. The out port 24a generated in the situation of the high frequency support mode by referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the information and the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, The number of balls entered into each of the winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1615). In the history area 117 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information and start information indicating the high frequency support mode, the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode, and A period with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the history information storage area 125 in which the start information is stored, and the correspondence indicating the high frequency support mode When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the number of balls entered for the total of the sections is calculated. In addition, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 Is stored in the history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as being in the high frequency support mode.

  After that, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the first operating port 33, which are generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state during the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1615. The number of balls entering each of the second working ports 34 is calculated (step S1616). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that in step S1607, except that the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1615 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1615 and step S1616 (step S1617). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1616 is subtracted from the number of balls entered in step S1615. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of incoming balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entrances of the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1616 with respect to the number of entrances of the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1615 is set as the number of entrances K21, and the entrance of the general winning entrance 31 calculated in step S1615 is obtained. The difference in the number of balls in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1616 with respect to the number of balls is set as the number of balls K22, and the special power prize device calculated in step S1616 with respect to the number of balls in the special power prize device 32 calculated in step S1615. The difference in the number of entering balls 32 is defined as the number of entering balls K23, and the difference in the number of entering balls in the first working port 33 calculated in step S1616 with respect to the number of entering balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1615 is entered. The number is K24 and is calculated in step S1616 with respect to the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1615. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K25 was.
21st parameter: total number of game balls B1 to be paid out (K22 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K23 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K24 × “first operating port” Number of prize balls for winning to 33 ”+ K25 ד number of prize balls for winning to the second operation port 34 ”) / total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) To “D11”)
22nd parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entering the general winning opening 31 K22 / Ratio of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25). 23rd parameter: Special prize winning device 32 Total number of game balls B1 entering K23 / Proportion of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) / 24th parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entering the first operating port 33 K24 / Ratio of the total number (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) of the game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D22”)
25th parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls B1 entering the second operation port K25 / total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D23”) To do)
26th parameter: D21− (D22 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D23 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
Thereafter, a third output process is executed (step S1618). In the third output process, the various parameters calculated in step S <b> 1617 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information to be output in the third output process is read. Thereafter, a clear process is executed (step S1619). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is initialized.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the public train opening lottery, the winning target period for the public train opening lottery is set to occur at intervals of 1 sec. In addition, the random number for opening used in the public power open lottery is numerical information that is cleared to “0” when “1” is added and becomes the maximum value every time the update timing is reached, and the initial value every time one round is made. Is the numerical information to be updated. Further, the game board 24 is provided with an adjusting mechanism 180 that discharges the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 at intervals of 1 sec. For this reason, when the winning possible timing to the 1st through gate 35 has shifted | deviated from the winning object period, it becomes a non-winning continuous period in which the result of losing in the public power open lottery continues. In addition, when the winning possible timing to the first through gate 35 overlaps with the winning target period, the winning continuous period in which the winning of the electric power is consecutive in the electric power opening lottery is made. The transition from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period is performed without notifying the player in advance. In this way, by making the player always expect a winning continuous period that does not know when it will occur, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and provide a novel effect.

  In the opening initial value counter C5 for updating the initial value of the general utility release counter C4, the numerical information is updated by adding “1” every time the update timing comes, and the numerical information is the maximum value. This is a loop counter that is cleared to “0” when The random number initial value update process for updating numerical information in the initial value counter C5 for release is executed in the remaining process of the main process that is executed irregularly and also in the timer interrupt process that is executed periodically. It is the composition which is done. For this reason, it is possible to avoid deviation of numerical information acquired from the opening initial value counter C5 in the initial value update of the general utility opening counter C4 that is periodically performed. Thereby, in the low frequency support mode, the transition from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period can be generated at an appropriate frequency at a timing that is difficult for the player to guess.

  When the transition from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period is performed, the initial value update of the utility utility release counter C4 is postponed once during the winning continuous period. For this reason, the initial value update interval in the winning continuous period becomes longer than the initial value update interval in the non-winning continuous period. By increasing the duration of the winning continuous period without reducing the frequency of occurrence of the winning continuous period, the winning continuous period can be advantageous and attractive to the player. Thereby, the player's expectation for the winning continuous period can be raised, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The possibility that the public power open winning will occur in the low frequency support mode that combines the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period is lower than the possibility that the public power open winning will occur in the high frequency support mode. However, if there is a transition from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, the possibility of the open power win will be greater than the possibility of the open power win in the high frequency support mode. Get higher. In the low-frequency support mode, the system does not notify the player of the timing of transition from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period, so that the utility is open in the low-frequency support mode that combines the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period. While the possibility of winning is lower than the possibility of opening the electric train in the high-frequency support mode, the game increases the player's expectation for the opening of the electric train in the low-frequency support mode. Can be improved.

  The rotating body 183 of the adjusting mechanism 180 is configured to generate a plurality of times at which the taken game ball B1 can be discharged toward the first through gate 35 while the rotating body 183 makes one rotation. By reducing the angle at which the rotator 183 must rotate before the game ball B1 is discharged, the state in which the rotator 183 can take in the game ball B1 can be continued for a long time. Thereby, the probability that the game ball B1 flowing down in the vicinity of the upstream of the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180 is taken into the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the game ball B1 periodically supplied to the first through gate 35 from being lost, and to avoid a situation in which the timing for winning the normal power release is missed during the winning continuous period.

  The recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 have a shape that becomes wider toward the outer edge. Further, only the fourth recess 183e has a size slightly smaller than the sizes of the other recesses 183b to 183d. The distance from the discharge position to the first through gate 35 in the adjustment mechanism 180 is a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, there is a possibility that the discharge start position and the discharge direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the recesses 183b to 183e shift to the left and come off from the first through gate 35. When all of the game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 win the first through gate 35, there is a possibility that the player pays attention only to the game ball B1 taken in the adjustment mechanism 180 and does not pay attention to the discharge. On the other hand, a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 is configured to be detached from the first through gate 35, so that the player's interest is collected until the first through gate 35 is won, and the game Can be improved.

  By setting the discharge start position of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 to a position shifted to the right from directly below the center of the adjustment mechanism 180, the game ball B1 is discharged after being taken into the adjustment mechanism 180. This is a configuration that shortens the time until completion. By shortening the time required for a series of flows of taking in, transporting, and discharging the game ball B1 by the adjusting mechanism 180, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the player's interest will shift to another in the middle of the series of flows. .

  The game ball B1 taken into one of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 and transported from the upper part to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 comes into contact with the discharge right side surface 181g of the discharge protrusion 181e. Since the discharge projecting portion 181e is fixed to the housing portion 181, the game ball B1 taken into and transported by any of the recessed portions 183b to 183e is on the left side of the right side surface 181g for discharge. Cannot move to. The game ball B1 is discharged downward from a certain discharge position. In this way, the game ball B1 fails to be discharged at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, and the game ball B1 that has not been discharged is not transported to the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 180 again. For this reason, the discharge failure of the game ball B1 continues in the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, the same game ball B1 continues to rotate in the adjustment mechanism 180, and the intake and discharge of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 180 will not be delayed.

  The game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 and won in the first through gate 35, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 and removed from the first through gate 35, and not taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from the intake port 185 The game ball B1 that has entered the escape passage 172 can subsequently win either the first working port 33 or the second working port 34. For this reason, even if the adjustment mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35, the number of game balls B1 heading toward the second operation port 34 is insufficient when the winning continuous period is reached in the low frequency support mode. There is nothing.

  The peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191 located on the upper side of the rotating body 183 are configured to be inclined downward toward the rear. For this reason, the game ball B1 that has not been taken in around the inlet 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180 is guided by the inclination of the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191 and is provided behind the inlet 185. The escape passage 172 moves to the passage entrance 171. As a result, the number of game balls B1 that are not taken in can be taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 because the game balls B1 that have not been taken in are stopped near the take-in port 185 or the flow of the game balls B1 upstream of the take-in port 185 are disturbed. It can be prevented from decreasing. It can be avoided that the frequency at which the game ball B <b> 1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 decreases and the player is less interested in the adjustment mechanism 180.

  The acrylic plate 172a fixed in front of the escape passage 172 and the adjustment mechanism 180 existing in front of the escape passage 172 are transparent. For this reason, the player can visually recognize the whereabouts of the game ball B1 after entering the passage entrance 171. Thereby, it can prevent that the flow of the game ball | bowl B1 which a player can grasp | ascertain is interrupted on the way.

  At the passage outlet 173 of the escape passage 172, a game ball B1 discharged from the passage outlet 173 toward the front of the surface of the game board 24, and a game ball B1 flowing down from the front of the surface of the game board 24 Is provided with an exit roof 174 for preventing a collision at the exit of the escape passage 172. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B1 that has been discharged forward from the escape passage 172 at the passage exit 173 returns to the inside of the escape passage 172 again due to a collision.

  When the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the front surfaces 188b to 191b of the blade portions 188 to 191 of the rotator 183 and the rising wall side end surface 182 of the intake port 185 in the intermediate state, the rotator 183 This is a configuration in which an inclination is provided for allowing the game ball B1 to enter the rear passage entrance 171 by using the force of rotating. For this reason, in a state where the game ball B1 is sandwiched, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 183 from being unable to rotate. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a problem occurs during the game, and that it is necessary to take a countermeasure to solve the problem by interrupting the game.

  In addition, the force applied from the front surfaces 188b to 191b to the game ball B1 that is in contact with both the front surfaces 188b to 191b and the standing wall side end surface 182 at the intake port 185 is downward. Has ingredients. Therefore, the game ball B1 in contact with both the front surfaces 188b to 191b and the rising wall side end surface 182 is prevented from being ejected upward, and the game ball B1 at the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180 is prevented. It is possible to prevent the flow from being disturbed. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B1 cannot be taken in and the periodic supply of the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is hindered.

  The accommodation portion 181 of the adjustment mechanism 180 is formed with a discharge protrusion 181e for discharging the game ball B1 taken into the recesses 183b to 183e. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B1 transported down along with the rotation of the rotating body 183 is not successfully discharged and the same game ball B1 continues to rotate. By preventing the frequency at which the game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 and the frequency at which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 from decreasing, the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 180 can be maintained.

  Further, by surely discharging the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 within a certain period, it is possible to prevent the pace at which a new game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from falling. By preventing the frequency at which the game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from decreasing, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 180 is diminished.

  Since the game ball B1 is paid out when the game ball B1 enters any one of the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, the player A game is played while expecting the game ball B1 to enter one of them. In this configuration, the game ball B1 is entered into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as a history target entering unit). When a sphere is generated, history information corresponding to the sphere is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number or frequency of entering the game balls B1 into each history target entry portion in the pachinko machine 10, and use this managed information. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the entrance mode of the game ball B1 into each history target entrance section. In addition, since the history information is stored and held in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the history information.

  All the ball entering portions that discharge the game ball B1 from the game area PA are the execution targets of the history information storage process and the management targets using the history information. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the pitching frequency for an arbitrary history target pitching part using the history information. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls B1 entering each history target entrance portion with respect to the number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA using history information.

  The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball B1 enters the history target entrance portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Thereby, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the entry history of the game ball B1 to the history target entry portion.

  In the history memory 117, not only history information corresponding to the game ball B1 entering the history target entry portion but also history information indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, in the high frequency support mode History information indicating whether or not there is and history information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened are stored. Thereby, it is possible to manage whether or not the game ball B1 enters the history target ball entering unit by distinguishing whether or not each of these situations is present.

  The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to a reading device that is an external device of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the history information is read by the reading device, and it is possible to analyze the entrance mode of the game ball B1 into the history target entrance portion using the read history information.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 102, and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is output to the outside using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program. As a result, the history information can be output to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  It is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is a program or history information, and information on the side corresponding to the specifying result is externally output through the reading terminal 102. Accordingly, in the configuration in which history information is output to the outside using the reading terminal 102 for outputting the program to the outside, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be externally output is the program or the history information. The specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, only necessary information can be read out even when the reading terminal 102 is also used.

  Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified which information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is the program or the history information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration relating to selection of information to be externally output from becoming complicated.

  An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 for storing a program in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 102. As a result, signal paths for the reading terminal 102 can be collected in the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the reading terminal 102.

  The main execution of the process for causing the game ball B1 to be paid out based on the game ball B1 entering the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34. A management CPU 112 is provided separately from the side CPU 63, and processing for storing history information in the history memory 117 is executed by the management CPU 112. As a result, it is possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball B1 into each history target entry portion while preventing the processing load on the main CPU 63 from increasing extremely.

  The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided as the MPU 62 on the same chip. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

  The main-side CPU 63 uses information corresponding to the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a using the signal paths corresponding to the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, and the buffers of the input port 121 of the management IC 66. It transmits to 122a-122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each of the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information on the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

  Information corresponding to whether the main CPU 63 is in the opening / closing execution mode, information corresponding to whether it is in the high frequency support mode, and information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open Is transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using a signal path corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the types of information corresponding to these situations correspond to the buffers 122h to 122j (that is, the signal paths), and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

  The main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (that is, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to the management CPU 112. Thereby, it is not necessary to store the corresponding relationship information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation where the game ball B1 can enter the history target entrance part, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target entrance part can be specified by the management IC 66. It becomes possible to become.

  Correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 by using signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not the game ball B1 has entered the history target entry portion. Thereby, it becomes possible to simplify the structure regarding communication compared with the structure which provides the dedicated signal path | route for transmitting corresponding relationship information.

  The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, information that enables the management target IC 66 to specify the history target entrance portion corresponding to the transmission target information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 each time detection result information of each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted. No need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection results of the respective entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

  When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management CPU 112 without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration related to transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

  The management IC 66 is provided with more buffers than the types of information that need to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 as buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63. It has been. Thereby, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases according to the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration regarding the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, correspondence information indicating the type of the history target entrance portion corresponding to the history information is included in each history information. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the entrance mode of the game ball B1 to each history target entrance part using the read history information.

  In the management IC 66, by using the history information stored in the history memory 117, various parameters (first to eighth, 11-18) corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in a predetermined period are used. , 21 to 26 parameters). This makes it possible to externally output various parameters that are the results of computation using history information.

  Various parameters are calculated in a state where the history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. Thereby, it becomes possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Also, various parameters corresponding to each of the situation in the opening / closing execution mode and the situation in the high frequency support mode are calculated. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the entrance mode of the game ball B1 corresponding to each situation.

  When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clear processing of the history memory 117. As a result, the history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes an object to be stored in the history memory 117, and the history information that should originally be stored is erased by overwriting. Can be made difficult to occur.

  When various parameters are output to the reading terminal 102, history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, when various parameters are read and the entering mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is analyzed, it is possible to refer to not only the various parameters but also the history information that is the basis for the calculation of the various parameters. .

  The management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the frequency which calculates various parameters.

  When the main CPU 63 specifies that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63, various parameters are calculated by the management IC 66. The various parameters of the calculation result are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various parameters can be output to the reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on instructions from the main CPU 63.

  Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is specified by the process at the start of supplying the operating power executed by the main CPU 63, and the reading device is electrically connected. Is specified, output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Thereby, in the situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed by the main CPU 63 or the like, that is, in the situation before the normal processing for proceeding the game is started by the main CPU 63, The calculation of parameters and the external output of various parameters of the calculation results are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation results in a situation where the game ball B1 can enter the history target entry portion, and the processing load of the management IC 66 Can be reduced.

  In a configuration in which when a game ball B1 enters the first working port 33 or the second working port 34, the corresponding external output is performed through the external terminal plate 97, history information is stored in the history memory 117. The Thereby, while using the information externally output through the external terminal plate 97, while easily grasping the number and frequency of entering the game ball B1 into the first working port 33 and the second working port 34, By using the history information stored in the history memory 117, it is possible to accurately grasp the number and frequency of entering the game ball B1 into the history target entry portion.

<Another embodiment in the first embodiment>
-In 1st Embodiment mentioned above, it may be set as the structure which changes the drive aspect of the drive part 184 for an adjustment at a predetermined timing instead of the structure which updates the initial value of the utility utility release counter C4. When the initial value update of the general electric utility release counter C4 is not performed, the winning target period always occurs at a 1 sec cycle. In contrast, for example, the adjustment drive unit 184 rotates the rotating body 183 at the first rotation speed, the second rotation mode rotates the rotating body 183 at the second rotation speed, and the rotating body 183. It is good also as a structure provided with the 3rd rotation mode which rotates this by 3rd rotation speed. Here, the first rotation speed is a rotation speed at which the game ball B1 is supplied to the first through gate 35 at a cycle of 0.8 sec, and the second rotation speed is the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35. This is the rotation speed supplied at a cycle of 1 sec. The third rotation speed is a rotation speed at which the game ball B1 is supplied to the first through gate 35 at a cycle of 1.2 sec.

  In this case, the main CPU 63 includes a switching random number counter having the same configuration as the opening initial value counter C5 instead of the opening initial value counter C5 (FIG. 13). When the winning to the first through gate 35 occurs in the low-frequency support mode, the main CPU 63 uses the numeric information updated by the switching random number counter as any one of the power transmission reservation areas HA1 to HA1. Store in HA4. The main CPU 63 executes the switching determination process for determining whether or not the numerical information acquired from the switching random number counter is the numerical information to be switched stored in the main ROM 64, thereby adjusting the driving unit 184 for adjustment. Determine the switching timing of the rotation mode.

  The switching determination process is executed when a winning to the first through gate 35 occurs in the low frequency support mode. By using the switching determination process, the timing at which the rotation mode of the adjustment drive unit 184 is switched can be set to a random timing. In the switching determination process, the main CPU 63 sequentially switches the rotation mode of the adjustment drive unit 184 in the order of the first rotation mode → the second rotation mode → the third rotation mode → the first rotation mode at each switching timing. .

  Each time the rotation mode of the adjustment drive unit 184 is switched, the relationship between the winning possible timing for the first through gate 35 and the winning target period changes. For example, in the first rotation mode in which the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 with a period of 0.8 sec, when the winning possible timing of the 0.8 sec period does not overlap with the winning target period of the 1 sec period, the public power is released. Outlier results continue in the lottery. Further, in the first rotation mode, when the winning possible timing with a period of 0.8 sec overlaps with the winning target period with a period of 1 sec, the public power open win is won at an interval of once every five times. Since the length of the winning possible timing period is different from the period length of the winning target period, the public power open winning is generated in the 4 sec period which is the least common multiple of the two periods.

  In the second rotation mode in which the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 in a 1 sec cycle, if the winning possible timing in the 1 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning target period in the 1 sec cycle, it has already been described in the first embodiment. In the case where the non-winning continuous period is reached and the winning possible timing in the 1 sec cycle overlaps the winning target period in the 1 sec cycle, the winning continuous period already described in the first embodiment is used.

  In the third rotation mode in which the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 at a cycle of 1.2 sec, when the winning possible timing of the 1.2 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning target period of the 1 sec cycle, Outlier results are continuous. Further, in the third rotation mode, when the winning possible timing with a cycle of 1.2 sec overlaps with the winning target period with a cycle of 1 sec, it is elected to open the public power at an interval of once every five times. Since the length of the winning possible timing period is different from the period length of the winning target period, the public power open winning is generated in the 6 sec period which is the least common multiple of the two periods.

  Since the rotation speed of the rotator 183 is visible from the outside, the player can check the rotation speed of the rotator 183 during the game and know the timing when the rotation mode is switched. In a configuration that does not inform the player when the winning continuous period occurs, by making it possible to grasp the switching timing of the rotation mode, the player's expectation for the winning continuous period is increased each time the rotation mode is switched, and the game Can be improved.

  In addition to the winning continuous period in which a public power open win is generated in a 1 sec cycle in each public power open lottery, it is an interval of 5 times, a period in which a public power open win occurs in a 4 sec cycle, and an interval of 5 times. At the same time, it is possible to generate a period in which a public power open winning is generated with a period of 6 sec. Increasing the variations in the manner in which the public train is won can increase the interest of the game.

  -In 1st Embodiment mentioned above, it may be set as the structure by which it is changed to the structure which updates the initial value of the utility power thing open | release counter C4, and multiple types of winning determination value tables in the power train open lottery are prepared. For example, in the main ROM 64, in addition to the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 in which a winning target period of 24 msec starts in a 1 sec cycle, a first winning determination in which a winning target period of 24 msec starts in a 0.8 sec cycle A value table and a second winning determination value table in which a winning target period of 24 msec is started at a cycle of 1.2 sec may be stored in advance. In the first exchange table, the winning determination values are set to (200 × n−5) to (200 × n), and in the second replacement table, the winning determination values are (300 × n−5) to (300 Xn). Here, the variable n in the first exchange table is a natural number from 1 to 327, and the variable n in the second exchange table is a natural number from 1 to 218.

  In this case, the main CPU 63 includes a switching random number counter having the same configuration as the opening initial value counter C5 instead of the opening initial value counter C5 (FIG. 13). The main-side CPU 63 acquires numerical information updated by the switching random number counter when a winning to the first through gate 35 occurs in the low-frequency support mode, and the switching determination process described above using the numerical information. Execute. By the switching determination process, the switching timing of the winning determination value table used for the public power open lottery is determined.

  By using the switching determination process, the switching timing of the winning determination value table used for the public power open lottery can be set to a random timing. In the switching determination process, the main CPU 63 performs the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 → the first winning determination value table → the second winning determination value table → the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 in each order at the switching timing. Then, the winning judgment value table used for the public train opening lottery is switched.

  Each time the winning determination value table used for the public train opening lottery is switched, the relationship between the winning possible timing for the first through gate 35 and the winning target period changes. For example, when the first winning judgment value table is used for the public electric open lottery and the winning target period occurs at a cycle of 0.8 sec, the winning possible timing of the 1 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning target period of the 0.8 sec cycle The result of losing in the public power open lottery continues. Further, when the first winning determination value table is used, when the winning possible timing in the 1 sec period overlaps with the winning target period in the 0.8 sec period, the public power open winning is performed at an interval of once every five times. Since the length of the winning possible timing period is different from the period length of the winning target period, the public power open winning is generated in the 4 sec period which is the least common multiple of the two periods.

  In the case where the low frequency winning determination value table T1 is used for the public train opening lottery and the winning target period occurs in a 1 sec cycle, if the winning possible timing in the 1 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning target period in the 1 sec cycle, The non-winning continuous period already described in the first embodiment and the winning continuous period already described in the first embodiment described above when the winning possible timing of the 1 sec period overlaps the winning target period of the 1 sec period Become.

  When the second winning judgment value table is used for the open lottery for public trains, and the winning target period occurs at a cycle of 1.2 sec, the winning possible timing of the 1 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning target period of the 1.2 sec cycle , The result of losing in the public train lottery continues. Further, when the second winning determination value table is used, when the winning possible timing of 1 sec period overlaps with the winning target period of 1.2 sec period, the public power open winning is performed at an interval of once every five times. Since the length of the winning possible timing period is different from the period length of the winning target period, the public power open winning is generated in the 6 sec period which is the least common multiple of the two periods.

  In addition to the winning continuous period in which a public power open win occurs every 1 sec in each public power open lottery, there are 5 intervals, a period in which a public power open win occurs in a 4 sec cycle, and an interval of 5 times and 6 sec. It is possible to generate a period in which a public power open winning is generated in a cycle. Increasing the variations in the manner in which the public train is won can increase the interest of the game.

  Further, for example, the main ROM 64 has a third replacement table in which the winning determination values are set to (250 × n−105) to (250 × n−100), and the winning determination value is (250 × n−). 205) to (250 × n−200) and the fourth replacement table may be stored in advance. Every time the numerical information is updated in the general electric utility release counter C4, it is used for the public electric open lottery in the order of the low-frequency winning determination value table T1, the third exchange table, and the fourth exchange table. The winning judgment value table is switched. Thus, the winning continuous period and the non-winning continuous period can be created by shifting the winning target period without changing the initial value of the general utility release counter C4.

  In the first embodiment described above, the frequency at which the utility power is released per unit time in the electrified continuous period of the low frequency support mode is higher than the frequency at which the utility power is released per unit time in the high frequency support mode. It is good also as a low structure. And you may raise the frequency that a winning continuous period generate | occur | produces in low frequency support mode. For example, in a series of opening / closing operations of the public utility item 34a executed by the public power open winning in the winning continuous period, the total time of the open state may be reduced. Specifically, in a series of opening and closing operations, a method of reducing the number of times of opening, a method of shortening the opening time of one time, and a method of extending the closed state during a series of opening and closing operations are used alone or in combination. Thus, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the utility power is released per unit time during the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode.

  In addition, when the open-and-open winnings occur continuously during the winning continuous period, a series of opening and closing operations based on one open-and-opening operation is performed, and then a series of opening and closing operations based on the next open-and-opening winning operation is performed. By using a method of increasing the time until the operation is performed, the frequency of the open state of the electric power per unit time can be reduced during the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode.

  In addition, for example, by increasing the frequency at which the initial value update of the utility utility release counter C4 is performed, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the winning continuous period occurs in the low frequency support mode. Specifically, by adopting a configuration in which the initial value update is performed at the timing when the utility utility release counter C4 makes a half turn, the frequency of occurrence of the winning target period can be increased. When the winning period is reached, the initial value update of the utility utility counter C4 is sent off three times, so that only the frequency of occurrence of the winning period can be determined without changing the length of the winning period. Can be increased.

  It is possible to reduce the frequency at which the utility power is opened per unit time in one winning continuous period, and to increase the frequency at which the winning continuous period occurs in the low frequency support mode. For this reason, in the low-frequency support mode that combines the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period, the winning continuous period can easily occur without changing the frequency at which the power transmission is released per unit time. Can give an impression to the player. Thereby, in the low frequency support mode, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the winning continuous period that the winning continuous period may occur.

  In the first embodiment described above, the relationship between the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode is such that the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode is higher than that in the high frequency support mode. It is not limited to the relationship that winning a prize is likely to occur. In the low-frequency support mode, the public power open lottery will occur continuously in the open-lot lottery, while in the high-frequency support mode, the open power lottery will have a probability of approximately 3/5 in the open base lottery. Will occur. In the high-frequency support mode, a series of opening / closing operations in which the power utility item 34a is opened for 1 sec and closed for 1 sec are repeated five times, triggered by one electrification of opening of the ordinary electric power. On the other hand, for example, in the electrification continuous period of the low frequency support mode, a series of opening / closing operations in which the utility appliance 34a is opened for 0.8 sec and closed for 1 sec is repeated three times. The possibility that a winning for the second operating port 34 occurs in the high-frequency support mode may be higher than the possibility that a winning for the second operating port 34 occurs in the winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode. it can. Thereby, while maintaining the superiority of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode, the expectation that a winning to the second operating port 34 will occur in the low-frequency support mode is extremely low. Can be avoided.

  In addition, for example, in the electrification continuous period of the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is set by repeating a series of opening and closing operations in which the utility appliance 34a is opened for 1 sec and closed for 1 sec. Thus, the possibility of winning a prize at the second operating port 34 can be made comparable to the possibility of winning a prize at the second operating port 34 in the low frequency support mode. As a result, even during the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, the player can launch the game ball B1 while expecting that a winning to the second operating port 34 will occur as much as in the high frequency support mode. The operation can be performed.

  It should be noted that the relationship between the possibility of winning the second operating port 34 in the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode and the possibility of winning in the second operating port 34 in the high frequency support mode. The parameter for adjustment is not limited to the opening time and the number of times of opening of the general electric utility 34a. For example, as the parameter, the probability of winning the power transmission in the low-frequency support mode public power lottery, the probability of winning the power transmission in the high-frequency support mode, and the like may be adjusted.

  -In 1st Embodiment mentioned above, it is good also as a structure with which only one type of support mode supports the winning combination to the 2nd operation port 34 of the game ball | bowl B1 by the general electric utility 34a. Specifically, the main ROM 64 stores only one winning determination value table in which a winning determination value that is a target of a public power opening lottery in the public power opening lottery is set. In the corresponding winning determination value table, (250 × n−9) to (250 × n) are set as winning determination values to be subject to the public power open winning. Here, the variable n is a natural number of 1 to 262. In this configuration, the probability of winning the public power open in the public power open lottery is approximately 1/25. The winning target period in which the winning determination value that is the target of the public train opening winning is generated at a cycle of 1 sec and continues for 40 msec. In this configuration, it is a non-winning continuous period and the state where the public power open lottery is not selected in the public power open lottery, and the state where it is a winning continuous period and the public power open lottery is continuously generated in the public power open lottery There are two possible states. Regarding the support by the electric power utility 34a, the player's expectation for the winning continuous period is raised by limiting the period advantageous to the player only to the winning continuous period, and the winning continuous period is always maintained by the player. Can make you conscious. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

  -In 1st Embodiment mentioned above, it is good also as a structure by which the discharge guard part which surrounds the outer edge of the rotary body 183 also in the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 is formed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with the escape passage for discharge which escapes the game ball B1 pinched | interposed when the adjustment mechanism 180 is discharged to the back of the game board 24. FIG. Specifically, a discharge port through which the game ball B <b> 1 can pass is formed in the discharge guard portion formed along the outer edge of the rotating body 183 at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180. The game ball B1 taken into the recesses 183b to 183e in the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 180 is discharged from the discharge port of the discharge guard part in the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180.

  When the game board 24 is ejected from the adjustment mechanism 180 behind the front surface of the game board 24, the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the side surface of the discharge port and any one of the blade portions 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183. A discharge escape passage is provided for escape. Further, a discharge passage entrance is formed on the surface of the game board 24 in the vicinity of the discharge port as an opening that allows the game ball B1 sandwiched during discharge to enter the discharge escape passage.

  The discharge escape passage communicates with the escape passage 172. The left end face of the discharge port in the discharge guard portion is inclined leftward toward the rear. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is discharged from the discharge port and is sandwiched between the rotating body 183 and the discharge guard part, the rotating game body 183 rotates so that the sandwiched game ball B1 is Extruded backwards. The pushed game ball B1 passes through the discharge passage entrance and enters the discharge escape passage. The game ball B1 passes through the escape passage 172 and is discharged from the passage outlet 173.

  By adopting a configuration that uses a discharge escape passage, even if a discharge guard portion is provided at the bottom of the adjustment mechanism 180, a situation in which the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the rotating body 183 and the discharge guard portion is prevented. can do. By configuring the game ball B1 to be discharged from the discharge port of the discharge guard portion, the game ball B1 can be directed toward the first through gate 35 and discharged.

  In the first embodiment described above, a gap is provided between the rotating body 183 and the standing walls 181c and 181d so that the game ball B1 cannot enter, and the movement of the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 is visually recognized from the gap. It may be possible. In this case, it is possible to use an opaque material for the rotating body 183 and the standing walls 181c and 181d. By increasing the degree of freedom of material selection, it is possible to select a material that matches the cost and design.

  -In 1st Embodiment mentioned above, it is good also as a structure by which the initial value update of the public utility accessory release counter C4 is performed similarly to a non-winning continuous period even if it becomes a winning continuous period. Specifically, “1” is not set in the see-off flag 65d even if the public power open winning is generated three times continuously in the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode. For this reason, at the initial value update timing that is first reached after the winning continuous period, the initial value update of the universal utility release counter C4 is executed, and the winning continuous period ends. Compared with the configuration in which the initial value update of the utility power release counter C4 is not sent off during the winning continuous period, the expectation for winning a prize to the second operating port 34 is set in the low frequency support mode by setting the winning continuous period short. However, the superiority of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode can be maintained.

  In the first embodiment described above, the initial value update of the utility utility release counter C4 that is sent off when “1” is set in the send-off flag 65d is not limited to once. When “1” is set in the see-off flag 65d, the initial value update of the utility utility release counter C4 may be seen multiple times. When the winning continuous period is reached, the player wins the winning success lottery and increases the possibility of shifting to the big winning state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the winning continuous period.

  When “1” is set in the see-off flag 65d, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a big hit result is obtained in the winning / losing lottery and the initial value update of the utility utility release counter C4 is postponed until the big hit state is entered. In the low frequency support mode, when the public power open winning is generated three times in succession, “1” is set in the see-off flag 65d, and the see-off flag 65d is cleared to “0” when shifting to the big hit state. . Thereby, when it is a winning continuous period, the player can be sure of the transition to the jackpot state. By making the winning continuous period attractive to the player, it is possible to expect a transition to a big hit state even in the low frequency support mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

  When the total number of winning times to the first working port 33 and the second number of winning times to the second operating port 34 is counted during a period in which “1” is set in the see-off flag 65d, and the total number exceeds the reference value Further, the configuration may be such that the see-off flag 65d is cleared to “0”. As a result, when the winning continuous period is reached, the winning more than the reference number of times to the operation ports 33 and 34 is secured. The winning continuous period should be attractive to the player by avoiding the winning continuous period from ending with a small number of winnings to the operating ports 33 and 34 in spite of the winning continuous period. Can do.

  A configuration may be adopted in which the number of times that the initial value update of the utility utility release counter C4 is postponed based on the fact that “1” is set in the postponing flag 65d is random. For example, when the initial value update timing is reached in a state where “1” is set in the see-off flag 65d, a lottery for determining whether or not to continue the winning continuous period may be performed. By making the player aware of the possibility that the winning continuous period will continue for a long time, the player's interest in the winning continuous period can be increased.

  In the first embodiment described above, the fact that the main CPU 63 has entered the winning continuous period triggered by the occurrence of a single winning to the first through gate 35 in the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode. It is good also as composition to grasp. As already described in the first embodiment, in the non-winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode, the public power open winning is not generated based on the winning to the first through gate 35. On the other hand, the probability of winning the public power open in the public power open lottery based on the winning to the second through gate 39 is about 1/42. When the main CPU 63 detects a winning to the first through gate 35 by the first gate detection sensor 49a in the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, the see-off flag 65d is also based on the one winning. Is set to “1”, and “1” is not set in the see-off flag 65d when the second gate detection sensor 50a detects a winning to the second through gate 39. For this reason, even when winning to the second through gate 39 is accidentally continued, it is possible to avoid setting “1” to the see-off flag 65d based on the winning.

  In the first embodiment described above, there is a case where the instruction to operate the game ball launching device is aimed at the first through gate 35 and the game ball launching device is operated aiming at the second through gate 39. It is good also as a structure which may instruct | indicate. For example, in the low-frequency support mode, when a winning to the second through gate 39 is detected by the second gate detection sensor 50a, a left-handed instruction command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. The sound emission control device 81 that has received the left-handed support command transmits a command to the display control device 82, thereby prompting the player to operate the game ball launching device aiming at the first through gate 35. The information is displayed on the display surface 41a of the display device 41. In addition, the sound emission control device 81 controls the speaker unit 54 to execute sound output that prompts the player to operate the game ball launching device aiming at the first through gate 35.

  In the high-frequency support mode, when a winning to the first through gate 35 is detected by the first gate detection sensor 49a, a right-handed instruction command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. The voice light emission control device 81 that has received the right-handed support command transmits a command to the display control device 82, thereby prompting the player to operate the game ball launching device aiming at the second through gate 39. The information is displayed on the display surface 41a of the display device 41. In addition, the sound emission control device 81 controls the speaker unit 54 to execute a sound output with a content prompting the player to operate the game ball launching device aiming at the second through gate 39.

  When the main CPU 63 shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, the main CPU 63 launches the game ball aiming at the second through gate 39 by transmitting the above-mentioned right-handed instruction command to the sound emission control device 81. When the player is prompted to operate the device and when the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the first through gate is transmitted by transmitting the left-handed support command described above to the sound emission control device 81. The player is prompted to operate the game ball launcher aiming at 35. In this way, by notifying the operation mode of the game ball launching device that is advantageous for the player, even if an unfamiliar player operates the game ball launching device, the winning continuous period, the high frequency support mode, etc. It can be set as the structure which can enjoy game content.

  -In 1st Embodiment mentioned above, when main side CPU63 grasps | ascertains a winning continuous period, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports to a player that it is a winning continuous period. As already described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 63 determines that the winning continuous period has been reached in the non-winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode when the public power open winning has occurred three times consecutively. To grasp. In this case, the main CPU 63 transmits a continuous notification command to the sound emission control device 81. The sound emission control device 81 that has received the continuous notification command controls the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 and transmits a command to the display control device 82, so that a winning continuous period is reached for the player. Inform you. For example, a direct notification may be made by explicitly indicating that the winning continuous period has been reached and prompting the first through gate 35 to operate the game ball launching device. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs indirect alerting | reporting by changing the background in the display surface 41a of the symbol display apparatus 41. FIG.

  In addition, when the winning continuous period is reached, the main CPU 63 transmits a continuous effect command to the sound emission control device 81 so that the sound emission control device 81 knows that it is a winning continuous period. As good as The main CPU 63 transmits a continuous end command to the sound emission control device 81 when the winning continuous period ends. When the sound emission control device 81 receives the continuous end command, it recognizes that the winning continuous period has ended. When the sound emission control device 81 receives the variation command and the type command from the main CPU 63 during the period from the reception of the continuous effect command to the reception of the continuous end command, the game light effect is won. Change to one for continuous period.

  In this way, the winning continuous period is appealed not only by the movement of the electric utility 34a but also by using the display light emitting part 53, the speaker part 54, and the symbol display device 41 to appeal the winning continuous period. Can impress people. By making the winning continuous period conscious in the low frequency support mode, it is possible to avoid boring of the player in the low frequency support mode and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the first embodiment described above, the winning lottery performed using the winning at the second operating port 34 as a trigger is more advantageous to the player than the winning lottery performed using the winning at the first operating port 33 as a trigger. It is good. And it is good also as a structure by which the hold information acquired by winning to the 2nd operation port 34 is digested preferentially rather than the hold information acquired by winning to the 1st operation port 33. FIG. The configuration will be specifically described below.

  When a winning to the first operating port 33 occurs, a combination of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is used as the first lottery hold information for use in the first winning lottery. To be acquired. In addition, when a winning to the second operation port 34 occurs, the combination of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is held for the second lottery to be used for the second winning lottery. Obtained as information. In the hold storage area 65a, the second lottery hold information is stored in a different area from the first lottery hold information. If at least one of the first lottery hold information and the second lottery hold information is stored at the winning lottery execution timing, the second lottery based on the second lottery hold information is It is executed in preference to the lottery per one. When the winning lottery based on the winning at the first operating port 33 is won, the system shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the winning to the special electricity winning device 32 is possible. Similarly, when the winning lottery based on the winning at the second operating port 34 is won, the system shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the winning to the special electricity winning device 32 is possible. The type of jackpot result set in the allocation table used for the second winning lottery is more advantageous to the player than the type of jackpot result set in the allocation table used for the first winning lottery It has become.

  In this configuration, as already described in the first embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35, and in the low frequency support mode, the non-winning continuous period or the winning continuous period Become. The possibility of winning the operating ports 33 and 34 in the low-frequency support mode that combines the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period is the possibility that the operating ports 33 and 34 will win in the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the player's expectation that a winning in the operation ports 33 and 34 will occur is also low. However, during the winning consecutive period, the support by the electric utility 34a is easily performed, so that the possibility of winning a prize to the second working port 34 increases. And the said structure is a structure which becomes more advantageous for a player when the winning to the 2nd operating port 34 generate | occur | produces than the case where the winning to the 1st operating port 33 generate | occur | produces. For this reason, even in the low-frequency support mode, the player may be able to enjoy a large profit due to the occurrence of the winning continuous period. By increasing the player's expectation for the winning consecutive period, in the low frequency support mode, the player's expectation that a winning to the second operating port 34 will occur can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  First, the structure of the game board 210 in this embodiment is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 41 is a front view of the game board 210 showing the first through gate 35 and the configuration above the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 41, in the game board 210 of the present embodiment, an adjustment mechanism 220 is provided above the first through gate 35 in place of the adjustment mechanism 180 in the first embodiment. The adjustment mechanism 220 adjusts the timing at which the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the adjusting mechanism 220 includes a rotating body 230 that conveys the game ball B1 (FIG. 3) taken in the adjusting mechanism 220 from the upper part to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 220, and the rotating body 230 rotates. The adjustment driving unit 184 already described in the first embodiment and the game ball B1 that accommodates the rotating body 230 and is transported to the discharge position by the rotating body 230 are rotated. And a housing 250 for preventing the centrifugal force from being discharged outward before reaching the discharge position.

  The adjustment mechanism 220 discharges the game ball B <b> 1 captured at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 220 toward the first through gate 35 located below the adjustment mechanism 220. As shown in FIG. 41, the distance from the lower end of the adjustment mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the adjustment mechanism 220 is provided at a distance approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the first through gate 35 and the game ball B1. Then, in the course of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 toward the first through gate 35, a part of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 is prevented from winning the first through gate 35. A distribution nail 271 is provided.

  The distribution nail 271 is provided so as to protrude forward 6 mm from the front surface of the game board 210. Therefore, out of the 11 mm diameter game balls B1 flowing down the game area PA (FIG. 3) having a length dimension of 18 mm in the front-rear direction, the game balls B1 flowing down near the game board 24 collide with the sorting nail 271. As a result, the game ball B1 flowing down near the window panel 52 wins the first through gate 35 without colliding with the sorting nail 271.

  The configuration of the adjustment mechanism 220 will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 includes a plate-like base body 251 used for fixing the housing 250 to the game board 210. FIG. 42A is a plan view of the housing 250 shown by cutting right above the adjustment mechanism 220. As shown in FIG. 42A, the game board 210 includes a fixing recess 211 that can accommodate the base body 251 without a gap. The adjustment mechanism 220 is fixed to the game board 210 by nailing the four corners of the base body 251 as shown in FIG. 41 in a state where the base body 251 is accommodated in the fixing recess 211. In a state where the adjustment mechanism 220 is fixed to the game board 210, the front surface of the base body 251 exists on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 210.

  As shown in FIG. 41, a housing space for housing the rotating body 230 is formed in the housing 250, and the rotating body 230 is disposed in the center of the housing space. Behind the base body 251, the adjustment driving unit 184 already described in the first embodiment is disposed. The output shaft 184 a of the adjustment drive unit 184 extends in a direction orthogonal to the front surface of the game board 210 from the front surface of the adjustment drive unit 184 toward the front.

  The base body 251 is formed with a through hole (not shown) through which the output shaft 184a is inserted. The rotating body 230 is coupled to the output shaft 184a so that the axis of the rotating body 230 is positioned on the same straight line as the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184. When the adjustment drive unit 184 is in the drive state, the rotator 230 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 90 ° in 1 second.

  In the adjustment mechanism 220, the rotating body 230 rotates, so that the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 at the upper part of the accommodation space is conveyed to the lower part of the accommodation space. The adjustment mechanism 220 is in a state in which one game ball B1 can be discharged each time the rotating body 230 makes a quarter rotation. That is, the adjustment mechanism 220 can supply the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 in a 1-sec cycle, similarly to the adjustment mechanism 180 in the first embodiment.

  By generating the winning possible timing already described in the first embodiment in a 1 sec cycle, it is possible to generate a non-winning continuous period when the winning possible timing does not overlap with the winning target period of the open-air lottery. In the case where the winning possible timing overlaps with the winning target period, the winning continuous period can be generated.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 includes upright walls 252, 253, and 261 for defining an accommodation space in which the rotating body 230 is accommodated. A plurality of upright walls 252, 253, and 261 are formed on the base body 251 so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the base body 251. As shown in FIG. 42A, the upright walls 252, 253, and 261 exist from the front surface of the base body 251 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52. The standing walls 252, 253, and 261 are formed in such a manner as to surround the rotating body 230 with a space from the outside of the peripheral surface of the rotating body 230. The distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to each of the standing walls 252, 253, and 261 is constant, and the accommodation space is divided into a circular shape by the standing walls 252, 253, and 261.

  FIG. 43 is a front view of a single rotating body 230 shown separately from the adjusting mechanism 220. As shown in FIG. 43, the rotator 230 is a substantially disk-shaped resin member, and there are four step portions that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction on the peripheral surface of the rotator 230. Here, the step surfaces 241a to 244a of the four step portions are in the order of the first step surface 241a → the second step surface 242a → the third step surface 243a → the fourth step surface 244a in the rotation direction of the rotating body 230. Are lined up like The four step surfaces 241a to 244a project in the radial direction of the rotating body 230, and the projecting dimensions of the four step surfaces 241a to 244a are substantially the same as the radius of the game ball B1.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the rotator 230 has a side inside the first step surface 241a (side closer to the center of the rotator 230) and an outside of the second step surface 242a (side far from the center of the rotator 230). A second support surface 242 connecting the inner side of the second step surface 242a and the outer side of the third step surface 243a. It has. Further, the rotating body 230 includes a third support surface 243 that connects the inner side of the third step surface 243a and the outer side of the fourth step surface 244a, and the inner side of the fourth step surface 244a. A fourth support surface 244 connecting the side and the outer side of the first support surface 241 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 43, each of the support surfaces 241 to 244 is a curved surface formed to bulge outward. In each of the support surfaces 241 to 244, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the support surfaces 241 to 244 gradually decreases as the rotation direction (clockwise) advances from the front side to the rear side. For example, the first support surface 241 will be specifically described as an example. As shown in FIG. 43, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the first support surface 241 is the second step surface 242a which is the front side in the rotation direction. It is long on the side and gradually shortens toward the first step surface 241a side on the rear side in the rotation direction.

  As shown in FIG. 41, any one of the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotator 230, step surfaces 241a to 244a located at the rear ends in the rotation direction on the support surfaces 241 to 244, and the rotator 230 are accommodated. The space defined by the upright walls 252, 253, and 261 that define the storage space has a shape and size that can store the game ball B 1.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the left side of the circular storage space is partitioned by a left standing wall 261, and the lower right side of the storage space is partitioned by a lower right standing wall 253. The left standing wall 261 and the lower right standing wall 253 are integrally formed with the base body 251. The lower right standing wall 253 includes a rotation shaft 254 at the upper end of the lower right standing wall. The pivot shaft 254 extends forward in a manner orthogonal to the front surface of the base body 251. The upper right portion of the accommodation space is partitioned by an upper right upright wall 252 that is an independent member that is not fixed to the base body 251. The upper right erected wall 252 is connected to the lower right erected wall 253 in such a manner that the upper right erected wall 252 can be rotated around the rotation shaft 254 to a certain angle.

  FIG. 42 (b) is a front view of the housing 250 that shows an enlarged view around the rotation shaft 254. As shown in FIG. 42 (b), in the portion where the lower right standing wall 253 and the upper right standing wall 252 are connected, the upper right standing wall 252 is centered around the turning shaft 254 on the right side of the turning shaft 254. A gap is provided that allows it to rotate clockwise. For this reason, when a rightward force is applied to the upper right erected wall 252 from the outside, the upper right erected wall 252 can rotate clockwise about the rotation shaft 254. On the other hand, on the left side of the rotation shaft 254, there is no gap that allows the upper right upright wall 252 to rotate counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 254.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (b), the state in which the upper right upright wall 252 cannot be rotated further counterclockwise (leftward in FIG. 42 (b)) is defined as an initial state. The upper right upright wall 252 rotates clockwise up to approximately 15 ° to the displacement position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. When the upper right standing wall 252 rotates from the initial position to the displacement position, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper right standing wall 252 is extended.

  The upper right upright wall 252 is located at an initial position when no force is applied from the outside, and rotates to the displacement position around the rotation shaft 254 when a force is applied from the outside in the right direction. When the external force is removed, the upper right upright wall 252 rotated to the deformed position by the external force rotates counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 254 by its own weight and returns to the initial position.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the upper side of the accommodation space is partitioned by a left standing wall 261 and an upper right standing wall 252. The left standing wall 261 and the right standing wall 252 are separated from each other directly above the rotating body 230, and the intake 262 for taking the game ball B1 into the accommodation space between the two standing walls 252 and 261. It has become. In order to be able to take in the game balls B1 flowing down from above one by one, the lateral width of the take-in port 262 is set slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls B1.

  Since the upper right standing wall 252 defining the right end of the intake port 262 can rotate around the rotation shaft 254 from the initial position to the displacement position, the intake port 262 is deformed as necessary, The adjustment mechanism 220 can easily enter the game ball B1. A mode in which the adjustment mechanism 220 takes the game ball B1 from the take-in port 262 will be described later.

  The game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 is conveyed from the upper part to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 220 while contacting any one of the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230. The support surfaces 241 to 244 in the rotating body 230 will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, and the third support surface 243 are inclined toward the axial center toward the front. Therefore, the game ball B1 conveyed while contacting any one of these three support surfaces 241 to 243 is located on the front side (window panel 52 side) of the game area PA (FIG. 3). On the other hand, the 4th support surface 244 inclines to the axial center side toward back. Therefore, the game ball B1 conveyed while being in contact with the fourth support surface 244 is positioned on the rear side (base body 251 side) of the game area PA.

  As described above, the game balls discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 are made different in the position in the front-rear direction taken by the game ball B1 being conveyed according to the support surfaces 241 to 244 that are in contact with each other in the adjustment mechanism 220. The position of B1 in the front-rear direction can be different. As described above, the distance from the lower end of the adjustment mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1, and the path of the course that is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 and heads toward the first through gate 35. In the middle, a distribution nail 271 that protrudes to a middle position in the front-rear direction of the game area PA is provided.

  A game ball B1 that is taken into the adjusting mechanism 220 from the intake port 262, moved in the rotational direction while being in contact with the first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, or the third support surface 243 (FIG. 41). Flows down toward the first through gate 35 on the front side of the game area PA.

  44 (a) and 44 (c) are cross-sectional views of the window panel 52 and the game board 210 when a portion perpendicular to the distribution nail 271 is cut in a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 210. FIG. ), (D) are front views of the gaming board 210 showing the periphery of the adjusting mechanism 220 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 44A, the game ball B1 flowing down the front side of the game area PA does not collide with the sorting nail 271 and flows down in front of the sorting nail 271. Then, the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 as shown in FIG. 44 (b).

  On the other hand, as already described in FIG. 41, when the fourth support surface 244 is positioned upward, the fourth support surface 244 is inclined downward with the fourth support surface 244 facing rearward. It has an inclination to make the surface. For this reason, the game ball B1 that is taken into the adjusting mechanism 220 from the take-in port 262 and moves in the rotational direction while being in contact with the fourth support surface 244 is discharged to the first through gate 35 on the back side of the game area PA. Flow down. As shown in FIG. 44 (c), the game ball B 1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA collides with the right side of the sorting nail 271. As shown in FIG. 44 (d), the game ball B1 is bounced back to the right by the sorting nail 271 and therefore does not win the first through gate 35.

  The probability that the game ball B1 taken in from the take-in port 262 is conveyed to the discharge passage 264 while being in contact with the first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, or the third support surface 243 is 3/4, The probability that the taken game ball B1 is conveyed to the discharge passage 264 while being in contact with the fourth support surface 244 is ¼. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 wins the first through gate 35 with a probability of approximately 3/4 and collides with the sorting nail 271 with a probability of approximately 1/4. Release from the gate 35.

  Next, the configuration around the intake port 262 in the adjustment mechanism 220 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45A to 45D are front views of the game board 210 showing the periphery of the adjustment mechanism 220 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the left standing wall 261 extends to the upper left of the rotating body 230 and has an end face 261a at the upper end. The end surface 261a has a gentle slope downward toward the left, and the right end of the end surface 261a enters the intake port 262 and contacts any one of the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230. It is located below the upper end of the game ball B1.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), in the game board 210, a plurality of left guide nails 291 and right guide nails 292 are provided above the adjustment mechanism 220 to guide the game ball B1 to the inlet 262. Yes. Here, the left guide nail 291 and the right guide nail 292 are the same members as the nails 24 b (FIG. 3) provided on the game board 210.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), in the game board 210, the left guide nails 291 are arranged in a row above the left standing wall 261, and the arrangement direction of the row is downward toward the right. It is inclined. By the row of the left guide nails 291, the game ball B 1 flowing down from above the left standing wall 261 is guided toward the intake port 262. In addition, right guide nails 292 are arranged in a row above the upper right standing wall 252 and the row direction is inclined downward toward the left. By the row of the right guide nails 292, the game balls B1 flowing down from above the upper right standing wall 252 are guided toward the intake port 262.

  As described above, the right upper wall 252 is configured to rotate rightward from the initial position to the displacement position when a rightward force is applied from the outside. In this configuration, the row of the right guide nails 292 arranged above the upper right standing wall 252 prevents the game balls B1 flowing down from above from colliding with the upper right standing wall 252. For this reason, the turning state of the upper right standing wall 252 does not change due to the collision of the game ball B1 flowing down from above with the upper right standing wall 252 at the displacement position.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the distance from the right guide nail 292 located at the lower end of the row of right guide nails 292 to the upper right standing wall 252 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, the game ball B 1 does not enter the gap between the row of the right guide nails 292 and the upper right standing wall 252. On the other hand, the distance from the left guide nail 291 positioned at the lower end of the left guide nail 291 to the left standing wall 261 is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 guided to the left by the row of the right guide nails 292 and not taken into the intake port 262 is a space existing between the row of the left guide nails 291 and the left standing wall 261. And escapes to the left of the adjustment mechanism 220.

  Further, the game ball B1 guided to the right by the row of the left guide nails 291 and not taken into the take-in port 262 collides with the right guide nails 292 and the upper right standing wall 252 and bounced back to the left. After that, it passes through the space existing between the row of left guide nails 291 and the left standing wall 261 and escapes to the left of the adjustment mechanism 220. In this way, by configuring the game ball B1 that has been guided near the intake port 262 but not taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 from the intake port 262 to the left of the adjustment mechanism 220, It is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from staying in the vicinity of the intake port 262.

  The game ball B1 flows down to the intake port 262 of the adjustment mechanism 220 regardless of the rotation state of the rotating body 230. For this reason, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 flowing down to the intake port 262 may contact the front side position of the support surfaces 241 to 244 located above and the rear side position of the support surfaces 241 to 244. There are both. Here, the front positions of the support surfaces 241 to 244 are front portions in the rotation direction of the support surfaces 241 to 244, and the rear positions of the support surfaces 241 to 244 are rotations of the support surfaces 241 to 244. It is the rear part of the direction.

  The behavior of the game ball B1 at the intake port 262 is common regardless of the support surfaces 241 to 244 with which the game ball B1 comes into contact. Therefore, in the following, the behavior of the game ball B1 that flows down to the intake port 262 and contacts the first support surface 241 will be described as an example.

  First, the case where the game ball B1 flowing down to the intake port 262 contacts the rear side position of the first support surface 241 located above will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 45 (b), when the game ball B1 is in contact with the rear position of the first support surface 241, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the gaming ball B1 is the rotating body 230. Shorter than the distance from the center of the wall to the standing walls 252, 253, 261. For this reason, the game ball B1 is conveyed toward the lower part of the accommodation space while being pushed by the first step surface 241a present at the rear end of the first support surface 241 that is in contact.

  Next, the case where the game ball B1 flowing down to the intake port 262 contacts the front side position of the first support surface 241 located above is referred to with reference to FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c). explain. As shown in FIG. 45 (c), when the game ball B1 is in contact with the front side position of the first support surface 241, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the gaming ball B1 is It is longer than the distance from the center to the standing walls 252 253 261. For this reason, at the intake port 262, the game ball B <b> 1 trying to move to the right according to the rotation of the rotating body 230 comes into contact with the upper right standing wall 252.

  If the rotating body 230 rotates while the rightward standing wall 252 prevents the game ball B1 from moving in the right direction, the game ball B1 cannot move rightward from the intake port 262. The contact point with the support surface 241 moves from the front side of the first support surface 241 to the rear side.

  As already described, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the first support surface 241 gradually decreases from the front position of the first support surface 241 toward the rear position. For this reason, the distance from the center of the rotator 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 gradually decreases. In this case, the game ball B <b> 1 that continues to be in contact with the first support surface 241 gradually sinks downward as the rotating body 230 rotates.

  And as shown in FIG.45 (b), the game ball B1 will be in the state which exists in the back side position of the 1st support surface 241. FIG. As already described, in the state of being present at the rear side position of the first support surface 241, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B <b> 1 is from the center of the rotating body 230 to the standing walls 252, 253, 253. It is shorter than the distance to H.261. Therefore, the game ball B1 is pushed by the first step surface 241a present at the rear end of the first support surface 241 and is conveyed toward the lower part of the accommodation space.

  Here, when the rotating body 230 rotates from the state where the game ball B1 exists at the front side position of the first support surface 241 to the state where the game ball B1 exists at the rear side position, the game ball B1 and the first The distance to the contact point with the support surface 241 decreases continuously. For this reason, even if the game ball B1 is in a state of waiting at the intake port 262, it is not in a state of being stopped at one place, but is always in a downward movement state.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the game area PA (FIG. 3), a space where the game ball B1 can flow downward is provided on the left side of the left standing wall 261. The nail 24b is not arranged in the space. For this reason, the game ball B1 that has not been taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 at the take-in port 262 can pass through the space and travel downstream of the game area PA.

  The game ball B1 that has flowed to a position shifted to the left side from the intake port 262 contacts the end surface 261a of the left standing wall 261. As already described, the end surface 261a is inclined downward toward the left. For this reason, the game ball B1 is guided by the end surface 261a of the left standing wall 261 and flows down the space provided on the left side of the left standing wall 261.

  The game ball B1 that has flowed down to a position shifted to the right side from the intake port 262 is guided by the right guide nail 292 and moves toward the intake port 262. Since the game ball B1 does not collide with the upper right standing wall 252 from above, the upper right standing wall 252 is rotated from the initial position to the displacement position or rotated from the displacement position to the initial position by the game ball B1 flowing down from above. It does n’t move.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (c), when the first game ball B1 enters the intake 262 and is in contact with any one of the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230, the second When the game ball B1 tries to enter the intake port 262, the game ball B1 comes into contact with the first game ball B1. Since the right guide nail 292 and the upper right standing wall 252 exist on the right side of the second game ball B1, the game ball B1 advances in the left direction without moving in the right direction.

  As already described, the right end of the end surface 261a of the left standing wall 261 exists below the second game ball B1, and the end surface 261a is inclined downward toward the left. A space through which the game ball B1 can pass is present to the left of the left standing wall 261. For this reason, the second game ball B1 that has not been taken into the take-in port 262 flows down the left side of the adjustment mechanism 220.

  Since the game ball B1 that has not been taken into the take-in port 262 does not stop and stay in the vicinity of the take-in port 262, it is possible to maintain a state where the take-in of the game ball B1 at the take-in port 262 is performed smoothly.

  Next, a mode in which the game ball B1 taken from the take-in port 262 is transported to the lower part of the accommodation space with the rotation of the rotating body 230 will be described with reference to FIG. As already described, the game ball B1 conveyed while being in contact with any of the first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, and the third support surface 243 exists on the front side in the front-rear direction (window panel 52 side). The game ball B1 conveyed while being in contact with the fourth support surface 244 exists on the rear side in the front-rear direction (base body 251 side).

  Except for the position in the front-rear direction, the movement of the game ball B1 during transportation is common regardless of the support surfaces 241 to 244 with which the game ball B1 is in contact with transportation. For this reason, the case where the game ball B <b> 1 is conveyed while being in contact with the first support surface 241 will be described below as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (d), the game ball B1 is conveyed while being in contact with the first support surface 241 and the first step surface 241a. The game ball B1 being transported is in a state where a force is applied in the rotational direction from the first step surface 241a protruding in the radial direction of the rotating body 230.

  As already described, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to each of the support surfaces 241 to 244 is long on the front side in the rotation direction (clockwise) on each of the support surfaces 241 to 244, and gradually increases as it advances to the rear side in the rotation direction. Shorter. Further, as already described, the distances from the center of the rotating body 230 to the standing walls 252, 253, and 261 that define the accommodation space of the rotating body 230 are constant.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 45 (d), the distance from any one of the support surfaces 241 to 244 to the upright walls 252, 253 and 261 is short on the front side of the rotation direction in the support surfaces 241 to 244, and the rotation direction It gradually becomes longer as it goes to the rear side. Specifically, the width of the space sandwiched between any of the support surfaces 241 to 244 and the upright walls 252, 253, and 261 is greater than the diameter of the game ball B 1 on the front side in the rotation direction of the support surfaces 241 to 244. It is also narrower and gradually becomes wider as it goes to the rear side in the rotational direction. The width of the space located approximately half the rear side in the space is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Further, the distance from the front surface of the base body 251 to the window panel 52 (FIG. 1) is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (d), in the space sandwiched between the first support surface 241 and the upper right upright wall 252, the space on the rear side in the rotational direction has a shape and size that can accommodate the game ball B1. And the space on the front side in the rotation direction is a space that cannot accommodate the game ball B1. In a state where the game ball B <b> 1 is transported while being in contact with the first support surface 241, a space having a size in which the game ball B <b> 1 can exist is limited to a rear side position of the first support surface 241.

  If there is a wide space in which the game ball B1 can exist during transportation, the game ball B1 can exist at different positions even if the rotation state of the rotating body 230 is the same. In this case, even if the rotational speed of the rotating body 230 is constant and any one of the step surfaces 241a to 244a is present at the discharge position every time the discharge timing is reached, the position of the game ball B1 at the discharge timing is every time. It becomes different, and the winning possible timing to the first through gate 35 is shifted.

  On the other hand, there is a limited space in which the game ball B1 can exist during the transfer, and at the discharge timing when the step surfaces 241a to 244a carrying the game ball B1 reach the discharge position. By adopting a configuration in which the ball B1 is transported to a predetermined position every time, the winning possible timing to the first through gate 35 is prevented from shifting.

  Note that in a state where the game ball B1 is at the rear side position of any of the support surfaces 241 to 244, a space larger than the size of the game ball B1 exists around the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 is brought into contact with the first step surface 241a while the game ball B1 is in contact with the first step surface 241a, the first support surface 241, and any of the standing walls 252 and 253 located on the right side during the transportation. It is not transported while being pushed and dragged.

  Next, a configuration for the adjustment mechanism 220 to discharge the game ball B1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 is continuous with the housing space in which the rotating body 230 is housed, and the game ball B1 transported to the lower part of the housing space is positioned below the adjusting mechanism 220. A discharge passage 264 for discharging toward one through gate 35 is formed. The discharge passage 264 has a passage cross section through which the game balls B1 can pass one by one, and is provided with a discharge port 256 at the lower end of the discharge passage 264. The discharge passage 264 guides the game ball B1 passing through the discharge passage 264 so that the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 256 flows down toward the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the discharge passage 264 shifts the position of the game ball B1 to the left upstream, and directs the discharge direction of the game ball B1 downstream to the first through gate 35 below.

  The discharge passage 264 is connected to the right side of the center of the accommodation space. For this reason, the game ball B1 conveyed from the upper part of the accommodation space to the lower part in the clockwise direction proceeds to the discharge passage 264 before the game ball B1 makes a half turn around the rotating body 230.

  The game ball B1 transported by the rotator 230 has a downward speed component from when it is taken in at the upper part of the accommodation space until it makes a half turn, and then has an upward speed component after a half turn. It will be. The game ball B1 is advanced to the discharge passage 264 at a timing before the game ball B1 being transported changes from a state having a downward speed component to a state having an upward speed component. By adopting such a configuration, the movement from the accommodation space of the game ball B1 to the discharge passage 264 can be made smooth.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 includes discharge standing walls 263 and 266 that define the discharge passage 264. The discharge upright walls 263 and 266 are formed on the left and right sides of the discharge passage 264 in a manner of protruding forward from the front surface of the base body 251 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). Among these, the right discharge standing wall 266 that defines the shape of the right side of the discharge passage 264 is continuous with the lower right standing wall 253 and extends obliquely downward to the left. As shown in FIG. 41, the passage wall surface of the discharge passage 264 defined by the right discharge standing wall 266 is a curve that swells obliquely upward to the left.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the left discharge standing wall 263 defining the left passage shape of the discharge passage 264 is for the right discharge so that the passage width of the discharge passage 264 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. It is formed apart from the standing wall 266. The passage width of the discharge passage 264 is set to be slightly narrower from upstream to downstream, and is approximately 1.1 times the diameter of the game ball B1 downstream.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the game ball B1 passing through the discharge passage 264 is guided by the right discharge standing wall 266 and moves downward while moving leftward. Specifically, the game ball B1 is guided mainly in the left direction upstream of the discharge passage 264, and is guided downward toward the first through gate 35 mainly in the downstream of the discharge passage 264. Thereby, it is suppressed that the discharge direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge passage 264 is shifted from the first through gate 35.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the left discharge erecting wall 263 includes, at its upper end, a discharge protruding end 263a that protrudes into the storage space in which the rotating body 230 is stored. The distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the discharge protruding end 263a is longer than the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the outer ends of the step surfaces 241a to 244a, and the difference between the two distances is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Also short. In other words, when the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230 are closest to each other, the distance between the projecting end 263a for discharging and the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. Projects to the position.

  Here, the protruding dimension of the discharge protruding end 263a is such that the discharge protruding end 263a does not contact the step surfaces 241a to 244a even when the step surfaces 241a to 244a are closest to each other. For this reason, rotation of the rotary body 230 is not prevented by the step surfaces 241a to 244a coming into contact with the discharge protruding end 263a.

  The discharge projecting end 263a guides the game ball B1 toward the discharge passage 264 by coming into contact with the upper part of the game ball B1 conveyed to the lower part of the accommodation space by the rotating body 230. As shown in FIG. 44 (b), gravity that tries to fall downward acts on the game ball B1 transported to the lower part of the accommodation space. A space that is slightly larger than the game ball B1 exists below the accommodation space. For this reason, game ball B1 moves below rather than the state which is contacting the support surfaces 241-244 of the rotary body 230 with dead weight.

  As already described, the discharge passage 264 is connected to the right side of the center in the lower part of the accommodation space. Therefore, when the game ball B1 moves from the accommodation space to the discharge passage 264, the game ball B1 has a speed component in the left direction and a speed component in the downward direction. The game ball B1 tends to move downward due to its own weight, and is pushed by the contacting step surfaces 241a to 244a to move leftward.

  In the lower part of the accommodation space, when the downward velocity component of the game ball B1 is sufficiently larger than the left velocity component, the game ball B1 moves along the right discharge standing wall 266 to the discharge passage 264. On the other hand, when the velocity component in the left direction of the game ball B1 is large in the lower part of the accommodation space, the game ball B1 tends to move leftward away from the right discharge standing wall 266.

  On the other hand, as already described, the discharge protruding end 263a of the left discharge standing wall 263 protrudes into the accommodation space. And the distance from the level | step difference surface 241a-244a which is pushing the game ball B1 to the left from the protrusion end 263a for discharge | emission becomes shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, even the game ball B1 having a large velocity component in the left direction cannot move to the left from the discharge protruding end 263a.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (b), even if the game ball B1 does not move downward and is in contact with the support surfaces 241 to 244, the discharge protruding end 263a and the stepped surfaces 241a to 241a. The protruding position of the discharge protruding end 263a is set so that the straight line connecting 244a passes above the center of gravity of the game ball B1. For this reason, even if the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the discharge protruding end 263a and the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, the force that the rotating body 230 tries to rotate clockwise discharges the game ball B1. It works in the direction of pushing out toward the passage 264.

  In the lower part of the accommodation space, even when the velocity component of the game ball B1 in the left direction is large, the game ball B1 that is in contact with the discharge protruding end 263a and the step surfaces 241a to 244a is a rotating body. It moves toward the discharge passage 264 with the rotation of 230. The game ball B1 is strongly sandwiched between the discharge protruding end 263a and the step surfaces 241a to 244a, and the rotation of the rotating body 230 does not stop.

  Next, the case where the game ball B1 comes into contact with both the step surfaces 241a to 244a and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 at the intake port 262 will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, the upper right upright wall 252 in the initial position is provided with an end face 252a inclined rightward toward the lower end at the free end of the upper right upright wall 252. As the rotating body 230 rotates, the distance between the step surfaces 241a to 244a located around the intake port 262 and the end surface 252a of the upper right upright wall 252 becomes longer or shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. To do.

  A game ball is inserted into the intake port 262 at the timing when the distance between the step surfaces 241a to 244a located near the intake port 262 and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 changes from a state longer than the diameter of the game ball B1 to a short state. When B1 enters, the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the step surfaces 241a to 244a and the end surface 252a.

  The behavior of the sandwiched game ball B1 is common regardless of the step surfaces 241a to 244a sandwiching the game ball B1. Therefore, hereinafter, the case where the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the second step surface 242a and the upper right upright wall 252 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (c). 46A to 46C are front views of the game board 210 showing the periphery of the adjustment mechanism 220 in an enlarged manner.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the second step surface 242a and the right upper wall 252 and the rotating body 230 rotates clockwise, the second step surface A rightward force is applied to the game ball B1 from 242a. For this reason, a rightward force is applied from the game ball B1 to the upper right standing wall 252. As described above, the right-upright standing wall 252 can rotate from the initial position around the rotation shaft 254 to the deformed position indicated by a shadow in FIG. 46A when a rightward force is applied from the outside. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 is extended and sandwiched by the upper right standing wall 252 rotating from the initial position to the deformed position. The game ball B1 is guided by the inclination of the end surface 252a and moves to the lower right. Next, as shown in FIG. 46C, the game ball B <b> 1 is in a state of being in contact with the inner surface of the upper right standing wall 252 from being in contact with the end surface 252 a of the upper right standing wall 252. Here, the inner surface of the upper right erected wall 252 is a surface of the upper right erected wall 252 that faces the rotating body 230 and is a surface that defines the accommodation space of the rotating body 230.

  Thereafter, the game ball B1 moves along the inner surface of the upper right upright wall 252 while being pushed by the second step surface 242a. As a result, the game ball B1 that is instantaneously pinched at the intake port 262 can be transported to the discharge position at the same discharge timing as the game ball B1 that is not pinched at the intake port 262. .

  As described above, the adjustment mechanism 220 is configured to eliminate the state in which the game ball B1 is sandwiched and take in the game ball B1 when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a and the upper right standing wall 252. have. Accordingly, the possibility that the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the rotary body 230 and the right upper wall 252 and the rotary body 230 cannot be rotated is reduced.

  By shifting from the state in which the game ball B1 is in contact with the upper right standing wall 252 to the state in which the game ball B1 is in contact with the lower right standing wall 253, the rightward force applied to the upper right standing wall 252 is removed from the game ball B1. It is. For this reason, the upper right upright wall 252 that has been rotated to the displacement position returns to the initial position by its own weight.

  In the case of applying a force for returning the upper right standing wall 252 to the initial position using a spring or the like, the force necessary to rotate the upper right standing wall 252 from the initial position to the displacement position increases. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which the upper right standing wall 252 returns to the initial position by its own weight, the force necessary to rotate the upper right standing wall 252 is reduced, and the state where the game ball B1 is sandwiched is instantaneously In addition, the adjustment driving unit 184 (FIG. 41) can be prevented from being loaded in the process of eliminating the state.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The game ball B1 sandwiched between the step surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230 and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 at the intake port 262 of the adjusting mechanism 220 is initially set so that the upper right standing wall 252 is centered on the rotation shaft 254. It is configured to be taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 by rotating from the position to the deformation position. For this reason, it can prevent that the game ball B1 pinched is repelled upwards and the flow of the game ball B1 around the intake port 262 is disturbed. In addition, more game balls B1 can be taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 as compared to a configuration in which the sandwiched game balls B1 are released from the adjustment mechanism 220. For this reason, it can suppress that the game ball B1 periodically supplied to the 1st through gate 35 is missing. In addition, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the timing for winning the public train is missed during the winning continuous period.

  In the intake port 262, when the game ball B1 is located on the front side (front side in the rotation direction) of the support surfaces 241 to 244, the game ball B1 is on the rear side (back side in the rotation direction) of the support surfaces 241 to 244. This is a configuration in which the game ball B1 waits at the intake port 262 while moving downward until the position is reached. By making the game ball B1 waiting at the intake port 262 constantly move, it is possible to prevent the movement of the game ball B1 and prevent the player's interest from moving to another. By avoiding a situation in which the player's interest is lost in the process in which the adjustment mechanism 220 takes in the game ball B1, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 220 and improve the interest of the game. it can.

  The adjustment mechanism 220 is configured to take in the game balls B1 one by one from the take-in port 262. When two game balls B1 are taken in at the same time, one game ball B1 affects the winning timing of the other game ball B1, thereby winning the first through gate 35 even during the winning consecutive period. Possible timing may be out of the winning period. On the other hand, by limiting the number of game balls B1 to be taken in at one time, the possibility that the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 at a timing when the electric train is not open at the winning continuous period. It is possible to reduce and increase the probability of occurrence of the public power open winning during the winning continuous period. Thereby, the expectation to a player's winning continuous period can be raised and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the game board 210, a right guide nail 292 for guiding the game ball B 1 to the intake port 262 is provided above the upper right standing wall 252, and the game ball B 1 is placed on the left above the left standing wall 261. A gap is provided to allow the movement toward the direction. For this reason, when the game ball B1 already exists in the intake port 262, another game ball B1 can be released to the left of the adjustment mechanism 220. For this reason, the number of game balls B1 that are not taken in and stay in the vicinity of the take-in port 262 or disturb the flow of the game balls B1 upstream of the take-in port 262 and are taken into the adjusting mechanism 220. Can be prevented from decreasing. In this way, by preventing the game ball B1 periodically supplied to the first through gate 35 from being lost, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the timing for winning the normal power release is missed in the winning continuous period.

  The adjustment mechanism 220 includes a discharge protruding end 263a, and the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 220 prevents the game ball B1 from rising without being discharged. As a result, the game balls B1 conveyed to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 220 by the rotating body 230 are not successfully discharged, and the same game balls B1 continue to rotate and the number of game balls B1 discharged toward the first through gate 35 is reduced. It can be prevented from decreasing. It can be avoided that the frequency at which the game ball B <b> 1 is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 decreases and the player is less interested in the adjustment mechanism 220. Further, by adopting a configuration in which the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 is discharged within a certain period, it is possible to prevent the pace at which a new game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 from falling. Thereby, it can be avoided that the frequency at which the game ball B <b> 1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 decreases and the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 220 is diminished.

  The first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, and the third support surface 243 are provided with an inclination for discharging the game ball B1 in such a manner that it flows down the front side, and the fourth support surface 244 is a game ball B1. Is provided with an inclination for discharging in a manner of flowing down the back side. As described above, the distance from the lower end of the adjustment mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is set to approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, only the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 and flowing down the rear side collides with the sorting nail 271 and is disengaged from the first through gate 35. As a result, all of the game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 win the first through gate 35, and a situation where the player pays attention only to the game balls B1 taken in the adjustment mechanism 220 and does not pay attention to the discharge is avoided. can do. By attracting the player's interest until the moment of winning the first through gate 35, the interest of the game can be improved.

  By changing the number and inclination of the support surfaces 241 to 244, each of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 and winning the first through gate 35, and the game ball B1 coming off the first through gate 35, respectively. It is possible to set the frequency of occurrence at the design stage. For this reason, the probability that the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 220 wins the first through gate 35 can be set to a high value other than 100%. Thereby, a player's interest with respect to the adjustment mechanism 220 can be raised, and the interest improvement of a game can be aimed at.

<Another embodiment in the second embodiment>
-In 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, it is good also as a structure which waits, while the some game ball B1 moves below in the intake port 262. FIG. For example, when one nail 24b is arranged above the left end of the intake port 262 and the first game ball B1 has already entered the intake port 262, the second game ball B1 flows down. When the second game ball B1 comes, the second game ball B1 may be held above the intake port 262. The second game ball B1 is in a standby state on the first game ball B1, but the first game ball B1 always moves downward until it is taken in, so that it comes into contact with the first game ball B1. The waiting second game ball B1 also always moves downward.

  As described above, by stocking the game ball B1 while moving it at the intake port 262, the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 is insufficient, and the game ball B1 is first in spite of the winning continuous period. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the frequency of winning through the through gate 35 is low.

  In the second embodiment described above, nails may be used instead of the housing 250 as a configuration for guiding the game ball B1 that moves while being pushed by the step surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230. Then, as a nail placed near the intake port 262, when a rightward force is applied from the outside, the compression coil spring is deformed and moves rightward from the initial position, and the external force is removed. In this case, a movable nail that returns to the initial position by the restoring force of the compression coil spring may be used. By using the movable nail, when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the rotating body 230 and the movable nail, the movable nail is moved from the center of the rotating body 230 using the rightward movement of the movable nail. It is possible to increase the distance up to and capture the sandwiched game ball B1.

  As described above, the game ball B1 that moves in the rotation direction while being pushed by the step surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230 is configured to guide the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 in the game board 210 by guiding the game ball B1 with the nail. The area occupied by the means for periodically supplying can be reduced. Thereby, in the game board 210, the option of the position which provides the means for supplying the game ball B1 to the 1st through gate 35 periodically increases, and the freedom degree of design can be raised.

  -In 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, it is good also as a structure where the support surfaces 241-244 of the rotary body 230 do not have the inclination of the front-back direction. In this case, the four support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230 have a common shape. Therefore, the game ball B1 is discharged from the discharge passage 264 in the same manner even if it is conveyed while being in contact with any of the support surfaces 241 to 244. The probability that the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 is located on the front side (window panel 52 side) of the game area PA and the probability that it is located on the rear side (game board 210 side) is the same as that of the game ball B1. It is constant regardless of the supporting surfaces 241 to 244 that are in contact.

  For all of the support surfaces 241 to 244, the game ball B1 conveyed while being in contact is positioned on the front side of the game area PA and wins the first through gate 35 without contacting the distribution nail 271; Both the case where it comes off from the 1st through gate 35 by contacting with the distribution nail 271 located in the back side of PA can be set as the structure which can occur. Thereby, in the vicinity of the distribution nail 271, the player's interest in the behavior of the game ball B <b> 1 can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the configuration in which the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230 do not have the inclination in the front-rear direction, the game board 210 may not be provided with the sorting nail 271. In this case, the course of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge passage 264 is not affected by the position of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction. The discharged game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 with a high probability. However, the distance from the discharge passage 264 to the first through gate 35 is set wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, when the passage width at the lower end of the discharge passage 264 is one or more times wider than the game ball B1, the discharge direction of the game ball B1 may be shifted to either one of the left and right directions and the first through gate 35 may not be won. There is.

  Thus, instead of the configuration in which the distribution nail 271 is provided on the game board 210, the relationship between the discharge passage 264 and the first through gate 35 is adjusted, and all of the discharged game balls B1 are the first. It is good also as a structure which avoids the situation which wins the through gate 35.

  -In 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, it is good also as a structure where the distribution nail 271 does not exist in the middle of the course where the game ball B1 discharged | emitted from the adjustment mechanism 220 heads to the 1st through gate 35. The first through gate 35 is provided at a location separated from the discharge port 256 in the adjustment mechanism 220 by at least the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, depending on the discharge direction and discharge speed of the game ball B1 at the discharge port 256, the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 256 may come off from the first through gate 35. By adopting a configuration in which the positional relationship between the adjustment mechanism 220 and the first through gate 35 is adjusted so that a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 256 is detached from the first through gate 35, The player's interest can also be gathered in the behavior of the game ball B1.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  A configuration around the first through gate 35 in the game board 320 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a front view of the game board 320 showing the first through gate 35 and the configuration above the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the game board 320 includes an adjustment mechanism 330 above the first through gate 35. The adjusting mechanism 330 discharges the game ball B1 while guiding the game ball B1 to fall toward the first through gate 35. In the adjustment mechanism 330, the timing at which the game ball B1 can be discharged is generated at a cycle of 1 sec.

  By generating the winning possible timing already described in the first embodiment in a 1 sec cycle, it is possible to generate a non-winning continuous period when the winning possible timing does not overlap with the winning target period of the open-air lottery. In the case where the winning possible timing overlaps with the winning target period, the winning continuous period can be generated. A detailed configuration of the adjustment mechanism 330 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the distance between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 is set to a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the distance between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 is set to approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1. In the game board 320, on the upper left side of the first through gate 35 and below the adjustment mechanism 330, a part of the game balls B <b> 1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 is removed from the course toward the first through gate 35. An adjustment nail 376 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the adjustment nail 376 is located on the left side of the path of the game ball B1 that flows down directly from the adjustment mechanism 330 and wins the first through gate 35. Further, the adjusting nail 376 protrudes from the front surface of the game board 320 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). For this reason, the game ball B1 flowing down the path shifted to the left collides with the adjustment nail 376 regardless of the position in the front-rear direction in the game area PA (FIG. 3).

  When the discharge direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 is directly below, the discharged game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 without contacting the adjustment nail 376. On the other hand, when the discharge direction of the game ball B1 is shifted to the left from right below, the discharged game ball B1 comes into contact with the adjustment nail 376. As described above, since the gap larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35, the game ball B1 in contact with the adjustment nail 376 is detached from the first through gate 35. .

  By avoiding that all of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 win the first through gate 35, the movement of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 becomes monotonous and prevents the player from getting bored. Can do.

  The adjustment mechanism 330 takes the game ball B1 into the adjustment mechanism 330 and guides it toward the first through gate 35. The take-in possible range in which the game ball B1 can be taken in is the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 330. Is located. As shown in FIG. 47, in the game board 320, a plurality of downstream guide nails 371 for guiding the game ball B <b> 1 flowing down from above to the adjustment mechanism 330 are provided upstream of the adjustment mechanism 330.

  By arranging the downstream guide nails 371 on the game board 320, a row for guiding the game balls B <b> 1 flowing down from the upper right side of the adjustment mechanism 330 to the take-in range of the adjustment mechanism 330, and the adjustment mechanism 330. And a row for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper left side of the to the range in which the adjusting mechanism 330 can be taken in. Here, as shown in FIG. 47, a region sandwiched between the two rows in the game board 320 is referred to as a downstream guide region 371a. The downstream guide nails 371 arranged in two rows guide the game ball B1 flowing down the downstream guide region 371a toward the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 330.

  As shown in FIG. 47, an electric nail 361 that is movable to the left and right is provided in the vicinity of the upper portion of the right column of the downstream guide nails 371. Further, above the electric nail 361, an upstream guide nail 372 for guiding most of the game ball B1 flowing down the area on the left side of the center frame 57 (FIG. 3) to the electric nail 361 on the game board 320. Are provided.

  An upstream guide nail 372 is arranged in an area on the left side of the center frame 57 in the game board 320, so that the game ball B1 flowing down on the right side of the area at the upper part of the area is positioned below. A row for guiding toward the nail 361 and a row for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down the left side of the region toward the electric nail 361 located below are provided. As shown in FIG. 47, a region sandwiched between the two rows is referred to as an upstream guide region 372a.

  The lateral width of the upstream guide area 372a is wide at the upper part of the upstream guide area 372a and gradually decreases toward the lower side. In the lower part of the upstream guide area 372a (near the electric nail 361), one row of game balls B1 is arranged. It becomes the interval which can pass by becoming.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the electric nail 361 is connected to a nail drive unit 361a which is an electric actuator such as a solenoid via a link mechanism (not shown), and the game ball B1 guided by the row of upstream guide nails 372 is provided. A permission position that allows entry between the two rows of the downstream guide nails 371 and a prohibition position that prohibits the game ball B1 from entering between the two rows of the downstream guide nails 371 are taken. Here, the relationship between the position of the electric nail 361 and the course of the game ball B1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b).

  FIG. 48A is a front view of the game board 320 showing the periphery of the electric nail 361 in the permitted position in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 48B is a game showing the periphery of the electric nail 361 in the prohibited position in an enlarged manner. 3 is a front view of a board 320. FIG. As shown in FIG. 48A, when the drive signal of the nail drive unit 361a is at the LOW level, the electric nail 361 takes the permission position. The electric nail 361 in the permitted position is located on the upper right side of the downstream guide nail 371 located on the upper right side of the downstream guide region 371a and the upstream guide nail 372 located on the lower right side of the upstream guide region 372a. It is located in the lower left of.

  First, the case where the electric nail 361 is in the permission position will be described. As shown in FIG. 48A, the right region in the downstream guide region 371a exists below the left region in the upstream guide region 372a. Therefore, the game ball B1 flowing down from the left area in the upstream guide area 372a enters the right area in the downstream guide area 371a. In addition, there is an electric nail 361 at a permission position below the right region in the upstream guide region 372a. For this reason, the game ball B1 flowing down from the right side region in the upstream guide region 372a collides with the electric nail 361 and enters the downstream guide region 371a.

  Next, the case where the electric nail 361 is in the prohibited position will be described. As shown in FIG. 48 (b), there is an electric nail 361 at a prohibited position below the left region in the upstream guide region 372a. For this reason, the game ball B1 flowing down from the left region in the upstream guide region 372a collides with the electric nail 361 and flows down to the right side of the downstream guide nail 371. Further, the lower side of the right side region in the upstream guide region 372a corresponds to the right side of the downstream guide region 371a. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flowed downward from the right region in the upstream guide region 372a flows to the right from the downstream guide region 371a.

  As shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B, the distance between the electric nail 361 in the permitted position and the upstream guide nail 372 at the lower right end of the upstream guide area 372a, and the electric nail 361 in the prohibited position and the upstream guide. The distance from the upstream guide nail 372 at the lower left end of the region 372a is set slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, when the electric nail 361 moves left and right, the game ball B1 is not sandwiched between the electric nail 361 and the upstream guide nail 372. In addition, the distance between the electric nail 361 in the permitted position and the downstream guide nail 371 at the upper right end of the downstream guide area 371a, and the electric power nail 361 in the prohibited position and the downstream guide nail 371 at the upper right end of the downstream guide area 371a The interval is such that the game ball B1 cannot enter. For this reason, when the electric nail 361 moves left and right, the game ball B1 is not sandwiched between the electric nail 361 and the downstream guide nail 371.

  As shown in FIG. 47, above the left region in the downstream guide region 371a, the nail 24b is used to prevent the game ball B1 flowing down to the left of the upstream guide region 372a from entering the downstream guide region 371a. Is provided. For this reason, the game balls B1 that can enter the downstream guide area 371a are limited to the game balls B1 that flow down from the upstream guide area 372a. Thus, the game ball B1 entering the downstream guide region 371a is limited to the game ball B1 flowing down from the upstream guide region 372a, and the electric nail 361 moves down from the upstream guide region 372a by moving to the prohibited position. The incoming game ball B1 can be guided to the right of the downstream guide area 371a. Thereby, the frequency at which the game ball B1 enters the downstream guide area 371a and is taken into the adjustment mechanism 330 can be controlled.

  The drive signal of the nail drive unit 361a is a periodic signal in which the HI level is repeated for 0.2 sec with an interval of 0.8 sec. For this reason, the electric nail 361 takes the prohibited position only for 0.2 sec in 1 sec. When two or more game balls B1 that can be fired at an interval of 0.6 sec from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) try to enter the downstream guide area 371a, there is a high probability of the two game balls B1. Any one of these will collide with the electric nail 361 which has moved to the prohibited position, and will flow down to the right of the downstream guide region 371a. By using the electric nail 361, it is possible to prevent the plurality of game balls B1 from entering the downstream guide region 371a and being taken into the adjusting mechanism 330 in a state where the plurality of game balls B1 are connected.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the adjustment mechanism 330 will be described below. As shown in FIG. 47, the adjustment mechanism 330 rotates the rotator 340 that conveys the game ball B1 from the upper part to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 330, and rotates the rotator 340 clockwise. The adjustment driving unit 184 already described in the embodiment and the rotating body 340 are provided to the right of the rotating body 340, and the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 is discharged before discharging so as to go to the first through gate 35. And a guide member 350 for guiding the direction. The adjustment drive unit 184 gives a driving force to the rotating body 340 so that the rotating body 340 makes one rotation in 6 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the rotator 340 includes a substantially disc-shaped rotator main body 342 and six plate-like blade members 343 projecting radially from the outer periphery of the rotator main body 342. ing. The rotating body main body 342 and the blade member 343 are resin members. The game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 330 is conveyed to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 330 while being supported from below by any of the blade members 343 constituting the rotating body 340.

  First, the configuration of the rotating body 340 in the adjustment mechanism 330 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 47, the rotating body main body 342 includes six rotating shafts 344 on the outer periphery thereof. The rotation shaft 344 is provided at an angle orthogonal to the front surface of the game board 320. The blade member 343 is fixed to the outer periphery of the rotating body main body 342 in such a manner that the blade member 343 can rotate counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 344. The six blade members 343 are the same members having the same shape and size, and are arranged at equal intervals in the rotation direction on the outer periphery of the rotating body main body 342.

  As shown in FIG. 47, an adjustment drive unit 184 is disposed behind the rotator main body 342. The front surface of the adjustment drive unit 184 is parallel to the front surface of the game board 320, and the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184 extends forward in a manner orthogonal to the front surface of the adjustment drive unit 184. The rotator main body 342 is connected to the output shaft 184a so that the axis of the rotator main body 342 is positioned on the same straight line as the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184. When the adjustment driving unit 184 is in the driving state, the rotating body main body 342 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 60 ° in 1 sec. In a state where the rotator 340 is attached to the game board 320, the rotator main body 342 exists from the vicinity of the front surface of the game board 320 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1).

  Here, the fixation aspect to the rotary body main body part 342 of the blade member 343 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 47, the state in which the blade member 343 protrudes from the outer edge of the rotating body main body 342 in the radial direction is the initial state of the blade member 343. A recess (not shown) is formed around the rotation shaft 344 to prevent the blade member 343 in the initial state from rotating around the rotation shaft 344 in the clockwise direction. Even if a force to rotate the blade member 343 clockwise with respect to the blade member 343 in the initial state works from the outside, the blade member 343 is rotated because the blade member 343 is in contact with the wall of the recess. do not do.

  A biasing member (for example, a torsion coil spring) (not shown) is attached around the rotation shaft 344. The urging member is in a natural state that is not deformed when the blade member 343 is in the initial state, and when the blade member 343 is rotated counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 344 and is in a displaced state. Deformed state. The restoring force of the urging member that tries to return from the deformed state to the natural state acts on the blade member 343 in the displaced state. The blade member 343 rotates counterclockwise when a force is applied from the outside to be in a displaced state, and when the force from the outside is removed, the blade member 343 rotates clockwise by a restoring force to be in an initial state. Return to.

  Next, the configuration of the guide member 350 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 47, the guide member 350 includes a plate-like base body 351. In the game board 320, a fixing recess (not shown) that can accommodate the base body 351 without a gap is formed on the right side of the rotating body 340. The guide member 350 is fixed by nailing the base body 351 to the game board in a state where the base body 351 is accommodated in the fixing recess. In a state where the guide member 350 is mounted on the game board 320, the front surface of the base body 351 exists on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 320.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the guide member 350 includes an upright wall 352 that protrudes vertically from the front surface of the base body 351 toward the front. The standing wall 352 extends to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52. Further, the upper end of the standing wall 352 is positioned above the upper end of the rotating body 340, and the lower end of the standing wall 352 is positioned at substantially the same height as the lower end of the rotating body main body 342.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the left side surface 352a of the upright wall 352 that faces the rotating body main body 342 with a space is a gentle arcuate curved surface that is recessed toward the right. The distance from the rotating body main body 342 to the standing wall 352 is set longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. In addition, the distance from the upper end of the standing wall 352 to the blade member 343 located closest to the upper end is set to be longer than the diameter of the game ball B1 regardless of the rotating state of the rotating body 340.

  As shown in FIG. 47, in the adjustment mechanism 330, an area sandwiched between the rotating body main body 342 and the standing wall 352 is referred to as an adjustment area 330a. In the lower region of the adjustment region 330a, the distance from the blade member 343 to the standing wall 352 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. As already described, the blade members 343 protrude from the peripheral surface of the rotating body 340 toward the radial direction of the rotating body 340 at intervals of 60 °.

  For this reason, any blade member 343 of the rotator 340 is always present in the lower region of the adjustment region 330a. The game ball B1 flowing down the adjustment area 330a is always in contact with the blade member 343 existing in the lower area of the adjustment area 330a. By adopting a configuration that prevents the game ball B1 that has entered the adjustment region 330a from passing through without contacting the blade member 343, the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 330 is moved to the first through gate at a timing other than the discharge timing. It is possible to prevent discharge toward 35.

  Here, an aspect in which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjustment region 330a will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c). 49A to 49C are front views of the game board 320 showing the periphery of the adjustment mechanism 330 in an enlarged manner.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (a), in the lower region of the adjustment region 330a, the game ball B1 is supported from below by the blade member existing in the region. And it is conveyed to the discharge position below as the rotator 340 rotates. The game ball B1 is conveyed while being in contact with the standing wall 352, whereby the course of the game ball B1 in the adjustment region 330a is guided.

  In the gaming ball B1 that is supported by the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352 above the first through gate 35, the rotating body 340 rotates, and as shown in FIG. When the gap between the free end of the blade member 343 supporting B1 and the lower end of the standing wall 352 becomes wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 moves from the gap toward the first through gate 35 below. Fall.

  As already described, the adjustment drive unit 184 (FIG. 47) rotates the rotating body 340 at a rotation speed of one rotation for 6 seconds. For this reason, in the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 330, the gap between the free end of the blade member 343 and the lower end of the upright wall 352 becomes a state where the gap is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1 and longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Timing occurs in a 1 sec cycle. As described above, the adjusting mechanism 330 can discharge the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 at a cycle of 1 sec.

  The game ball B1 entering the adjustment region 330a comes into contact with the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352 in a state of having a downward speed. For this reason, when the game ball B1 collides with the blade member 343 and jumps, the game ball B1 is temporarily not in contact with the blade member 343. Further, when the game ball B1 collides with the standing wall 352 and jumps, the game ball B1 is temporarily not in contact with the standing wall 352. As shown in FIG. 49 (c), when the game ball B1 reaches the discharge timing in a state where it is not in contact with the blade member 343 or the standing wall 352, the game ball B1 is discharged at a timing slightly delayed from the discharge timing. The Rukoto.

  In this case, since the rotating body 340 continues to rotate between the time when the game ball B1 is discharged and the time when the game ball B1 is actually discharged, the course of the game ball B1 after the discharge is shifted to the left. As already described, an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B <b> 1 is provided between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35. For this reason, the game ball B1 flowing down the course shifted to the left collides with the upper right side of the adjustment nail 376 provided on the upper left side of the first through gate 35 and bounces back to the right, thereby causing the first through gate. May be off 35.

  Next, the case where the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the free end of the blade member 343 and the left side surface 352a of the standing wall 352 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50A to 50C are front views of the game board 320 showing the periphery of the adjustment mechanism 330 in an enlarged manner.

  When the game ball B1 enters the adjustment area 330a at a timing when the distance from the free end of the blade member 343 to the left side surface 352a of the standing wall 352 is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball B1, as shown in FIG. In addition, the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352.

  As shown in FIG. 50A, the rotating body 340 continues to rotate clockwise even when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), a force for rotating the blade member 343 counterclockwise is applied to the blade member 343 as the rotating body 340 rotates. As a result, the blade member 343 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 344 and enters a displaced state.

  A restoring force that attempts to return the blade member 343 to the initial state acts on the blade member 343 in a displaced state from an urging member (not shown). However, the restoring force of the biasing member that acts on the displaced blade member 343 is a weak force that enables the blade member 343 to return to the initial state in a state where no external force is applied to the blade member 343. For this reason, the force of pushing the game ball B1 to the right when the wing member 343 in the displaced state returns to the initial state is not so strong as to completely stop the movement of the game ball B1.

  As the rotation of the rotating body 340 proceeds, the amount of displacement of the blade member 343 increases. During this time, the game ball B1 slowly falls downward due to its own weight. The falling speed of the game ball B1 that is in contact with the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352 is slower than the speed at which the blade member 343 advances in the rotation direction as the rotating body 340 rotates. For this reason, as the rotation of the rotating body 340 proceeds, the free end of the blade member 343 is positioned below the game ball B1. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 50C, the force applied from the game ball B1 to the blade member 343 is released, and the blade member 343 returns from the displaced state to the initial state. The game ball B1 is transported while being supported on the upper surface of the blade member 343 that has returned to the initial state, so that the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 toward the first through gate 35 without deviating from the discharge timing of the 1 sec cycle. Is possible.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Regardless of the timing at which the game ball B1 is guided to the adjustment area 330a, the adjustment mechanism 330 is directed to the first through gate 35 at a discharge timing of 1 sec period, regardless of the timing at which the game ball B1 is guided to the adjustment area 330a. To discharge. Therefore, the game ball B1 can be discharged at the discharge timing of 1 sec period without adjusting the timing at which the game ball B1 enters the adjustment region 330a upstream of the adjustment region 330a. For this reason, it is possible to generate the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode while reducing the processing load on the main CPU 63 as compared with the configuration in which the timing at which the game ball B1 enters the adjustment area 330a is adjusted.

  When the game ball B1 is taken in by the adjustment mechanism 330, when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the free end of the blade member 343 and the left side surface 352a of the upright wall 352, the rotating body 340 is deformed so that the game ball B1 is sandwiched. It is the structure which cancels the state where it is. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the adjustment mechanism 330 cannot discharge the game ball B1 due to the game ball B1 not being able to move while being sandwiched between the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352 or the rotating body 340 being unable to rotate. can do. As a result, a possibility that a problem occurs during the game and a response is required to interrupt the game and solve the problem is reduced.

  The deformation of the rotating body 340 performed to eliminate the state where the game ball B <b> 1 is sandwiched is performed by the rotation of the rotating body 340. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated member in advance in order to eliminate the state where the game ball B1 is sandwiched. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of members constituting the adjustment mechanism 330, simplify the configuration of the adjustment mechanism 330, and reduce the manufacturing cost of the adjustment mechanism 330.

  The deformation of the rotator 340 performed to eliminate the state where the game ball B1 is sandwiched is automatically performed in the same state as the control of the rotator 340 when the game ball B1 is not sandwiched. . For this reason, the control means of this pachinko machine 10 does not require a means for grasping that the game ball B1 is sandwiched. Thereby, when the game ball B1 is in a sandwiched state, the members constituting the adjustment mechanism 330 are compared with the configuration in which the control state of the rotating body 340 is changed to cancel the state in which the game ball B1 is sandwiched. It is possible to suppress the increase in the number of the adjustment mechanisms 330, simplify the configuration of the adjustment mechanism 330, and reduce the manufacturing cost of the adjustment mechanism 330.

  A space larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35. In addition, the game board 320 is provided with an adjustment nail 376 that prevents the game ball B1 from winning the first through gate 35 when the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 deviates from a predetermined course. It has been. For this reason, all the game balls B1 entering the adjustment area 330a win the first through gate 35, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player does not pay attention to the discharge of the game balls B1 in the adjustment mechanism 330. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by attracting the player's interest until the first through gate 35 is won.

  The game board 320 has an electric nail 361 that prevents any one of the game balls B1 from entering the downstream guide area 371a when two game balls B1 try to enter the downstream guide area 371a in a row. Is provided. For this reason, the possibility that a plurality of game balls B1 are guided to the adjustment region 330a at a time can be reduced.

  The number of game balls B1 that can be launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 is one per 0.6 sec, and the number of game balls B1 that can be discharged by the adjustment mechanism 330 is one per sec. For this reason, when the state where the number of game balls B1 entering the adjustment area 330a is larger than the number of game balls B1 moving from the adjustment area 330a to the adjustment area 330a, the game balls B1 stay in the adjustment area 330a. there is a possibility. On the other hand, the game ball B1 stays in the adjustment region 330a by using the electric nail 361 to restrict the game ball B1 that can enter the downstream guide region 371a located upstream of the adjustment region 330a. The possibility can be reduced.

  The electric nail 361 has a width through which one game ball B1 can pass, and is provided upstream of the downstream guide region 371a that guides the game ball B1 to the adjustment region 330a. The electric nail 361 moves between a permission position that allows the game ball B1 to enter the downstream guide region 371a and a prohibition position that prohibits the game ball B1 from entering the downstream guide region 371a. It is. The electric nail 361 that has moved to the prohibited position is configured to move the game ball B1 that is prevented from entering the downstream guide region 371a to the right of the downstream guide region 371a. For this reason, when the electric nail 361 takes the prohibited position, the game ball B1 can be prevented from staying around the electric nail 361. As described above, by appropriately distributing the game balls B1 upstream of the adjustment area 330a, it is possible to prevent the plurality of game balls B1 from entering the adjustment area 330a in a continuous state.

<Another embodiment in the third embodiment>
In the third embodiment described above, the configuration for limiting the number of game balls B1 entering the downstream guide region 371a is not limited to the electric nail 361. For example, you may utilize the adjustment rotary body which has a protrusion part as the said structure. The protruding portion of the adjusting rotator has a permission position for allowing the game ball B1 to enter the downstream guide region 371a and the entry of the game ball B1 to the downstream guide region 371a according to the rotation state of the adjustment rotator. There is a case where a prohibited position for prohibiting is taken. For this reason, the number of game balls B1 entering the downstream guide area 371a can be limited by using an adjustment rotating body that rotates at a constant speed.

  -In 3rd Embodiment mentioned above, it is good also as a structure where the adjustment nail 376 does not exist in the middle of the course where the game ball B1 discharged | emitted from the adjustment mechanism 330 goes to the 1st through gate 35. The first through gate 35 is provided at a location separated from the adjustment mechanism 330 by a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, depending on the discharge direction and discharge speed of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330, the discharged game ball B1 may be detached from the first through gate 35. By adopting a configuration in which the positional relationship between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 is adjusted so that a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 is detached from the first through gate 35, The player's interest can also be gathered in the behavior of the game ball B1.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the game board 420 is provided with an adjustment mechanism 430 for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35. The configuration of the adjustment mechanism 430 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a front view of the game board 420 showing the periphery of the adjustment mechanism 430 in an enlarged manner.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the game board 420, an adjustment mechanism 430 is provided above the first through gate 35. The adjustment mechanism 430 is provided at a position away from the first through gate 35 by a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the adjustment mechanism 430 is provided at a position where the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance of about 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. ing. A detailed configuration of the adjustment mechanism 430 will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the adjustment mechanism 430 includes a rotating body 440 that takes in and discharges the game ball B1 and a guide member 450 that adjusts a discharge timing at which the game ball B1 is discharged from the rotating body 440. Yes. As shown in FIG. 52, the adjustment mechanism 430 includes the adjustment drive unit 184 already described in the first embodiment. The adjustment driving unit 184 in the present embodiment rotates the rotating body 440 once in 6 seconds.

  First, the configuration of the rotating body 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. 52 is a longitudinal sectional view of the rotating body 440 and the adjustment drive unit 184 when the rotating body 440 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 420. As shown in FIG. 51, the rotating body 440 includes a substantially disc-shaped passage forming portion 443, and the passage forming portion 443 has three adjustment passages 444 having a passage width through which the game ball B1 can pass. ~ 446 are formed. The rotating body 440 takes the game ball B1 into any of the adjustment passages 444 to 446 and discharges it from the adjustment passages 444 to 446 different from the adjustment passages 444 to 446 that have taken the game ball B1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 52, the rotating body 440 is a rotating base body that prevents the game ball B1 in the adjustment passages 444 to 446 from moving behind the front of the game board 420 behind the passage forming portion 443. 441. The rotation base body 441 is a substantially disk-shaped resin member having a predetermined thickness, and is integrally formed with the passage forming portion 443.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the game board 420 is formed with a recess 421 that accommodates the rotation base body 441 in a rotatable manner, and the rotation base body 441 accommodates the rotation base body 441 in the recess 421. It is fixed so that it can rotate. The passage forming portion 443 exists from the front surface of the rotation base body 441 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52.

  As shown in FIG. 52, an adjustment drive unit 184 including an output shaft 184a is disposed behind the rotation base body 441. The rotating body 440 is connected to the output shaft 184a such that the axis of the rotating base body 441 is positioned on the same straight line as the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184.

  The axis of the rotating base body 441 in the rotating body 440 is orthogonal to the front surface of the game board 420, and the rotating body 440 is rotated clockwise at an angular velocity of 60 ° in 1 sec by the adjustment drive unit 184 being driven. Rotate. The same stepping motor as the adjustment drive unit 184 in the first embodiment is used for the adjustment drive unit 184 in the present embodiment. The adjustment drive unit 184 has a configuration in which the output shaft 184a makes one round when the excitation signal is transmitted from the main controller 60 for 500 pulses. The angle change based on the excitation signal of one pulse, that is, the angle change per step. Is 0.72 °.

  As shown in FIG. 51, on the outer peripheral surface of the passage forming portion 443, three doorways 444a to 446a are formed as openings opened outward. The three entrances 444 a to 446 a are formed such that the centers of the entrances 444 a to 446 a exist at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the passage forming portion 443. The three entrances 444a to 446a are formed in the order of the first entrance / exit 444a → the second entrance / exit 445a → the third entrance / exit 446a on the outer peripheral surface of the passage forming portion 443.

  The first entrance / exit 444a and the second entrance / exit 445a have a width of 14 mm, which is larger than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball B1. On the other hand, the third entrance / exit 446a is smaller than the first entrance / exit 444a and the second entrance / exit 445a and has a width of 11.5 mm larger than the diameter of the game ball B1.

  The first adjustment passage 444 is formed from the first entrance / exit 444a toward the central region of the rotating body 440, and the second adjustment passage 445 is formed from the second entrance / exit 445a toward the central region of the rotation body 440. . The third adjustment passage 446 is formed from the third entrance / exit 446a toward the central region of the rotating body 440.

  The first adjustment passage 444 has a passage width of 12 mm, and the passage width gradually increases toward the first entrance / exit 444a in the vicinity of the first entrance / exit 444a. Similarly, the second adjustment passage 445 has a passage width of 12 mm, and the passage width gradually widens toward the second entrance / exit 445a in the vicinity of the second entrance / exit 445a. On the other hand, the third adjustment passage 446 has a passage width of 12 mm, and the passage width is gradually narrowed toward the third entrance / exit 446a in the vicinity of the third entrance / exit 446a.

  If the shapes near the three entrances 444a to 446a are all the same, the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the rotating body 440 becomes monotonous. On the other hand, by making the shape in the vicinity of the third entrance / exit 446a different from the shapes in the vicinity of the first entrance / exit 444a and the second entrance / exit 445a, the player's movement with respect to the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the rotating body 440 is changed. You can raise your attention.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the first adjustment passage 444, the second adjustment passage 445, and the third adjustment passage 446 formed in the passage formation portion 443 are straight passages that are open toward the front. As shown in FIG. 52, the rear sides of the three adjustment passages 444 to 446 are defined by the front surface of the rotation base body 441, and the front side is defined by the back surface of the window panel 52.

  As shown in FIG. 51, an intersection space 443a that is slightly larger than the game ball B1 is provided at the center of the passage forming portion 443. The first adjustment passage 444 is a passage connecting the first entrance / exit 444a and the intersection space 443a, and the second adjustment passage 445 is a passage connecting the second entrance / exit 445a and the intersection space 443a. The third adjustment passage 446 is a passage connecting the third entrance / exit 446a and the intersection space 443a.

  The game ball B1 can move from the adjustment passages 444 to 446 to the intersection space 443a, and can move from the intersection space 443a to the adjustment passages 444 to 446. Moreover, each adjustment channel | path 444-446 has the channel | path length which can accommodate two game balls B1.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the passage widths of the adjustment passages 444 to 446 are constant except for the vicinity of the entrances 444a to 446a. Here, a reference line passing through the center of the first adjustment passage 444 is referred to as a first center line 444b, and a reference line passing through the center of the second adjustment passage 445 is referred to as a second center line 445b. A reference line passing through the center of the third adjustment passage 446 is defined as a third center line 446b.

  The first adjustment passage 444 extends in a direction in which the first center line 444b intersects the inner wall of the second adjustment passage 445. The second adjustment passage 445 has the second center line 445b of the inner wall of the third adjustment passage 446. It extends in the direction that intersects. The third adjustment passage 446 extends in a direction in which the third center line 446 b intersects the inner wall of the first adjustment passage 444.

  That is, the path wall of the second adjustment path 445 exists at the destination of the game ball B1 moving along the first adjustment path 444, and the destination of the game ball B1 moving along the second adjustment path 445 is present. There is a passage wall of the third adjustment passage 446. In addition, the passage wall of the first adjustment passage 444 exists at the destination of the game ball B <b> 1 that moves along the third adjustment passage 446. Here, as shown in FIG. 51, the center lines 444 b to 446 b pass through the vicinity of the center of the passage forming portion 443.

  Next, a guide member 450 provided on the game board 420 so as to approach the rotating body 440 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 51, the guide member 450 is provided on the lower right side of the rotating body 440.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the guide member 450 includes a plate-shaped guide base body 451 having a predetermined thickness. In addition, the game board 420 is formed with a guide recess (not shown) that can accommodate the guide base body 451 without a gap. The guide base body 451 is fixed by being nailed to the game board 420 while the guide base body 451 is housed in the guide recess. In the state where the guide member 450 is fixed to the game board 420, the front surface of the guide base body 451 is on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 420.

  The guide member 450 includes an upright wall 452 that protrudes vertically from the front surface of the guide base body 451 toward the front. The standing wall 452 is integrally formed with the guide base body 451 and extends to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). As shown in FIG. 51, the standing wall 452 is formed in a form along the outer periphery of the rotating body 440 from the right side to the lower right side of the rotation center 440 a of the rotating body 440.

  For this reason, the standing wall 452 has a rotating state in which any of the entrances 444a to 446a of the rotating body 440 is opened to the right from the rotating state in which the entrances 444a to 446a are opened obliquely downward to the right. In the meantime, the entrances 444a to 446a are closed. This prevents the gaming ball B1 existing at the entrances 444a to 446a from falling downward.

  Next, the movement of the game ball B1 around the adjustment mechanism 430 will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the game board 420, a guide nail 472 for guiding a game ball B1 flowing down from above to any of the entrances 444a to 446a of the rotator 440 is located above the rotator 440. Are provided.

  A plurality of guide nails 472 rotate the left guide nail row 473 that guides the game ball B1 that is above the rotating body 440 and flows leftward from the center of the rotating body 440 toward the upper center of the rotating body 440. A right guide nail row 474 is formed which guides the game ball B1 which is above the body 440 and flows rightward from the center of the rotating body 440 toward the upper center of the rotating body 440.

  The distance between the lowermost guide nail 472 in the left guide nail row 473 and the lowermost guide nail 472 in the right guide nail row 474 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, in the rotating body 440, when any of the entrances 444a to 446a is opened upward, the game ball B1 guided by the guide nail 472 enters from the entrances 444a to 446a.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the distance from the lowermost guide nail 472 in the left guide nail row 473 and the right guide nail row 474 to the outer periphery of the rotating body 440 is set to be slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. ing. In a rotating state where none of the entrances 444a to 446a in the rotator 440 is opened upward, the game ball B1 guided to the upper part of the rotator 440 by the guide nail 472 enters the entrances 444a to 446a. I can't.

  In this case, a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass is provided between the guide nail 472 located at the lowermost position in the left guide nail row 473 and the right guide nail row 474 and the outer periphery of the rotating body 440. The game balls B1 that have not been taken into the rotator 440 from the entrances 444a to 446a can escape to the left and right game areas PA of the rotator 440. For this reason, the game ball B1 that could not enter the upper part of the rotating body 440 does not stop.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the game board 420, on the upper left side of the rotator 440, the entrance and exit in a state where the game ball B1 flowing downward from the upper left of the rotator 440 is opened toward the upper left. A left guard nail 475 is provided for preventing a ball from entering from 444a to 446a, and a game ball B1 flowing down from the upper right side of the rotating body 440 is located on the upper right side of the rotating body 440. A right guard nail 476 is provided for preventing a ball from entering through the entrances 444a to 446a that are open toward the direction.

  The entrances 444a to 446a through which the game ball B1 can be taken in by the left guard nail 475 and the right guard nail 476 are limited to the entrances 444a to 446a opened upward. This prevents the plurality of game balls B1 from being taken into the rotating body 440 from the plurality of entrances 444a to 446a at a time.

  As shown in FIG. 51, a space wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the left guard nail 475, the right guard nail 476, and the rotating body 440. For this reason, the game ball B1 that is guided to the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 430 by the left guide nail row 473 or the right guide nail row 474 and is not taken in is the space between the rotating body 440 and the left guard nail 475, or the rotating body. The space between 440 and the right guard nail 476 can flow downward.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the game ball B1 other than the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 is located on the upper right side of the first through gate 35 and on the lower right side of the adjustment mechanism 430. A guard nail 471 is provided to prevent entry from between the gate 35 and winning the first through gate 35.

  By limiting the game balls B1 that can be won to the first through gate 35 to the game balls B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 430, the game ball B1 is moved to the first through gate 35 at a timing other than the winning target timing in the winning continuous period. You can prevent winning. Thereby, it can be set as the structure where a public power open winning is generated continuously in a public power open lottery executed during a winning continuous period.

  On the other hand, at the upper left of the first through gate 35 and the lower left of the adjustment mechanism 430, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 toward the lower left and released without winning the first through gate 35 is removed through the first through gate. A guard nail 471 is provided at an interval to allow it to escape to the left of the gate 35.

  The guard nail 471 prevents the game ball B1 other than the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 from flowing down from the upper left of the first through gate 35 and winning the first through gate 35. Further, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 and released to the left from the first through gate 35 does not collide with the guard nail 471 and bounce back toward the first through gate 35 again.

  Next, the movement of the game ball B1 that has entered from any of the entrances 444a to 446a of the rotating body 440 in the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 430 will be described. First, the movement of the game ball B1 entering from the first entrance / exit 444a will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (d). 53A to 53D are front views of the game board 420 showing the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner.

  FIG. 53A shows a rotation state in which the first entrance / exit 444a is opened upward. As shown in FIG. 53 (a), the game ball B1 is guided to the upper center of the rotating body 440 by the guide nail 472 (FIG. 51) in a rotating state where the first doorway 444a is opened upward. Thus, it is possible to enter the first entrance / exit 444a. The game ball B1 entering from the first entrance / exit 444a moves in the first adjustment passage 444.

  In a state where the first doorway 444a is opened upward, the first adjustment passage 444 is inclined downward, and the game ball B1 is directed from the upper first doorway 444a toward the lower intersection space 443a. invite. As already described in FIG. 51, the first center line 444 b of the first adjustment passage 444 intersects the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445. For this reason, the moving direction of the game ball B <b> 1 moving in the first adjustment passage 444 is a direction in contact with the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445.

  FIG. 53 (b) shows the movement of the game ball B1 after being guided to the intersection space 443a. As shown in FIG. 53 (b), the game ball B1 entering from the first entrance / exit 444a passes through the first adjustment passage 444 having a passage length approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1 and reaches the intersection space 443a. In the meantime, the rotating body 440 rotates clockwise.

  Even if the rotating body 440 rotates, the positional relationship that the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445 exists on the extension line of the first adjustment passage 444 does not change. Further, as already described, the second entrance / exit 445a exists at a position obtained by rotating the first entrance / exit 444a by 120 ° around the center of the rotating body 440. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), at the timing when the game ball B1 exists in the intersection space 443a, the second adjustment passage 445 has an inclination toward the lower right from the intersection space 443a.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (b), after entering the intersection space 443a from the first adjustment passage 444, the game ball B1 that has come into contact with the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445 is guided to the second adjustment passage 445 and secondly. Head to the entrance / exit 445a.

  FIG. 53 (c) shows the game ball B1 that has reached the second doorway 445a. As shown in FIG. 53 (c), at the timing when the game ball B1 is guided to the second entrance / exit 445a by the second adjustment passage 445, at least a part of the second entrance / exit 445a is closed by the standing wall 452. At the timing, there is no gap through which the game ball B1 can pass through the second entrance / exit 445a.

  For this reason, the game ball B1 waits until a gap that can pass through the second entrance / exit 445a is generated while moving in the rotation direction as the rotating body 440 rotates. As already described, the rotation speed of the rotating body 440 is constant. Further, the position of the standing wall 452 does not change. For this reason, in a state where the game ball B1 is waiting at the second entrance / exit 445a, a timing at which a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass through the second entrance / exit 445a is also periodically generated.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), in the state where the first entrance / exit 444a is opened upward, the second entrance / exit 445a is already blocked by the standing wall 452. The standing wall 452 blocks at least a part of the entrances 444a to 446a in a state where the entrances 444a to 446a are opened to the right, and prevents the game ball B1 from being discharged to the right. For this reason, the game ball B1 taken into the rotating body 440 is not discharged from above the standing wall 452.

  FIG. 53 (d) shows the movement of the game ball B1 after a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass is generated at the second doorway 445a. As shown in FIG. 53 (d), when a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass is formed at the second entrance / exit 445a, the game ball B1 loses its support and falls downward due to its own weight.

  The discharge timing at which a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass through the second doorway 445a and the discharge position at the discharge timing are constant. The adjustment mechanism 430 is set so that the discharge position is directly above the first through gate 35. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 53 (d), the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge position at the discharge timing from the second doorway 445a falls downward and wins the first through gate 35.

  However, at the discharge timing, the distance from the second entrance / exit 445a to the first through gate 35 is set longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. For this reason, the game ball B1 discharged from the second entrance / exit 445a wins the first through gate 35 with a high probability, but the winning probability is not 100%.

  Next, the movement of the game ball B1 entering from the third entrance / exit 446a will be described. In a state where the third entrance / exit 446a is opened upward, the game ball B1 guided to the upper center of the rotating body 440 by the guide nail 472 (FIG. 51) enters the third adjustment passage 446 from the third entrance / exit 446a. Enter the ball.

  The inclination of the third adjustment passage 446 in the state where the third entrance / exit 446a is opened upward is the same as the inclination of the first adjustment passage 444 already described with reference to FIG. For this reason, there is a passage wall of the first adjustment passage 444 ahead of the moving direction of the game ball B1 moving in the third adjustment passage 446.

  The positional relationship between the third adjustment passage 446 and the first adjustment passage 444 is the same as the positional relationship between the first adjustment passage 444 and the second adjustment passage 445 already described with reference to FIG. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has passed through the third adjustment passage 446 and entered the intersection space 443a comes into contact with the passage wall of the first adjustment passage 444 and is guided toward the first entrance / exit 444a.

  As already described, the shape of the first entrance / exit 444a is the same as the shape of the second entrance / exit 445a. Therefore, the discharge timing and discharge position of the game ball B1 discharged from the first doorway 444a are the discharge timing and discharge of the game ball B1 discharged from the second doorway 445a already described with reference to FIG. 53 (d). Same as position. The game ball B1 discharged from the first doorway 444a wins the first through gate 35 with a high probability.

  Next, the movement of the game ball B1 that has entered from the second doorway 445a will be described. In a state where the second entrance / exit 445a is opened upward, the game ball B1 guided to the upper center of the rotating body 440 by the guide nail 472 (FIG. 51) enters the second adjustment passage 445 from the second entrance / exit 445a. Enter the ball.

  The inclination of the second adjustment passage 445 in the state where the second entrance / exit 445a is opened upward is the same as the inclination of the first adjustment passage 444 already described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). The positional relationship between the second adjustment passage 445 and the third adjustment passage 446 is the same as the positional relationship between the first adjustment passage 444 and the second adjustment passage 445 already described with reference to FIG. . Therefore, the game ball B1 that has entered the intersection space 443a through the second adjustment passage 445 contacts the passage wall of the third adjustment passage 446 and is guided toward the third entrance / exit 446a.

  Here, the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the third entrance / exit 446a will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b). 54 (a) and 54 (b) are front views of the game board 420 showing the adjusting mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner.

  FIG. 54A shows the game ball B1 that has reached the third doorway 446a. As shown in FIG. 54A, the game ball B1 is guided to the third entrance / exit 446a by the third adjustment passage 446. At the timing when the game ball B1 reaches the third entrance / exit 446a, at least a part of the third entrance / exit 446a is closed by the standing wall 452. There is no gap through which the game ball B1 can pass through the third entrance / exit 446a. Therefore, the game ball B1 waits at the third entrance / exit 446a until a passable gap is generated.

  FIG. 54B shows the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the third entrance / exit 446a. As already described, the third entrance / exit 446a is formed narrower than the first entrance / exit 444a and the second entrance / exit 445a. For this reason, when the game ball B1 is discharged from the third entrance / exit 446a, the game ball B1 is easily affected by the passage wall existing on the rear side in the rotation direction in the third adjustment passage 446.

  As already described, there is an interval larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 between the discharge position of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), when the game ball B1 is discharged, the game ball B1 is pushed leftward from the passage wall of the third adjustment passage 446, so that the path of the game ball B1 after discharge is changed. There is a case where the first through gate 35 is displaced to the left. For this reason, the winning probability to the first through gate 35 of the game ball B1 entering from the second entrance 445a and discharged from the third entrance 446a is entered from the first entrance 444a and discharged from the second entrance 445a. The winning probability of the played game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is lower than the winning probability to the first through gate 35 of the game ball B1 that enters the third entrance 446a and is discharged from the first entrance 444a. .

  Here, when the game balls B1 flow down in a continuous state, the same entrance / exit 444a to 446a in which both the first game ball B1 and the second game ball B1 face upward. There is a possibility of entering the ball. In this case, the two game balls B1 are guided to the same entrance / exit 444a to 446a and discharged from the same entrance / exit 444a to 446a. The timing and direction in which the first game ball B1 is discharged are as described above with reference to FIGS. 53 (d) and 54 (b), and are discharged from the first doorway 444a or the second doorway 445a. The gaming ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 with a high probability, and the gaming ball B1 discharged from the third entrance / exit 446a is detached from the first through gate 35 with a high probability.

  On the other hand, the second game ball B1 is positioned more inside the rotating body 440 than the first game ball B1 at the timing when the first game ball B1 is discharged. For this reason, the discharge timing of the second game ball B1 is delayed from the discharge timing of the first game ball B1. In this case, the rotation of the rotator 440 advances from the discharge timing of the first game ball B1, and the second game ball B1 is discharged in a state where the discharge direction has moved to the left. . For this reason, the second game ball B1 is disengaged to the left of the first through gate 35 with a high probability regardless of which of the outlets 444a to 446a is the discharge source.

  Thus, even if two game balls B1 flow down in a state where the game area PA is connected, the possibility that the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 at a timing other than the winning target period in the winning continuous period is not possible. It is set to be low. For this reason, even when the adjustment mechanism 430 according to the present embodiment is used, when the winning continuous period is reached, the public power open winning is continuously generated.

  The adjustment drive unit 184 rotates the rotator 440 so that the timing at which the game ball B1 can be discharged from the rotator 440 occurs once every 2 seconds. By adopting a configuration in which the adjustment drive unit 184 slowly rotates the rotating body 440, the game ball B1 that collides with the entrances 444a to 446a moving in the rotation direction at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 430 is strongly directed to the right. It is possible to avoid a situation where the player is bounced back and gives the player a sense of incongruity.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The game ball B1 is taken into any of the adjustment passages 444 to 446 and discharged from the entrances 444a to 446a different from the adjustment passages 444 to 446 that have taken in the game ball B1. In a configuration in which the rotating body 440 rotates while the game ball B1 is held by the entrance / exit 444a to 446a that has taken in the game ball B1, the game ball B1 is prevented from falling from the entrance / exit 444a to 446a during the rotation. Fall prevention means provided around the rotating body 440 is required. In this case, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the rotator 440 and the fall prevention means, and the rotation of the rotator 440 is obstructed.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B1 passes through the inside of the passage forming portion 443 and is discharged from the entrances 444a to 446a different from the entrances 444a to 446a taken in, a malfunction occurs during the game, and the game It is possible to reduce the possibility that it is necessary to take a measure for canceling the problem and solving the problem. Further, by suppressing an increase in the number of members constituting the adjustment mechanism 430, the configuration of the adjustment mechanism 430 can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost of the adjustment mechanism 430 can be reduced.

  The rotating body 440 is configured to discharge the game ball B1 before the entrances 444a to 446a that have taken the game ball B1 upward are in a direction in which the game ball B1 can be discharged. For this reason, compared with the structure in which the rotating body 440 rotates while the game ball B1 is held by the entrances 444a to 446a that have taken in the game ball B1, the time required for the game ball B1 to be taken in and discharged can be shortened. Can do. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player's interest shifts to another place between the time when the game ball B1 is taken in and the time when the game ball B1 is discharged, and the degree of attention to the player's adjustment mechanism 430 decreases.

  The adjustment mechanism 430 includes a standing wall 452 that prevents the game ball B1 from dropping downward until the game ball B1 guided to the entrances 444a to 446a reaches a discharge timing at which the game ball B1 can win the first through gate 35. . By using the standing wall 452, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls B <b> 1 discharged downward from the first through gate 35 at a timing earlier than the discharge timing. For this reason, the possibility that the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 out of the winning target period during the winning continuous period is reduced, and the probability that the winning win is generated when a winning occurs during the winning continuous period is increased. Can do. Thereby, the player's expectation for the winning continuous period can be raised, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Since the distance between the discharge position of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1, depending on the discharge direction and discharge speed of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430. The discharged game ball B1 is configured to be detached from the first through gate 35. The width of the third entrance / exit 446a is set to be narrower than the width of the first entrance / exit 444a and the width of the second entrance / exit 445a. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball B1 discharged from the third entrance / exit 446a is detached from the first through gate 35 is the possibility that the game ball B1 discharged from the second entrance / exit 445a is detached from the first through gate 35, and It is higher than the possibility that the game ball B1 from which the game ball B1 taken in through the three entrances 446a is discharged is removed from the first through gate 35. Thereby, all of the game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 430 win the first through gate 35, and the situation where the player pays attention only to the game ball B1 taken in the adjustment mechanism 430 and does not pay attention to the discharge is avoided. be able to. Then, by collecting the player's interest up to the moment of winning the first through gate 35, the interest of the game can be improved.

  The game ball B1 taken into the first adjustment passage 444 from the first entrance / exit 444a is guided by the second adjustment passage 445 and discharged from the second entrance / exit 445a, and from the second entrance / exit 445a to the second adjustment passage 445. The game ball B1 taken in is guided by the third adjustment passage 446 and discharged from the third entrance / exit 446a. The game ball B1 taken into the third adjustment passage 446 from the third entrance / exit 446a is guided to the first adjustment passage 444 and discharged from the first entrance / exit 444a. As described above, the game ball B1 taken from the entrances 444a to 446a moves through the adjustment passages 444 to 446 in a combination that can discharge the game ball B1 at the shortest distance. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the taken game ball B1 is not easily discharged and repeatedly rises and falls within the adjustment passages 444 to 446. As a result, the number of game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 toward the first through gate 35 can be prevented from decreasing, and the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 430 can be avoided.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  The game board 520 of the present embodiment is provided with an adjustment device 540 for adjusting the timing at which the game ball B1 is supplied to the first through gate 35. The adjustment device 540 and the configuration around the adjustment device 540 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a front view of the game board 520 showing the periphery of the first through gate 35 and the adjusting device 540 in an enlarged manner.

  As shown in FIG. 55, in the game board 520, above the first through gate 35, the adjustment device 540 and a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment device 540 toward the first through gate 35 are first. An adjusting mechanism 530 including an electric nail 560 for preventing the through gate 35 from winning a prize is provided. Here, the electric nail 560 is the same member as the electric nail 361 already described in FIG. 47 of the third embodiment.

  First, the adjusting device 540 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 55, the adjusting device 540 allows the game ball B1 to enter the adjusting device 540 when it is in the open state and enters the game ball B1 into the adjusting device 540 when it is in the closed state. The adjusting unit 546 for prohibiting the adjustment, the adjusting drive unit 547 for executing the transition from the closed state to the open state in the adjusting unit 546, and the transition from the open state to the closed state, and the game ball B1 taken into the adjusting device 540 And a guide member 541 for guiding the guide toward the first through gate 35.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the adjusting device 540 includes a plate-like base body 542 having a predetermined thickness. Further, the game board 520 is provided with a base recess (not shown) that can accommodate the base body 542 without any gap. The adjusting device 540 is fixed by nailing the base body 542 to the game board 520 in a state where the base body 542 is housed in the base recess. In a state where the guide member 541 is fixed to the game board 520, the front surface of the base body 542 exists in the same plane as the front surface of the game board 520.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the guide member 541 includes a passage forming portion 543 that is formed so as to protrude vertically from the front surface of the base body 542 toward the front. The passage forming portion 543 exists from the center portion to the lower portion of the front surface of the base body 542 in the vertical direction, and extends from the front surface of the base body 542 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). Yes. In the passage forming portion 543, a guide passage 545 for guiding the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 is formed.

  The guide passage 545 is formed by providing a through-hole penetrating the passage formation portion 543 in the vertical direction with respect to the passage formation portion 543, and allows one game ball B1 to pass therethrough. The cross section of the passage that makes it impossible for a plurality of game balls B1 to pass simultaneously.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the guide passage 545 is a straight passage toward the first through gate 35. The guide passage 545 has a passage length approximately 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball B1, and can direct the game ball B1 to be discharged. The distance from the lower end of the guide passage 525 to the upper end of the first through gate 35 is set to be approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 545 is positioned at the position of the electric nail 560. Accordingly, there is a case where the first through gate 35 is won and a case where no prize is won.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the adjustment unit 546 is an upper part of the base body 542 and is provided in front of the front surface of the base body 542. The adjustment drive unit 547 is disposed behind the adjustment unit 546 and behind the base body 542. The adjustment unit 546 is connected to an adjustment drive unit 547 mounted on the back side of the game board 520, and is driven by the adjustment drive unit 547 to take either a closed state or an open state. When the adjuster 546 is closed, the game ball B1 cannot enter the guide passage 545, and when the adjuster 546 is open, the guide ball 545 can enter.

  The adjustment drive unit 547 is connected to the output port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12), and the drive signal output from the MPU 62 is input to the adjustment drive unit 547. The adjustment drive unit 547 keeps the adjustment unit 546 in the closed state when the drive signal is in the LOW state, and sets the adjustment unit 546 in the open state when the drive signal is in the HI state.

  The main CPU 63 (FIG. 12) sends the adjustment drive unit 547 to the adjustment drive unit 547 on the condition that it is the switching timing for shifting the adjustment unit 546 from the closed state to the open state in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) executed at a cycle of 4 msec. The output drive signal is raised from the LOW state to the HI state, and the drive signal output to the adjustment drive unit 547 is determined to be HI on the condition that the adjustment unit 546 is shifted from the open state to the closed state. Fall from state to LOW state.

  Based on the drive signal input from the main CPU 63, the adjustment drive unit 547 repeats the opening / closing operation of the adjustment unit 546 that closes the adjustment unit 546 for 0.95 sec and opens it for 0.05 sec. For this reason, the guide passage 545 is in a state where the game ball B1 can be taken in at a cycle of 1 sec, and the game ball B1 can be discharged toward the first through gate 35 at a cycle of approximately 1 sec.

  Here, the closed state and the open state of the adjusting unit 546 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 (a) and 56 (b). FIG. 56A is a front view of the adjusting device 540 in the closed state, and FIG. 56B is a front view of the adjusting device 540 in the opened state.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the adjustment portion 546 is located on the upper left of the guide passage 545 in the base body 542, and is provided on the left rotation shaft 548 extending in the front-rear direction and the left rotation shaft 548. And a left side adjustment member 549 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape fixed in a rotatable manner. The left adjustment member 549 exists from the front surface of the game board 520 (FIG. 55) to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1).

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the left adjustment member 549 includes a right side surface 549a located inside the adjustment portion 546 in a closed state and a left side surface 549b located outside. In the adjustment portion 546 in the closed state, the right side surface 549a and the left side surface 549b are inclined leftward toward the lower side.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (b), the left adjustment member 549 rotates counterclockwise around the left rotation shaft 548 when the adjustment portion 546 shifts from the closed state to the open state. In the opened state of the adjustment portion 546, the left side adjustment member 549 is in a state where the right side surface 549a is inclined downward toward the right side, and the left side surface 549b is inclined downward toward the right side. It will be in the state.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the adjustment portion 546 is located on the upper right side of the guide passage 545 in the base body 542, and extends to the front and rear in the right and left rotation shafts 551 and 520. A right-side adjustment member 552 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape fixed to the 551 in a rotatable manner. The right adjustment member 552 exists from the front surface of the game board 520 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the right adjustment member 552 includes a left side surface 552a located inside the adjustment unit 546 in a closed state and a right side surface 552b located outside. In the adjustment part 546 in the closed state, the left side surface 552a and the right side surface 552b are inclined rightward toward the lower side.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (b), the right adjustment member 552 rotates clockwise around the right rotation shaft 551 when the adjustment unit 546 shifts from the closed state to the open state. In the opened state of the adjustment portion 546, the right adjustment member 552 is in a state where the left side surface 552a is inclined downward toward the left and the right side surface 552b is inclined downward toward the left. It will be in the state.

  As shown in FIG. 56A, in the adjustment portion 546 in the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the left adjustment member 549 and the upper end of the right adjustment member 552 cannot fit the game ball B1 in the gap. Narrow to the extent. As already described, in the closed state of the adjustment portion 546, the left side surface 549b of the left adjustment member 549 is inclined downward toward the left, and the game ball B1 in contact with the left side surface 549b is moved downward to the left. Let it go. Further, the right side surface 552b of the right side adjustment member 552 is inclined downward toward the right, and the game ball B1 that contacts the right side surface 552b is released to the lower right.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), in the opened adjustment portion 546, the gap between the right side surface 549a of the left adjustment member 549 and the left side surface 552a of the right adjustment member 552 is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. A wide space is spreading. And as already explained, in the opened state of the adjusting portion 546, the right side surface 549a of the left side adjusting member 549 is inclined downward toward the right side, and the game ball B1 in contact with the right side surface 549a is moved to the lower right side. Bounce back and enter the guide passage 545. Further, the left side surface 552a of the right adjustment member 552 is inclined downward toward the left, and the game ball B1 that contacts the left side surface 552a bounces back to the lower left and enters the guide passage 545.

  In addition, in the process in which the adjustment unit 546 transitions from the open state to the closed state, the interval between the upper end of the left adjustment member 549 and the upper end of the right adjustment member 552 gradually decreases. The adjustment unit 546 is configured such that the right side surface 549a of the left adjustment member 549 is directed leftward at a timing before the interval between the upper end of the left adjustment member 549 and the upper end of the right adjustment member 552 becomes narrower than the diameter of the game ball B1. The left side surface 552a of the right adjustment member 552 has a shape that is inclined rightward toward the lower side.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the electric nail 560 is connected to the nail drive unit 560a, contacts the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525, changes the course of the game ball B1, and the game ball B1 A prohibition position that prevents the first through gate 35 from being won, and a permission position that allows the game ball B1 to depart from the course of the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 and allow the game ball B1 to win the first through gate 35. And take.

  A nail drive signal output from the output port of the MPU 62 is input to the nail drive unit 560a. The nail drive unit 560a keeps the electric nail 560 in the prohibited position when the nail drive signal is in the LOW state, and moves the electric nail 560 to the permitted position when the nail drive signal is in the HI state. Switching between the prohibition position and the permission position of the electric nail 560 in the nail drive unit 560a is performed in conjunction with the switching between the closed state and the open state of the adjustment unit 546 in the adjustment drive unit 547.

  Specifically, in the main CPU 63, the rise of the nail drive signal from the LOW state to the HI state is performed in synchronization with the rise of the drive signal from the LOW state to the HI state. For this reason, the electric nail 560 moves from the prohibition position to the permission position in synchronization with the timing at which the adjustment unit 546 shifts from the closed state to the open state. The electric nail 560 always takes the permission position during the period in which the adjusting portion 546 is in the open state. For this reason, during the period in which the adjustment unit 546 is in the open state, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment device 540 is in a state where it can win the first through gate 35.

  In the main CPU 63, the nail drive signal is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state at a timing later than the timing at which the drive signal is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state. For this reason, the electric nail 560 returns from the permitted position to the prohibited position with a slight delay from the timing at which the adjusting portion 546 returns from the open state to the closed state. The timing at which the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibition position is permitted for the game ball B1 that has entered the guide passage 525 within 0.04 sec from the start timing of the open state when the adjustment unit 546 is open for 0.05 sec. This is the timing at which it is possible to win the first through gate 35 through the left side of the electric nail 560 at the position.

  Further, the timing at which the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position is once sandwiched between the adjustment portions 546 until the open adjustment portion 546 returns to the closed state, and then taken into the guide passage 525. This is the timing at which the game ball B1 is prevented from winning the first through gate 35.

  Here, a situation where the winning of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting device 540 to the first through gate 35 is blocked by the electric nail 560 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (a) to (d). 57 (a) to 57 (d) are front views of the game board 520 showing the periphery of the adjustment mechanism 530 in an enlarged manner.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (a), when the game ball B1 enters the adjustment portion 546 in the intermediate state that shifts from the open state to the closed state, the game ball B1 is connected to the right side surface 549a and the right side adjustment member of the left adjustment member 549. There is a possibility of being sandwiched between the left side surface 552a of the 552. In this state, the right side surface 549a of the left adjustment member 549 is inclined leftward toward the lower side, and the left side surface 552a of the right adjustment member 552 is inclined rightward toward the lower side, When the condition that the contact position with the adjustment unit 546 is above the center of gravity of the game ball B1 is satisfied, the sandwiched game ball B1 is moved downward by the force of the adjustment unit 546 to return to the closed state. It is pushed and enters the guide passage 525.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position before the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 passes through the position of the electric nail 560. For this reason, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjustment portions 546 in the intermediate state collides with the electric nail 560 that has returned to the prohibition position downstream of the guide passage 525, and comes off to the left of the first through gate 35.

  As already described in the first embodiment, the minimum interval between the game balls B1 in the game ball launch mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) is 0.6 sec. The game balls B1 may flow down toward the adjustment unit 546 of the adjustment device 540 in a state where a plurality of game balls B1 are connected. As already described, the duration of the adjustment unit 546 in the open state is set to 0.05 sec. For this reason, when two game balls B1 continue to enter the adjustment unit 546 within 0.05 sec, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), the first game ball B1 is adjusted to the adjustment unit 546. After entering the guide passage 525 in the open state, there is a possibility that the second game ball B1 may be sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 that attempt to return from the open state to the closed state.

  In this case, when the second game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 enters the guide passage 525, the electric nail 560 reaches the position of the first game ball B1. It is in the permitted position at the timing. Therefore, the first game ball B1 can pass through the left side of the electric nail 560 and win the first through gate 35.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57 (d), the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position before the second game ball B 1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 reaches the position of the electric nail 560. Therefore, the second game ball B1 collides with the electric nail 560. In this way, the winning of the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 to the first through gate 35 is blocked by the electric nail 560. As a result, in the winning continuous period, a winning to the first through gate 35 of the second game ball B1 occurs at a timing deviated from the winning target period, thereby avoiding a result of losing in the public power open lottery. Can do.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The adjustment mechanism 530 is configured not to allow the game ball B <b> 1 to enter the guide passage 525 when the adjustment unit 546 is closed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 at a timing that does not result in the public power open winning in the winning continuous period. Thereby, it is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of the public power open winning during the winning continuous period. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the player's expectation for the winning continuous period.

  Between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35 is at least the diameter of the game ball B1, and in the course of the course where the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 flows down toward the first through gate 35, An electric nail 560 that moves between a prohibition position that blocks the path and a permission position that allows passage of the path is provided, and the electric nail 560 is at the end of the period in which the adjustment unit 546 is kept open. The game ball B1 entering the guide passage 525 is prevented from winning the first through gate 35.

  When all of the game balls B1 taken into the guide passage 525 win the first through gate 35, there is a possibility that the player pays attention only to the take-in of the game balls B1 in the adjustment mechanism 530 and does not pay attention to the discharge. On the other hand, by adjusting the player up to the moment of winning the first through gate 35 by preventing the winning of a part of the game ball B1 taken into the guide passage 525 to the first through gate 35. It is possible to maintain interest in the vicinity of the mechanism 530 and improve the interest of the game.

  The adjustment mechanism 530 allows the second game ball B1 connected to the first game ball B1 after the first game ball B1 is taken into the guide passage 525 in the opened state of the adjustment unit 546. When the intermediate state adjustment unit 546 is interposed, the electric nail 560 in the prohibited position prevents the second game ball B1 from winning the first through gate 35. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 at a timing that does not result in the public power open winning in the winning continuous period. Thereby, it is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of the public power open winning during the winning continuous period. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the player's expectation for the winning continuous period.

<Another embodiment in the fifth embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment described above, the adjustment drive unit 547 may not be provided, and the adjustment unit 546 may be configured not to move in an open state. In this case, since the adjustment part 546 does not take a closed state, the game ball B1 can always enter the guide passage 525. The game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 collides with the electric nail 560 when the electric nail 560 is in the prohibited position, and thus deviates from the course toward the first through gate 35. On the other hand, when the electric nail 560 is in the permission position, it is possible to win the first through gate 35 through the left side of the electric nail 560. For example, the adjustment mechanism 530 is configured so that the electric nail 560 repeats the prohibition position for 0.95 sec and the permission position for 0.05 sec by the nail drive unit 560a. Thus, it is possible to provide the game ball B1 with a period of 1 sec.

  -In 5th Embodiment mentioned above, it is good also as a structure which forms an escape path behind the game board 520 and escapes the game ball B1 pinched | interposed into the adjustment part 546 to the back of the game board 520. FIG. Specifically, in the game board 520, a passage entrance is formed as an opening facing forward in an area located behind the adjusting portion 546. The game board 520 includes an escape passage that guides the game ball B1 taken from the passage entrance downward, and a passage exit that discharges the game ball B1 guided by the escape passage to the front of the game board 520.

  In a state in which the adjustment unit 546 sandwiches the game ball B1, the right side surface of the left adjustment member 549 is inclined leftward toward the rear, and the left side surface of the right adjustment member 552 is rightward toward the rear. It will be in a state inclined to the direction. For this reason, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 is guided to the passage entrance formed at the rear of the adjusting portion 546 as the adjusting portion 546 shifts to the closed state. The game ball B1 that has entered the escape passage from the passage entrance is guided downward by the escape passage. The game ball B1 is discharged from the passage exit and is again positioned in front of the game board 520.

  In the fifth embodiment described above, by adjusting the relationship between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35, the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 wins the first through gate 35 and wins It is good also as a structure which produces the case where it does not carry out. Specifically, the guide passage 525 is provided obliquely above and to the left of the first through gate 35, and an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35. ing. In this case, even if the electric nail 560 does not exist between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35, the game that has been discharged according to the speed at which the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 is discharged. The case where the ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 and the case where the ball B1 does not win can be caused. By leaving the possibility that the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 is detached from the first through gate 35, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the behavior of the game ball B1 after discharge.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a second operation port 582 is provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA, and a distribution prize device 583 is provided below the second operation port 582. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 580 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a front view of the game board 580. As shown in FIG. 58, the game area PA includes an upper area PA1 located above the variable display unit 36, a left area PA2 located on the left side of the variable display unit 36, and a right area PA3 located on the right side of the variable display unit 36. , And a lower area PA4 located below the variable display unit 36.

  As described in the first embodiment, the first through gate 35 is provided in the left region PA2, and the adjusting mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35. The winning possible timing at which the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 can win the first through gate 35 occurs in a 1 sec cycle. In addition, a winning target period, which is a win for public power in the public power open lottery performed in response to a winning at the first through gate 35, also occurs at a cycle of 1 sec. Therefore, when the winning possible timing overlaps with the winning target period, it becomes a winning continuous period, and when the winning possible timing does not overlap with the target period, it becomes a non-winning continuous period.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the game board 580 includes a passage inlet 171, a escape passage 172, a passage outlet 173, and an outlet roof 174 around the adjustment mechanism 180, similarly to the game board 24 in the first embodiment. ing. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has not flowed into the adjustment mechanism 180 even though it has flowed down toward the adjustment mechanism 180 enters the escape passage 172 from the passage inlet 171. Then, the game ball B1 is guided to the passage outlet 173 by the escape passage 172, and discharged from the passage outlet 173 toward the front of the game board 580.

  As shown in FIG. 58, a first working port 581 is provided in the lower region PA4. The first working port 581 does not include a member for opening and closing the first working port 581 and is open upward. As shown in FIG. 58, the variable display unit 36 includes a stage 36a through which the game ball B1 can pass and from which the game ball B1 can be discharged. The variable display unit 36 is formed with a guide passage for allowing the game ball B1 to flow into the stage 36a. The game ball B1 that flows into the stage 36a and is discharged from the center of the stage 36a to the outside of the variable display unit 36 falls from directly above the first operation port 581 toward the first operation port 581. For this reason, the game ball B1 discharged from the center of the stage 36a is easy to win the first operating port 581.

  The first operating port 581 is provided in the lower area PA4, so that the shooting operation device 28 (FIG. 2) is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2, and the right area PA3 In any case where the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down, it is possible to win the game ball B1 into the first operation port 581. However, when the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 36a is provided for the left area PA2 and is not provided for the right area PA3, the flow down the left area PA2 flows down the right area PA3. As compared with the above, winning to the first working port 581 is likely to occur. In addition, in the arrangement of the gaming parts and the nails 24b in the left area PA2 and the right area PA3, it is easier for the first operating port 581 to win a prize when flowing down the left area PA2 than when flowing down the right area PA3. Is set to The game ball B1 that has flowed down the right area PA3 hardly receives a prize for the first operation port 581.

  As shown in FIG. 58, a second working port 582 is provided in the right area PA3. The second operating port 582 is not allowed to win when the firing operation device 28 (FIG. 2) is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2, and the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3. When the firing operation device 28 is operated, a prize can be awarded.

  The configuration of the second working port 582 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 59A and 59B are schematic views showing the configuration of the second working port 582. FIG. The second operating port 582 is provided with a utility member 582a as a guide piece (support piece) made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The general electric utility 582a is connected to a general electric drive unit 582b mounted on the back side of the game board 580, and is driven by the general electric drive unit 582b to be in the closed state shown in FIG. 59 (a). And it arrange | positions in either of the open states shown in FIG.59 (b). The game ball B1 cannot win the second operating port 582 in the closed state of the general electric character 582a, and the win to the second operating port 582 becomes possible when the general electric character 582a is opened. By the way, when it is in the open state, the general electric utility 582a protrudes toward the game area PA, and guides the winning to the second operation port 582. The second operating port 582 is provided with a detection sensor 582c for detecting the game ball B1 that has won the second operating port 582. The detection sensor 582c is connected to an input port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12), and the main CPU 63 (FIG. 12) detects a winning to the second operating port 582 based on detection information from the detection sensor 582c. .

  As shown in FIG. 58, a second through gate 39 is provided above the second working port 582 in the right region PA3. The second through gate 39 is not allowed to win when the firing operation device 28 (FIG. 2) is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2, and the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3. When the launching operation device 28 is operated, it is provided at a position where a prize can be awarded. The second through gate 39 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball B1 that wins the second through gate 39 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball B1 that has won the second through gate 39 can win the second operation port 582. The second through gate 39 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the game ball B1 won in the second through gate 39. The detection sensor is connected to the input port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12), and the main CPU 63 (FIG. 12) detects a winning to the second through gate 39 based on detection information from the detection sensor.

  As already described in the first embodiment, a lottery for opening a public train is executed in response to a winning of either the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39 of the game ball B1. Then, when the public power open lottery is won in the public power open lottery, the general electric utility 582a of the second operating port 582 is switched from the closed state to the open state.

  As shown in FIG. 58, a first special figure display unit 584 and a second special figure display unit 585 are provided at the lower right of the game board 580. In the first special figure display unit 584, a winning lottery is performed in response to a winning at the first operating port 581, whereby a variation display of the pattern or a predetermined display is performed, and a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Is called. In addition, in the second special figure display unit 585, the winning lottery is performed in response to the winning of the second operating port 582, and thereby the variation display of the pattern or the predetermined display is performed, and the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 58, a first special figure holding display unit 586 is provided at a position adjacent to the first special figure display unit 584, and a second adjacent to the second special figure display unit 585 is provided at a second position. A special figure hold display section 587 is provided. The first special figure hold display unit 586 displays a maximum of four game balls B1 winning in the first operation port 581, and the second special figure hold display unit 587 displays the second operation port 582. Up to four game balls B1 that have won a prize are displayed on hold.

  As shown in FIG. 58, in the lower area PA4, the special prize winning device 32 already described in the first embodiment is provided at a position below the first operation port 581 and above the out port 24a. It has been. In the special electric prize winning device 32, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left region PA2, and the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right region PA3. You can win in any case.

  As shown in FIG. 58, a distribution winning device 583 is provided below the second operation port 582 in the right region PA3. The distribution winning device 583 cannot be awarded when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2, and the shooting operation device so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3. When 28 is operated, a prize can be won.

  A winning lottery is executed in response to a winning in either the first operating port 581 or the second operating port 582. If the winning lottery results in the winning lottery, the process shifts to the opening / closing execution mode already described in the first embodiment. As a result, the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened, and the game ball B1 can be awarded to the special electricity prize winning device 32. In addition, in the winning lottery executed with the winning of the second operating port 582 as a trigger, a small hit result is provided in addition to the big win result. When the winning lottery is executed with the winning of the second operating port 582 as a trigger, the result is a branch execution mode in which a winning to the distribution winning device 583 is possible.

  Here, the distribution winning device 583 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b). FIG. 60A is a longitudinal sectional view as seen from the side of the distribution winning device 583, and FIG. 60B is a longitudinal sectional view as seen from the back side of the distribution winning device 583.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (a), the distribution winning device 583 is formed with a distribution inlet 591 having a size allowing the game ball B1 to pass therethrough, and the game ball B1 passes through the distribution inlet 591. A distribution-side opening / closing member 592 is provided for switching between a closed state in which the game ball B1 cannot pass and an open state in which the game ball B1 can pass. The distribution-side opening / closing member 592 is opened by being driven by a distribution inlet drive unit 593 through a link mechanism (not shown). The distribution entrance 591 constitutes the entrance of the guide passage 594, and the game ball B1 flowing from the distribution entrance 591 flows down the guide passage 594 to the downstream side.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), the guide passage 594 is bifurcated from the midway position, and constitutes an upstream region 595 that constitutes the upstream side of the branch position and one of the downstream side of the branch position. The V winning area 596 and the discharge area 597 constituting the other downstream side of the branch position are provided. In addition, a shutter 598 is provided at the branch position as distribution means for distributing the game ball B1 that has reached the branch position from the upstream area 595 to either the V winning area 596 or the discharging area 597. When the shutter 598 is not driven by the shutter drive unit 599, the game ball B1 that has reached the branch position flows into the discharge region 597, and the shutter 598 is driven by the shutter drive unit 599. Then, the game ball B1 that has reached the branch position flows into the V winning area 596.

  The detection sensor 595a for counting is provided so that the detection area exists at a position where the game ball B1 flowing into the upstream area 595 always passes. Based on the detection of the game ball B1 by the counting detection sensor 595a, the payout of the winning ball corresponding to the winning to the distribution winning device 583 is executed. In addition, a V winning detection sensor 596a is provided so that a detection region exists at a position where the game ball B1 flowing into the V winning region 596 always passes. Based on the detection of the game ball B1 by the V winning detection sensor 596a, the state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode in which the special prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. Further, a discharge detection sensor 597a is provided so that a detection region exists at a position where the game ball B1 flowing into the discharge region 597 always passes. Based on the detection results from the discharge detection sensor 597a and the V winning detection sensor 596a, it is determined whether or not the game ball B1 remains in the distribution winning device 583.

  Incidentally, the drive timing of the shutter drive unit 599 is set so that the game ball B1 winning the distribution winning device 583 is guided to the V winning area 596 with a probability of 80%. Is optional, and the probability of being guided to the discharge region 597 may be higher. However, in order to increase the advantage of winning in the jackpot lottery based on the winning at the second operating port 582, the probability of shifting to the branch execution mode based on the winning at the second operating port 582 and the distribution winning device The product of the game ball B1 won in 583 and the probability of flowing into the V winning area 596 is higher than the probability of winning in the jackpot lottery based on winning in the first operating port 581. It is preferable that a minute probability is set. For example, it is preferable that the probability of being guided to the V winning area 596 is set higher, and it is more preferable to be guided to the V winning area 596 with a probability of 75% or more and less than 100%.

  In addition, the distribution winning device 583 is preferably formed so that it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 to which of the V winning area 596 and the discharging area 597 the winning game ball B1 is distributed. Specifically, it is preferable that the front side of the distribution winning device 583 is formed to be colored transparent or colorless and transparent.

  In the branch execution mode, when the game ball B1 enters the distribution winning device 583 and flows into the V winning area 596 and is detected by the V winning detection sensor 597a, a V winning is generated. On the other hand, when the game ball B1 is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 597a in the branch execution mode, no V winning is generated.

  Next, the winning lottery in this embodiment will be described. First, the electrical configuration for performing the lottery with the main CPU 63 (FIG. 13) will be described.

  The holding storage area 65a (FIG. 13) of the present embodiment includes a first holding area and a second holding area. The first holding area is numerical information on the winning random number counter C1 (FIG. 13), the big hit type counter C2 (FIG. 13), and the reach random number counter C3 (FIG. 13) according to the winning history to the first operating port 581. Is a region in which the combination is stored as holding information, and the second holding area has numerical values of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 in accordance with the winning history to the second operating port 582. This is an area where a combination of information is stored as pending information.

  In each of the first holding area and the second holding area, up to four winning histories are held and stored. Each numerical information stored in the first holding area and the second holding area is moved to the execution area AE (FIG. 13). The main CPU 63 executes a winning lottery based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE at the start of one game round.

  Next, various tables used for the winning lottery will be described. The main ROM 64 (FIG. 12) stores a low frequency left table, a regular right table, and a non-regular right table as tables used for the winning lottery.

  In each winning lottery table, the probability of a big hit result is set to be the same. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the high probability mode and the low probability mode described in the first embodiment are not set, and the main ROM 64 has a low frequency left table, a regular right table, and One type of non-regular right table is stored.

  First, the low frequency left table will be described. In the case where the support mode of the second operating port 582 is the low frequency support mode, the holding information stored in the first holding area when the winning to the first operating port 581 occurs is the low frequency left holding information. To do. The low-frequency left-side hold information includes information indicating that the hold information is stored in the low-frequency support mode and that the hold information is stored based on a winning to the first operating port 581. Yes. The left table for low frequency is a table that is read when the hold information stored in the execution area AE is the left hold information for low frequency.

  Only the jackpot result is set in the left table for low frequency, and the small hit result is not set. In the low-frequency left table, a high-frequency result that becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode and a low-frequency result that becomes the low-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode are set as the jackpot results.

  When the first operation port 581 wins in the low-frequency support mode and the jackpot result is a winning lottery based on the win, the current jackpot result is a high-frequency result and the first implementation described above When “1” is not set in the high-frequency flag described in the embodiment, “1” is set in the high-frequency flag. If the current big hit result is a low frequency result and the high frequency flag is set to “1”, the high frequency flag is cleared to “0”. When a big win result is obtained in the winning lottery, the mode shifts to an opening / closing execution mode. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, when “1” is set in the high frequency flag, the support mode of the second operation port 582 becomes the high frequency support mode and the value of the high frequency flag is “0”. ”, The support mode of the second working port 582 is the low frequency support mode.

  Next, the regular right table will be described. The hold information stored in the second holding area when the winning to the second operation port 582 occurs in the high frequency support mode is set as the right holding information for regular use. In the right-side hold information for regular use, there is information indicating that the hold information is stored based on the winning to the second working port 582 and that the winning to the second working port 582 is generated by a regular flow. include. The right holding information for regular use is stored in the second holding area even when a winning to the second operating port 582 occurs during the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode. The regular right table is a table that is read when the hold information stored in the execution area AE is the regular right hold information.

  Here, the normal flow means that the game ball B1 is fired toward the right area PA3, triggered by either the high frequency support mode or the low continuous support mode winning continuous period. It is the flow of the game where the operation is performed. On the other hand, the flow of the game in which the operation of launching the game ball B1 toward the right area PA3 in the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode is assumed to be an irregular flow.

  A jackpot result and a small hit result are set in the right table for regular use. In the regular right table, the high-frequency result and the low-frequency result described above are set as the jackpot result.

  In the right table for regular use, the probability of occurrence of a small hit result is set so that if a big hit result is not obtained, a small hit result is obtained with a probability of approximately 100%. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the generation | occurrence | production probability of the small hit result in case it does not become a big hit result is set to 100%. In the regular right table, a high frequency small hit result and a low frequency small hit result, which will be described later, are set as the small hit results.

  This is a big hit result when a win to the second operating port 582 occurs in either the winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode, and a win lottery result is obtained in the win lottery based on the win Is a high frequency result and “1” is not set in the high frequency flag, “1” is set in the high frequency flag. If the current jackpot result is a low frequency result and “1” is set in the high frequency flag, the high frequency flag is cleared to “0”. If the winning lottery results in a big win, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, when a small hit result is obtained in the current winning lottery, if the present small hit result is a high frequency small hit result and “1” is not set in the high frequency flag, the high frequency is determined. “1” is set in the flag. If the current small hit result is the low frequency small hit result and “1” is set in the high frequency flag, the high frequency flag is cleared to “0”. When the small win result is obtained in the winning lottery, the process shifts to the above-described branch execution mode, and when the V winning is generated in the branch execution mode, the process shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  If “1” is set in the high frequency flag after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the support mode of the second operation port 582 becomes the high frequency support mode and the value of the high frequency flag is “0”. In this case, the support mode of the second working port 582 becomes the low frequency support mode. In addition, when the branch execution mode ends without generating a V prize, the high frequency flag is cleared to “0”. For this reason, after the branch execution mode, the support mode of the second operation port 582 becomes the low frequency support mode.

  As already described, when the winning continuous period is reached in the low-frequency support mode, it becomes a state in which the public power open winning that makes the second operating port 582 open is continuously generated. In this case, the winning lottery executed with the winning of the second operating port 582 as a trigger is the same as the winning lottery executed with the winning of the second operating port 582 as a trigger in the high frequency support mode.

  As already described, the probability that a jackpot result will be generated in the winning lottery using the left table for low frequency is the same as the probability that a jackpot result will be generated in the winning lottery using the right table for regular use. Further, when the winning lottery using the left table for low frequency does not result in a big win, the result is a losing result. On the other hand, when the winning lottery using the right table for regular use does not result in a big win, the result is approximately 100. Shift to branch execution mode with a probability of%. Therefore, the low frequency support mode is a disadvantageous support mode for the player than the high frequency support mode.

  Even in the low frequency support mode, which is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the high frequency support mode, the same winning lottery is executed as in the high frequency support mode when the winning continuous period is reached. As already described in the first embodiment, the player is not notified of the generation timing of the winning continuous period. For this reason, in the low frequency support mode, the player may be in an advantageous state at an unexpected timing. Thus, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player a sense of expectation that the winning continuous period will occur.

  Next, the non-regular right table will be described. The holding information stored in the second holding area in response to the winning of the second operating port 582 in the non-winning continuous period in the low-frequency support mode is set as the non-regular right holding information. The non-regular right-side hold information indicates that the hold information is stored with the winning of the second operating port 582 as a trigger, and that the winning to the second operating port 582 has occurred due to an irregular flow. Contains information. The non-regular right table is a table that is read when the hold information stored in the execution area AE is the non-regular right hold information.

  A jackpot result and a small hit result are set in the non-regular right table. The jackpot result set in the non-regular right table is the low-frequency result described above, and the small hit result set in the non-regular right table is the low-frequency small hit result described above. In the non-regular right table, the probability of occurrence of a small hit result is set so that if a big hit result is not obtained, a small hit result is obtained with a probability of approximately 100%. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the generation | occurrence | production probability of the small hit result in case it does not become a big hit result is set to 100%.

  In the case where a winning to the second operating port 582 occurs during the non-winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, a winning lottery is performed. If the winning lottery results in the winning lottery, or if the winning result is a small winning result and a transition to the branch execution mode occurs and a V prize is generated, the value of the high-frequency flag is kept at “0” and the opening / closing Enter execution mode. For this reason, after the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode of the second operation port 582 becomes the low frequency support mode. In addition, even when the branch execution mode ends without generating a V prize, the value of the high frequency flag is maintained at “0”, and the support mode of the second operation port 582 becomes the low frequency support mode.

  A player who does not accurately grasp the game flow may unintentionally execute the irregular flow described above. As already explained in the first embodiment above, the possibility of winning the open power lot in the low frequency support mode open lottery becomes the open base lottery in the high frequency support mode open lottery. It is set lower than the possibility. For this reason, the situation where the game is played in an irregular flow is more disadvantageous for the player than the situation where the game is played in a regular flow, and a player who does not accurately grasp the flow of the game will lose. It becomes.

  On the other hand, even when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3 in the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, a winning to the second operation port 582 occurs. In some cases, by adopting a configuration that shifts to the branch execution mode with a high probability, it is possible to give relief to a player who does not accurately grasp the flow of the game. However, the low-frequency support mode is always set after the open / close execution mode executed in an irregular flow. Thereby, it can be set as the structure which does not lead to an advantageous result for a player to perform the game of an irregular flow after grasping | ascertaining the flow of a game.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The winning lottery that is executed with the winning of the second operating port 582 in the winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, and the winning that is executed with the winning of the second operating port 582 in the high frequency support mode The lottery is executed based on a common regular right table. In the low-frequency support mode, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the high-frequency support mode, a state that is advantageous to the player occurs at an unexpected timing of the player, so that it becomes an open / close execution mode and open / close It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the high-frequency support mode will be set after the execution mode.

  In the situation where the low-frequency support mode is a non-winning continuous period, the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3 in the case where the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2. This is a configuration that is more advantageous for the player than when the firing operation device 28 is operated. Even when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3 in the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, when a winning to the second operation port 582 occurs, It is the structure which transfers to the opening / closing execution mode with high probability. For this reason, relief measures can be given to an unfamiliar player who does not accurately grasp the flow of the game.

  In the winning continuous period in the low-frequency support mode, there is a possibility that a high-frequency big hit result and a high-frequency low-winning result may be obtained in the winning lottery performed with the winning of the second operating port 582 as a trigger. In the non-winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, the winning in the second operating port 582 is performed in the continuous winning period in the low frequency support mode, rather than the winning lottery that is performed in the continuous winning period in the low frequency support mode. The winning lottery tends to have a more advantageous result for the player. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the winning continuous period attractive. Further, when a player who knows the flow of a regular game dares to play a game in an irregular flow, the irregular flow is prevented from leading to a result advantageous to the player.

<Another embodiment in the sixth embodiment>
-In 6th Embodiment mentioned above, when branch execution mode is complete | finished without generating V prize, it is good also as a structure where the support mode of the 2nd operation port 582 does not change before and after the said branch execution mode. When a winning to the second operating port 582 occurs and a small lottery result based on the winning is obtained, the branch execution mode is shifted while the value of the high-frequency flag is maintained. When no V prize is generated in the branch execution mode, the current value of the high-frequency flag is maintained as it is.

  When a winning to the second operation port 582 occurs in the high frequency support mode, “1” is set to the high frequency flag when the winning occurs. The value of the high-frequency flag becomes a small hit result in the winning lottery, and is maintained as it is when the branch execution mode ends without generating a V prize. In this case, the support mode of the second operation port 582 after the branch execution mode is maintained in the high frequency support mode.

  In addition, when a winning to the second operation port 582 occurs in the low frequency support mode, the value of the high frequency flag is “0” when the winning occurs. The value of the high-frequency flag becomes a small hit result in the winning lottery, and is maintained as it is when the branch execution mode ends without generating a V prize. In this case, the support mode of the second operation port 582 after the branch execution mode is maintained in the low frequency support mode.

  As described above, when the branch execution mode is terminated without generating a V prize, the support mode before the transition to the branch execution mode is maintained even after the branch execution mode. The winning continuous period in the frequency support mode is a state that is more advantageous to the player than the non-winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, and is more disadvantageous to the player than the high frequency support mode. While maintaining the superiority of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode, the winning continuous period can be set as an advantageous state for the player in the low-frequency support mode.

  -In the winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode in the sixth embodiment described above, the winning of the same content as the non-regular right table in the winning lottery executed when the winning to the second operating port 582 occurs A configuration may be used in which a continuation table is used. The jackpot results set in the winning continuation table are only low frequency results, and the small hit results set in the winning continuation table are only low frequency small hit results. For this reason, even if the winning lottery based on the winning continuation table is triggered and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode does not become the high-frequency support mode.

  The winning lottery executed with the winning of the second operating port 582 in the winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode as the opportunity, the winning lottery executed with the winning of the second operating port 582 in the high frequency support mode Compared to, it is a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. Thereby, the superiority of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode can be maintained.

  In the low-frequency support mode, when a game is played in a regular flow, it can be expected to shift to the opening / closing execution mode in response to a winning at the first operating port 581. It can be expected that the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the winning of the two operating ports 582. On the other hand, in the case of playing a game in an irregular flow, it can only be expected to shift to the opening / closing execution mode in response to a winning at the second operating port 582. And the probability of occurrence of a public power open winning, which is a condition for winning a prize to the second operating port 582, is low. For this reason, in the low-frequency support mode, the advantage of playing a game with a regular flow over that with a non-regular flow is maintained, and the player who knows the flow of the game is deliberately defeated. The possibility of playing games in a regular flow is reduced.

  -In 6th Embodiment mentioned above, when the winning to the 2nd through gate 39 generate | occur | produces by the non-regular flow, it is good also as a structure which warns a player to play a game by a regular flow. . A warning to the player is given when a winning is made to the second through gate 39 during the non-winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode. Specifically, when the main CPU 63 detects a winning to the second through gate 39, the value of the winning continuation flag already described in the first embodiment is “0”, and the high frequency On condition that the value of the flag is “0”, processing for transmitting a warning command to the sound emission control device 81 is executed. The voice light emission control device 81 that has received the warning command transmits a command to the display control device 82, and thereby warns the player to operate the game ball launching device aiming at the first through gate 35. The information is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In addition, the sound emission control device 81 controls the speaker unit 54 to execute sound output that warns the player to operate the game ball launching device aiming at the first through gate 35. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player who does not accurately grasp the flow of the game will generate a prize for the second operation port 582 in an irregular flow. Here, as already described in the first embodiment, when the non-winning continuous period is shifted to the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, “1” is set to the winning continuous flag. For this reason, when the operation mode of the game ball launching device is switched so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3, triggered by the winning continuous period, no warning is given to the player.

  -In 6th Embodiment mentioned above, the structure from which the opening aspect of the special electricity prize apparatus 32 in the opening / closing execution mode performed in an irregular flow differs from the opening aspect of the special electricity prize apparatus 32 in the opening / closing execution mode performed in a regular flow It is good. When the winning to the second operating port 582 occurs, the main CPU 63 determines that the winning continuous flag value is “0” and the high-frequency flag value is “0”. “1” is set in the non-regular flag indicating that the prize is a prize generated in an irregular flow. The main CPU 63 executes the opening / closing operation of the special prize winning device 32 in the non-regular mode and “1” in the non-regular flag when “1” is set in the non-regular flag in the opening / closing execution mode. When is not set, the opening / closing operation of the special prize winning device 32 is executed in the regular mode. In the non-regular mode, as compared with the regular mode, the closing time from when the open state of the special prize winning device 32 ends to the next open state is set longer. For this reason, in the non-regular mode, the amount of the game ball B1 consumed during the opening / closing execution mode is larger than that in the regular mode. The launch operation is performed so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2 in the non-winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode, and the game ball B1 launches so as to flow down the right area PA3 in the winning continuous period. The normal flow for switching the operation is more advantageous for the player than the non-normal flow in which the launch operation is performed so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3 in the non-winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a player who knows the flow of the game from playing the game intentionally in an irregular flow.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for discharging the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 620 and the inclination of the opening of the first through gate 35 in the game board 610 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  First, the configuration of the adjustment mechanism 620 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The adjustment mechanism 620 periodically supplies the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35. FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 610 showing the first through gate 35 and the configuration above the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 610 of the present embodiment, an adjustment mechanism 620 is provided above the first through gate 35 in place of the adjustment mechanism 180 in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 61, in the adjusting mechanism 620 of the present embodiment, the housing portion 181 includes the left standing wall 181h and the right standing wall 181d described in the first embodiment, and houses the rotating body 183. The housing space is divided.

  The left standing wall 181h and the right standing wall 181d are formed so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the base body 181a and are spaced from each other in the circumferential direction of the base body 181a. As shown in FIG. 61, the left standing wall 181h and the right standing wall 181d are separated from each other, so that the intake port 185 described in the first embodiment exists above the adjustment mechanism 620. A discharge port 621 is present at the lower right of the adjustment mechanism 620. As shown in FIG. 61, the discharge port 621 has a width that is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the adjustment mechanism 620 includes the adjustment drive unit 184 described in the first embodiment behind the rotating body 183. The adjustment drive unit 184 is connected to the output port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12). In the present embodiment, the adjustment drive unit 184 is rotated by rotating the rotating body 183 clockwise at an angular velocity of 90 ° in 5 seconds by being supplied with a drive signal.

  When any one of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is opened upward at the intake port 185 positioned at the top of the adjustment mechanism 620, the adjustment mechanism 620 can take in the game ball B1. In addition, the adjustment mechanism 620 can discharge the game ball B1 when any of the recesses 183b to 183e is opened to the lower right at the discharge port 621 located in the lower right portion of the adjustment mechanism 620. It becomes a state.

  The duration of the state in which the game ball B1 can be taken in at the intake port 185 and the duration of the state in which the game ball B1 can be discharged at the discharge port 621 are determined depending on the rotation speed of the rotating body 183. When the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 is slow, the time during which the recesses 183b to 183e are opened to the outside at the intake port 185 and the discharge port 621 becomes longer. Thereby, the duration of the state in which the game ball B1 can be taken in and the state in which it can be discharged is extended.

  In the present embodiment, the rotational speed of the rotating body 183 is set sufficiently low so that the state in which the game ball B1 can be discharged continues until the discharge of the game ball B1 at the discharge port 621. The flow in which the game ball B1 is discharged from the discharge port 621 is common even when the discharged game ball B1 is taken into any of the recesses 183b to 183e. Therefore, in the following, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 620 will be described with reference to FIG. 61, taking the game ball B1 taken into the first recess 183b as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the game ball B1 taken into the first recess 183b and conveyed clockwise in the circumferential direction of the base body 181a is the discharge port 621 and the first recess 183b in the lower right portion of the adjustment mechanism 620. And the first dent portion 183b is discharged toward the lower right, and is discharged.

  More specifically, even if the first dent 183b starts to overlap the discharge port 621 due to the rotation of the rotating body 183, the width of the area opened to the outside in the first dent 183b is the game ball. When the diameter is smaller than the diameter of B1, the game ball B1 in the first recess 183b is not discharged to the outside. In this state, the game ball B1 in the first dent portion 183b is supported by the inner wall of the first dent portion 183b and the right standing wall 181d, thereby being prevented from falling downward.

  As the rotation of the rotator 183 progresses, the distance between the inner wall of the first recess 183b supporting the game ball B1 and the right standing wall 181d becomes longer, so that the first recess 183b opens to the outside. The area becomes wider. When the distance between the inner wall of the first recess 183b and the right standing wall 181d becomes longer than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 loses its support and falls downward.

  When the rotation of the rotating body 183 is fast, the rotating body is in a period from when the first recess 183b is opened to the outside at the discharge port 621 until the game ball B1 is actually discharged. The state in which the first dent portion 183b is opened to the outside before the game ball B1 in the middle of discharging is sandwiched between the rotating body 183 and the left standing wall 181h, or the game ball B1 is discharged before the game ball B1 is discharged. It may end. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rotational speed of the rotary body 183 is set sufficiently low. For this reason, the game ball B1 is discharged after the first dent portion 183b is opened to the outside until the state ends.

  As already described in the first embodiment, the intake 185 is capable of taking in the game ball B1 when any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is opened upward. It becomes permission state. When the rotation speed of the rotator 183 is set to be slow, the duration of one capture permission state at the intake port 185 becomes longer. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the take-in permitted state ends without the game ball B1 taken into the recesses 183b to 183e opened upward. Thereby, when the adjustment mechanism 620 reaches the discharge timing, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 toward the first through gate 35 does not exist.

  As already described in the first embodiment, the number of game balls B1 that can be taken into any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 during one take-in permission state is limited to one. . When the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 is set to be slow, the frequency at which the adjustment mechanism 620 is in the acquisition-permitted state per unit time decreases, and the number of game balls B1 that can be acquired by the adjustment mechanism 620 per unit time also decreases. It will be.

  On the other hand, as already described in the first embodiment, the adjusting mechanism 620 moves the game ball B1 flowing down near the intake port 185 between the nail 24b and the left standing wall 181h. Alternatively, it can be discharged from the space between the nail 24b and the right standing wall 181d to the left and right spaces of the adjustment mechanism 180, and discharged from the passage inlet 171 provided behind the intake port 185 toward the escape passage 172. be able to. For this reason, even if the number of game balls B1 that flow down to the vicinity of the intake port 185 and are not taken into the intake port 185 increases, the game ball B1 can be prevented from staying in the vicinity of the intake port 185.

  In addition, as described above, the discharge port 621 exists in the lower right portion of the adjustment mechanism 620, and the game ball B1 taken in at the upper portion of the adjustment mechanism 620 rotates 180 ° around the center of the rotating body 183. It is discharged outside at an earlier timing. The game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 620 does not rotate 180 ° or more around the center of the rotating body 183. For this reason, the game ball B1 that has reached the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 620 does not rise again due to the rotation of the rotating body 183.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the left standing wall 181h includes an end surface 181i that comes into contact with the game ball B1 falling downward from the discharge port 621. The end surface 181i is inclined downward toward the right, contacts the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621, and guides the game ball B1 to the lower right.

  As already described, the width of the discharge port 621 is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, and is set relatively narrow. For this reason, the dispersion | variation in the discharge start position of the game ball B1 in the discharge port 621 can be suppressed small. In addition, since the variation in the discharge start position of the game ball B1 is small, most of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 can be brought into contact with the end surface 181i of the left standing wall 261. Thereby, the dispersion | variation in the discharge direction of game ball B1 can be restrained small.

  As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 610, the first through gate 35 is located below the discharge port 621. The distance from the discharge port 621 to the first through gate 35 is set to be slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. There is a possibility that a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 is detached from the first through gate 35 because there is a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass between the discharge port 621 and the first through gate 35. There is. For example, when the path of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 is shifted to the left or right and the game ball B1 collides with the edge of the first through gate 35, a winning to the first through gate 35 occurs. There is a possibility not to.

  By avoiding the configuration in which all of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 win the first through gate 35, it is avoided that the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 620 is limited to the capture of the game balls B1. it can. Further, by setting the distance from the discharge port 621 to the first through gate 35 to be short, the influence of the discharge speed of the game ball B1 on the timing at which the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 wins the first through gate 35. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the first through gate 35 in the present embodiment facilitates the entry of the game ball B1 that is guided to the end surface 181i of the left standing wall 181h and falls toward the lower right at the discharge port 621. In order to do so, the game board 610 is provided in such a manner that it is inclined downward toward the left.

  As shown in FIG. 61, at the discharge port 621, the game ball B1 guided to the end surface 181i of the left standing wall 181h and discharged toward the lower right side gradually corrects the course downward due to the influence of attractive force. While falling. The inclination angle of the first through gate 35 is set to be substantially perpendicular to the course of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 at the height position of the first through gate 35. Thereby, the possibility that the game ball B1 wins smoothly without colliding with the edge of the first through gate 35 is increased. By preventing the game ball B1 from contacting the edge of the first through gate 35 immediately before winning the first through gate 35, the winning timing of the game ball B1 in contact with the edge of the first through gate 35 is shifted, The possibility that the game ball B1 is detached from the first through gate 35 can be reduced.

  As already described, since the variation in the discharge start position and the variation in the discharge direction of the game ball B1 at the discharge port 621 are suppressed to a small extent, the majority of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 is mostly contained in the first through gate 35. You can win smoothly.

  Next, the low frequency winning determination value table in the present embodiment will be described. As described in the first embodiment, the low-frequency winning determination value table stored in the main ROM 64 (FIG. 12) indicates that the general power open winning is performed in the general power open lottery executed in the low-frequency support mode. The winning judgment value that is the target of is recorded. The low-frequency winning determination value table of the present embodiment includes a winning determination value set in the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 described with reference to FIG. 14A in the first embodiment. Are set to different values.

  In the low-frequency winning determination value table of the present embodiment, the winning determination values for the public train opening lottery are set to (1250 × n−5) to (1250 × n). Here, the variable n is a natural number of 1 to 52. The probability of winning the power train opening in the power train opening lottery executed in the low frequency support mode is approximately 1/210.

  Winning determination values that are subject to the public train opening winning are serial numbers in units of six. In addition, the update cycle of the random number for opening in the public utility accessory opening counter C4 (FIG. 13) is 4 msec. For this reason, in the general electric utility release counter C4, the period in which the updated random number for release is the winning determination value for the public electric open winning in the normal electric open lottery in the low frequency support mode continues for 24 msec.

  In the low-frequency support mode, the winning target period in which the winning determination value that is the target of the public power open winning is continued for 24 msec occurs at a cycle of 5 sec. As described above, the cycle in which the winning possible timing for winning the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 to the first through gate 35 is 5 sec, which is the same as the cycle in which the winning target period is generated in the low frequency support mode. is there.

  For this reason, in the low frequency support mode, when the winning possible timing overlaps with the winning target period, it becomes a winning continuous period in which the public power open winning is continuously generated. The winning selection continuous period continues until the initial value of the utility utility release counter C4 is updated and the generation timing of the winning target period is deviated. When the generation timing of the winning target period is deviated, it becomes a non-winning continuous period in which the result of losing in the open train lottery executed in the low frequency support mode continues until the winning target period and the winning possible timing overlap again.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The discharge port 621 is provided at a position where the game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 620 reaches before the rotation of the rotation body 183 around the center by 180 °. In addition, when the game ball B1 can be discharged from the recesses 183b to 183e at the discharge port 621, the adjustment drive unit 184 prevents the state from ending before the game ball B1 is completely discharged. Drive controlled. Thereby, the game ball B1 conveyed downward from the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 620 is prevented from rotating around the center of the rotating body 183 by 180 ° or more and rising again.

  The left standing wall 181h includes an end surface 181i that comes into contact with the game ball B1 that is about to fall downward from the discharge port 621 by its own weight and guides the game ball B1 to the lower right. Further, the width of the discharge port 621 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Since the width of the discharge port 621 is set to be relatively narrow, variation in the discharge start position of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 is small, and most of the game balls B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 are left standing. It can be brought into contact with the end surface 181i of the wall 261 and guided to the lower right. For this reason, the dispersion | variation in the discharge direction of the game ball B1 discharged | emitted from the discharge port 621 can be made small.

  The variation in the discharge start position of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 is small, and the variation in the discharge direction is small. For this reason, the variation in the moving direction when the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 falls to the height position of the first through gate 35 is small. The first through gate 35 is discharged downward from the adjustment mechanism 620 and downward toward the left so as to be an opening perpendicular to the moving direction of the game ball B1 flowing down to the height position of the first through gate 35. Inclined. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 is easily taken in smoothly without colliding with the edge of the first through gate 35. This prevents the game ball B1 from colliding with the edge of the first through gate 35 just before winning the first through gate 35 and shifting the winning timing or coming off the first through gate 35.

  The distance from the discharge port 621 of the adjustment mechanism 620 to the first through gate 35 is set to be slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Since there is a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 between the discharge port 621 and the first through gate 35, all the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 win the first through gate 35. Can be avoided. In addition, since the distance from the discharge port 621 to the first through gate 35 is relatively short, even if the game ball B1 is discharged at a different discharge speed each time, the difference in the discharge speed is the timing of winning the first through gate 35. It can be set as the structure which does not have big influence on. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the winning timing for the first through gate 35 is shifted due to the difference in the discharging speed during the winning continuous period and the electric power open winning is not achieved.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111, the type of the buffer whose input signal type is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 is the above-described buffer type. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 to make the management CPU 112 specify the type of input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the second buffer 122b receives the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. The fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, the seventh buffer 122g is input with the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a, and the sixteenth buffer 122p is instructed to output. No. is input.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a signal corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, and a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i. Although the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, in the present embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as an open / close execution mode signal, and a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as a high frequency support mode signal. The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o as a door open signal.

  An open / close execution mode signal is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, a high frequency support mode signal is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n, a door opening signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and It is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16 buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 does not receive an instruction from the main CPU 63, and the 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p. It is possible to specify that each of the signals corresponding to each is input. On the other hand, what type of signal is input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 17) as in the first embodiment.

  First, “12”, which is the number of first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l to be recognized as signal types, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1701). Thereafter, an identification start signal output process is executed (step S1702). In the output processing, output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n Is set to the HI level to start outputting the identification start signal. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  After that, information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read information on the number of outputs is set in an output counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S1703). The output counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the output count of the type identification signal.

  In the present embodiment, when the management CPU 112 recognizes the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l, the number of winning balls set for the entrance portion corresponding to the type of signals. The type identification signal is output the same number of times. The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times of receiving the type identification signal for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. . That is, the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l is grasped as the number of winning balls set for the pitching portion corresponding to the type of signal.

  In step S1703, when the value of the recognition output counter is “12”, “11”, or “10”, “10” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 31 is set in the output number counter. . When the value of the recognition output counter is “9”, “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “8”, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first operation port 33 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “7”, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operation port 34 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is “6”, since the game ball is not paid out even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, the output counter Set “0” to. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is any one of “5” to “1”, the corresponding entry portion does not exist and is blank, so “0” is set to the output number counter.

  Thereafter, a start trigger signal output process is executed (step S1704). In the output process, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period for maintaining the first signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

  Thereafter, on condition that the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 is not “0” (step S1705: YES), that is, on condition that one or more values are set in the output number counter in step S1703. The process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, a type identification signal output process is executed. In the output process, the output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to the HI level. The period for maintaining the second signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1707), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output number counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1708). When the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S1708: NO), the process returns to step S1706.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1705 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1708, an output process of an end trigger signal is executed (step S1709). In this output processing, the output of the end trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to the HI level. The period for maintaining the third signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 (step S1710), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1711). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S1711: NO), the process returns to step S1703, and processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed. To do.

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S1711: YES), an identification end signal output process is executed (step S1712). In the output process, the respective output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n Is set to the HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Next, management processing in the present embodiment executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  When the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1801: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S1802). Then, on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1803: YES), the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether a type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63 or not. When the type identification signal is received (step S1804: YES), 1 is added to the value of the reception number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S1805). The reception counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. The value of the reception number counter is cleared to “0” when an affirmative determination is made in step S1803.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1804 or if the process of step S1805 is executed, it is determined whether or not an end trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1806). If the end trigger signal has not been received (step S1806: NO), the process returns to step S1804. If the end trigger signal has been received (step S1806: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S1807). In the correspondence setting process, the reception number counter is set in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 in the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. Stores the value that is being stored. In this case, “10” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the first corresponding relationship area 123a, the second corresponding relationship area 123b, and the third corresponding relationship area 123c, and the fourth corresponding relationship area 123d. Is set to “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relation is set. In the area 123f, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second working port 34 is set. Further, “0” is set in the seventh to twelfth corresponding relation areas 123g to 123l. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the setting target counter in the management-side RAM 114 (step S1808).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1803, or if the process of step S1808 is executed, it is determined whether reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S1809). If the reception of the identification end signal has not ended (step S1809: NO), the process returns to step S1803, and the processing after step S1804 is performed on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1803: YES). Run. If the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S1809: YES), the history setting process in step S1810 and the external output process in step S1811 are repeatedly executed.

  FIG. 65 is a time chart showing how correspondence information between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122l are stored in the correspondence memory 116. 65A shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, FIG. 65B shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level, and FIG. ) Indicates a period in which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 65 (d) indicates a period in which the output state of the signal in the opening / closing execution mode is at the HI level, and FIG. FIG. 65F shows a period in which the output state of the high frequency support mode signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 65F shows the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l. The execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, FIG. 65 (g) shows the timing when the value of the reception number counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 65 (h) Management CPU 112 Correspondence relationship setting Te processing (step S1807) shows a timing of the execution of.

  As the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as shown in FIGS. 65 (a), 65 (d) and 65 (e) at the timing t1, the first signal The output states of the open / close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereby, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t2, the output state of the first signal, the opening / closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. Thereby, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1801 of the management process (FIG. 64) to enter the identification state as shown in FIG. 65 (f).

  Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 65A from the timing t3 to the timing t4. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 65 (b) from the timing t5 to the timing t7. Thus, the type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 65 (g), the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 65 (c) from the timing t8 to the timing t10. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is “1” at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, “1” is set as the corresponding relationship information in the corresponding relationship areas 123 a to 123 l in the corresponding relationship memory 116. Is stored.

  Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 65A from the timing t11 to the timing t12. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the timing t13 to timing t15, the timing t16 to timing t18, the timing t19 to timing t21, and the timing t22 to timing t24, as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, 1 is added to the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 at each of the timing t14, the timing t17, the timing t20, and the timing t23, as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 65C from the timing t25 to the timing t27. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is “10” at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, “10” is set as the corresponding relationship information in the corresponding relationship areas 123 a to 123 l in the corresponding relationship memory 116. Is stored.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 65 (c), 65 (d) and 65 (e), the output state of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal is LOW. Change from level to HI level. Thereby, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t29, the output state of the third signal, the opening / closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. Thereby, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1809 of the management process (FIG. 64), so that the identification state is canceled as shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes a prize ball corresponding to the entry part that triggered the storage of the history information. Number information is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of pitched portions having the same number of winning balls, the pitched portions cannot be distinguished in the history information. Specifically, since the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 each have one winning ball, it is possible to distinguish the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls of the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 may be different. Thereby, even if the history information is stored as in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to distinguish the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 in the history information.

  In this embodiment, “15” is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 in step S801 of the history setting process. As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be confirmed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal but also information corresponding to whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being performed, information corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is being performed, and the front door With respect to information corresponding to whether or not the frame 14 is open, the management side CPU 112 can specify that the signal path corresponds to these pieces of information without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. It has become. In this case, only information corresponding to the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is information that requires the management CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence between the information and the signal paths 118a to 118g from the main CPU 63. Become. When the management side CPU 112 is made to recognize the correspondence information, the same number of pulse signals as the number of winning balls corresponding to each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the second signal. Is output. Thereby, it becomes possible to simplify the structure regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Ninth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the calculation of various parameters using history information is executed. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 66 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the management IC 66 includes a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117. These functions are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 631. In the present embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs as will be described in detail later, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112 using history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. The calculated various parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 631. Various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 631 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

  Various parameters are triggered before the timing at which the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. As a result, it is possible to vary the timing for calculating various parameters and the timing for externally outputting the parameters to the reading device, and the processing load can be distributed.

  In addition, since the calculation result memory 631 for storing calculation results of various parameters is provided, not only various parameters for one calculation trigger but also various parameters for a plurality of calculation triggers are collected. It becomes possible to memorize. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation opportunity.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the second buffer 122b receives the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. The fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, the seventh buffer 122g is input with the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a, and the eighth buffer 122h is opened and closed. A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. Is supplied with an output instruction signal.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the above various signals, a calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 63 to provide the calculation CPU of various parameters to the management CPU 112. The fact that the calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 in the same manner as the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. The management CPU 112 can specify that the signals corresponding to the fifteenth to sixteenth buffers 122o to 122p are input, respectively. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  Next, a description will be given of a processing configuration for causing the management-side CPU 112 to perform various parameter calculations in response to occurrence of a calculation trigger. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU 63. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

  In the power failure information storage process, when a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S1901: YES), a calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S1902). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level. Thereafter, after the power failure process is executed in step S1903, an infinite loop is established, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure process, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, and a checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by the management CPU 112. The power failure handling process is executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 34). In the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S1006: YES), step S1007 is performed. The history setting process, the external output process in step S1008, and the power failure handling process are repeatedly executed in this order.

  In the power failure response processing, when the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes the HI level (step S2001: YES), the external output in the first embodiment is performed in steps S2002 to S2006. As in steps S1602 to S1606 of the processing (FIG. 40), the number of balls entered for each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is calculated. . In step S2007, as in step S1607 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, the number of balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. In step S2008, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1608 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, and in step S2009, the external output is output in the first embodiment. Similar to step S1609 of the process (FIG. 40), the total time is calculated. Then, the calculation result information in step S2008 and the calculation result information in step S2009 are written in the calculation result memory 631 (step S2010). In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 631, write the calculation result information so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to identify when the information of the calculation result that has been written this time corresponds to the timing.

  Thereafter, in step S2011, similarly to step S1611 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, the number of various balls entered during the opening / closing execution mode is calculated, and in step S2012, Similar to step S1612 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the embodiment, the number of various entering balls in the open / close execution mode and the front door frame 14 being opened is calculated. In step S2013, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1613 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. And the information of the calculation result of step S2014 is written in the calculation result memory 631 (step S2014). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 631. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to identify when the information of the calculation result that has been written this time corresponds to the timing.

  Thereafter, in step S2015, similar to step S1615 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, various numbers of incoming balls in the high frequency support mode are calculated, and in step S2016, Similar to step S1616 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, the number of various entering balls is calculated in the high frequency support mode and the front door frame 14 is open. In step S2017, various parameters are calculated as in step S1617 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. Then, the calculation result information in step S2017 is written in the calculation result memory 631 (step S2018). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 631. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to identify when the information of the calculation result that has been written this time corresponds to the timing. Thereafter, an infinite loop is entered, and the system waits until supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the external output process is executed in step S1208 of the management process (FIG. 34).

  When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 becomes the HI level (step S2101: YES), the calculation result output process is executed (step S2102). In the output process, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 631 are output to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 631 are read. In this case, when only various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of one calculation trigger are stored in the calculation result memory 631, only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the one calculation trigger are stored in the reading device. When various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of a plurality of calculation triggers are stored in the calculation result memory 631, the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the plurality of calculation triggers are read by the reading device. .

  Thereafter, a history information output process is executed (step S2103). In the output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the various history information stored in the history area 124 is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. Thus, by outputting not only various calculation results but also history information, it becomes possible for a worker using the reading apparatus to perform detailed analysis on various calculation results.

  Thereafter, a clear process is executed (step S2104). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. In the clear process, all areas of the calculation result memory 631 are cleared to “0”. As a result, the calculation result memory 631 is initialized.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible to manage various parameters for each business day.

  When it is specified that the supply of operating power is stopped in the main CPU 63, the management instruction CPU 112 calculates various parameters by changing the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. As a result, various parameters can be calculated by the management CPU 112 based on an instruction from the main CPU 63.

  Various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are sequentially written in the calculation result memory 631. As a result, various parameters can be accumulated in the management IC 66, and various parameters for a plurality of business days can be read together when the various parameters are read by the reading device.

  When various parameters are written in the calculation result memory 631, information that can specify when the various parameters are calculated is written in the calculation result memory 631 along with the various parameters. Thereby, it is possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping the time when various parameters are calculated.

  Note that the history memory 117 may be cleared to “0” when a calculation trigger occurs and calculation results of various parameters corresponding to the calculation trigger are written in the calculation result memory 631. This makes it difficult to generate an event in which new history information becomes a write target to the history memory 117 in a situation where the maximum number of history information that can be stored is already stored in the history memory 117.

  Further, the information to be externally output to the reading device is only information on various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 631, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be output externally. . As a result, the amount of information output to the outside can be suppressed.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure response process executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that of the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the ninth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

  When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2201: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2202). In various arithmetic processes, each process of step S2002 to step S2009, step S2011 to step S2013, and step S2015 to step S2017 of the power failure response process (FIG. 69) in the ninth embodiment is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter within the various parameters calculated in step S2202 is within the reference range (step S2203). In particular,
7th parameter: (K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K5 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “general The number of winning balls for winning at the winning opening 31 + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the first operating port 33” + K5 × “the second operating port 34” Ratio / eighth parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning to the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K3 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K4 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K5 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” )) Percentage of the two parameters It is set as a parameter to be determined whether or not it is within the reference range. If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, an affirmative determination is made in step S2203 that the predetermined parameter is within the reference range.

The predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and instead of or in addition to these, other parameters may be set as the predetermined parameters. For example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls K2 entering the general winning opening 31 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) may be set as a predetermined parameter. . In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be in the reference range. In addition, only a predetermined parameter to be determined in step S2203 may be calculated by various calculation processes in step S2202.

  If the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range (step S2203: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S2202 are written in the calculation result memory 631 (step S2204). In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 631, write the calculation result information so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to identify when the information of the calculation result that has been written this time corresponds to the timing.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined parameter is the reference range (step S2203: YES), the process of step S2204 is not executed. As a result, only the various parameters when the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range are written into the calculation result memory 631. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the calculation result memory 631 while leaving the history in the calculation result memory 631.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, or when the process of step S2204 is executed, a clear process for the history memory 117 is executed (step S2205). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. After executing the process of step S2205, an infinite loop is entered, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

  According to the embodiment described above in detail, it is determined whether or not the contents of the various calculated parameters are included in the reference range, and only the various parameters determined to be included in the reference range are stored in the calculation result memory 631. Written. As a result, the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 631 can be suppressed, and the necessary storage capacity in the calculation result memory 631 can be suppressed.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger that causes the management-side CPU 112 to execute various parameter calculations are different from those in the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the ninth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 72A is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S1312 in the management output process (FIG. 36).

  It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S2301). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, an addition process for a pitching counter provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2302). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined as the number of processing balls this time. This is specified based on the number of times step S1305 is executed in the management output process (FIG. 36). Then, the specified number of game balls is added to the entrance counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the entrance counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number “500” (step S2303). If it is “500” or more (step S2303: YES), the entrance counter subtraction process of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2304). In the subtraction process, “500” is subtracted from the value of the entrance counter. Thereafter, a calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S2305). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

  FIG. 72 (b) is a flowchart showing a calculation process executed by the management CPU 112. The arithmetic process is a process executed instead of the power failure response process in the ninth embodiment. Therefore, the calculation process is executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 34). In the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S1206: YES), the process of step S1207 is performed. The history setting process, the external output process in step S1208, and the calculation process are repeatedly executed in this order.

  When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2401: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2402). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as steps S2002 to S2018 of the power failure response process (FIG. 69) in the ninth embodiment are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. In this case, since various parameters are calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, the game balls enter the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the mode in detail.

  In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number, the various parameters are set on condition that the game is being executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger for causing the management CPU 112 to execute various parameter calculations are different from those in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the eleventh embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S1312 in the management output process (FIG. 36).

  It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S2501). If a negative determination is made in step S2501, 1 is added to the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2502). The continuation counter is a main CPU 63 during a period in which no game ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It is a counter for specifying by.

  If the value of the continuation counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S2503: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S2504). When a state in which no game ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 continues for 5 seconds, an affirmative determination is made in step S2503. The stop reference value is set as follows. The time measurement flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the main CPU 63 should measure time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. When the value of “0” is “0”, the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is “1”, the time is measured. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, "1" is set in the time measurement flag (step S2505).

  When a negative determination is made in step S2503, when the process of step S2504 is executed, or when the process of step S2505 is executed, the time measurement flag of the main RAM 65 is set to “1” ( Step S2506: YES), 1 is added to the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 (Step S2507). The measurement counter is a counter used for measuring the time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level.

  It is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter after 1 addition is greater than or equal to the instruction reference value (step S2508). The instruction reference value is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S2508 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2508, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to “0” (step S2509), and an operation instruction signal output process is executed (step S2510). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, since the various parameters are calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the various parameters only by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, in a situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for a predetermined period is stopped, and when the game round is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude a situation in which a game is not being executed from calculation targets of various parameters, and it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters in a situation in which a game is being executed.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure measured using RTC115 instead of the structure measured using a measurement counter whether the predetermined period passed.

<13th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger that causes the management-side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters are different from those in the first embodiment, and the presence or absence of the calculation trigger is specified by the main CPU 63. Instead, it is performed independently by the management CPU 112. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a calculation process executed by the management side CPU 112. The calculation process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S1412 in the history setting process (FIG. 37).

  Corresponding to a game ball having entered one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the history setting process of the current processing time It is determined whether the history information to be stored is stored in the history memory 117 (step S2601). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, an addition process of a ball entrance counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S2602). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined as the number of processing balls this time. In the history setting process, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball entering is specified based on the number of times stored. Then, the specified number of game balls is added to the entrance counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the entrance counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number “500” (step S2603). If it is “500” or more (step S2603: YES), a subtraction process of the entrance counter of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2604). In the subtraction process, “500” is subtracted from the value of the entrance counter. Thereafter, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2605). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as steps S2002 to S2018 of the power failure response process (FIG. 69) in the ninth embodiment are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. In this case, since various parameters are calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, the game balls enter the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the mode in detail.

  In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number, the various parameters are set on condition that the game is being executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

  Further, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is measured by the management CPU 112, and it is determined by the management CPU 112 whether or not the total number is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number. In other words, the management CPU 112 uniquely determines the calculation trigger of various parameters. As a result, it is not necessary for the main CPU 63 to execute a process for determining the calculation trigger of various parameters, and thus the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, a calculation result memory 631 is provided in the management IC 66 as in the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 66). When a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using history information stored in the history memory 117 and writes the various parameters of the calculation results in the calculation result memory 631. In the present embodiment, a signal indicating that the opening / closing execution mode has started, a signal indicating that the opening / closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode has started, and a high-frequency support mode are provided. A signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has ended are individually transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Sent to.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing history setting processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers subject to confirmation in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2701). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In the present embodiment, the first to seventh correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123g store information indicating that it corresponds to any of the entrance parts, and the eighth correspondence relationship area 123h starts the opening / closing execution mode. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is stored in the ninth corresponding relationship area 123i, and information corresponding to the start of the high frequency support mode is stored in the tenth corresponding relationship area 123j. The information corresponding to the end of the high frequency support mode is stored in the eleventh corresponding relationship area 123k, and the information corresponding to the opening start of the front door frame 14 is stored in the twelfth corresponding relationship area 123l. In the thirteenth corresponding relationship area 123m, information corresponding to the end of opening of the front door frame 14 is stored. Accordingly, in step S2701, “13” is set in the confirmation target counter.

  After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from “0” to “1”. Thus, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2702). In addition, when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth buffer 122j is a check target for numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is a check target for numerical information. .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, RTC information that is year / month / day information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2703). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2704). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 and corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S2703 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Also, the correspondence information is read out from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the write target. Note that when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o are the correspondence information readout targets. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “10”, the tenth correspondence area 123j is a target for reading correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123e is correspondence. Information is to be read out.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the target pointer (step S2705). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and the numerical information is incremented by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S2706).

  When the maximum value is exceeded (step S2706: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2707). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1409, steps S1411 to S1413, and steps S1415 to S1417 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, various parameters of the calculation result and information on the total time are written in the calculation result memory 631 (step S2708). In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 631, write the calculation result information so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to identify when the information of the calculation result that has been written this time corresponds to the timing.

  After that, state information takeover processing is executed (step S2709). In the handover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, whether the current state is in the opening / closing execution mode, whether the high-frequency support mode is in effect, and the front door frame 14 is being opened. It is determined whether or not. Then, the state information is written in the management side RAM 114.

  Thereafter, a clear process of the history memory 117 is executed (step S2710). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. In addition, after executing the clear process, the state information written in the management side RAM 114 is read in step S2709. If state information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being stored is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the history information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being stored. In addition to writing, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written. In addition, when status information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is being stored, history information storage area corresponding to the pointer information to which the history information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is being written is written In addition to writing to 125, pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open corresponds to the pointer information to be written. While writing to the history information storage area 125, the pointer information to be written is incremented by one.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2702, a negative determination is made in step S2706, or if the process of step S2710 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2711). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2712). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2712: NO), the processing after step S2702 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated when the history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the history information becomes a storage target exceeding the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117 and the calculation of various parameters cannot be performed accurately.

  Further, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has already been subject to calculation of various parameters from becoming subject to computation of various parameters again.

  Even when the history memory 117 is initialized, the state information takeover process is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage state information appropriately.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 641, a first state area 642, a second state area 643, and a third state area 644. In each of these areas 641 to 644, first to fifteenth counters 641a to 641o, 642a to 642o, 643a to 643o, 644a to 644o are provided. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the first counters 641a to 644a of the areas 641 to 644. In the second counters 641b to 644b of the areas 641 to 644, information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. Information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third counters 641c to 644c of the respective areas 641 to 644. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourth counters 641d to 644d of the areas 641 to 644. In the fifth counters 641e to 644e of the areas 641 to 644, information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. In the sixth counters 641f to 644f of the areas 641 to 644, information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. Information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh counters 641g to 644g of the respective areas 641 to 644. In the eighth counters 641h to 644h of the areas 641 to 644, information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. Information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the ninth counters 641i to 644i of the areas 641 to 644. Information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 641j to 644j of the areas 641 to 644. Information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eleventh counters 641k to 644k of the respective areas 641 to 644. Information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 641l to 644l of the respective areas 641 to 644. In the 13th counters 641m to 644m of each area 641 to 644, information on the number of times the output state of the 13th signal input to the 13th buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. In the fourteenth counters 641n to 644n of the areas 641 to 644, information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. In the 15th counters 641o to 644o of each area 641 to 644, information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored.

  However, the measurement targets using the first to fifteenth counters 641a to 641o, 642a to 642o, 643a to 643o, and 644a to 644o are the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, and the first operation. These are first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the result of entering the ball to either the mouth 33 or the second working port 34 are input. Accordingly, signals corresponding to state information such as whether the opening / closing execution mode is being used, whether the high-frequency support mode is being used, and whether the front door frame 14 is being opened are input to the eighth to eighth signals. The 10 buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the measurement target. The distinction of whether or not these are measurement targets is performed based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing history setting processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers subject to confirmation in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2801). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating that it is blank is stored in the first to tenth corresponding relation areas 123a to 123j as already described, in step S2801, "10" is set in the check target counter. To do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current check target counter are buffers to which a status information signal is input (step S2802). Specifically, in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current check target counter, as the corresponding relationship information, information indicating the open / close execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, and It is determined whether any of the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2802, state information setting processing is executed (step S2803). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not in the opening / closing execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the first state indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in effect is displayed on the management side. When the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the first state is deleted from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in operation is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the second state indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in operation is stored in the management-side RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the second state is erased from the management-side RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. Is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the third state is deleted from the management-side RAM 114.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2802, the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is stored in a buffer to which an information signal different from the state information is input. Whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer is switched from the LOW level to the HI level by confirming whether or not the numerical value information that has been changed from “0” to “1”. It is determined whether or not (step S2804). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2804, the corresponding sum counter is added (step S2805). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 641a to 641o for summation in the summation area 641 of the history memory 117 is added. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 641e for summation is an addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first counter 641a for summation is an addition target. .

  Thereafter, by referring to the status information in the management-side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode (step S2806). If it is in the first state (step S2806: YES), the corresponding counter processing for the first state is added (step S2807). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 642a to 642o for the first state in the first state area 642 of the history memory 117 is added. . For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 642e for the first state is an addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first counter 642a for the first state is Can be added.

  Thereafter, by referring to the status information in the management-side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high-frequency support mode (step S2808). If it is in the second state (step S2808: YES), the corresponding counter processing for the second state is added (step S2809). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 643a to 643o for the second state in the second state area 643 of the history memory 117 is added. . For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 643e for the second state is an addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first counter 643a for the second state is Can be added.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management-side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S2810). If it is in the third state (step S2810: YES), the corresponding third state counter addition processing is executed (step S2811). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 644a to 644o for the third state in the third state area 644 of the history memory 117 is added. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 644e for the third state is to be added, and if the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first counter 644a for the third state is set. Can be added.

  When the process of step S2803 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S2804, when a negative determination is made at step S2810, or when the process of step S2811 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (step S2812). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2813). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2813: NO), the processing after step S2802 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  By executing the history setting process as described above, the game ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is as described above. Rather than being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  As described above, since the number of times that the game balls are detected by the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are stored, the out port 24a such as step S1602 in the external output processing (FIG. 40) in this embodiment. A process for calculating the number of game balls that enter the game, a process for calculating the number of game balls that enter the special electric prize device 32 such as step S1604, and the number of game balls that enter the first operation port 33 such as step S1605. Processing to calculate, and processing to calculate the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34, such as step S1606, is not required. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

  In the process of calculating the number of game balls that enter the general winning opening 31 such as step S1603, the first to third counters 641a to 641c, 642a to 642c, 643a to 643c, and 644a to 644c are all general winning openings. Therefore, it is necessary to execute a process of summing the values of the first to third counters 641a to 641c, 642a to 642c, 643a to 643c, and 644a to 644c. Further, the number of balls entered in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is in progress and the front door frame 14 is open cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1612 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 40) in the present embodiment. Similarly, the number of balls entered in the situation where the high-frequency support mode is in progress and the front door frame 14 is open cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, in the external output process (FIG. 40) in this embodiment, the process of step S1616 is not executed.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the storage means for storing history information is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 78 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in the present embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the MPU 62 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, and a management side RAM 114, as in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 631 as in the twelfth embodiment. Since the RTC 115, the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the history memory 117 are not provided in the management IC 66, the history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the entry RAM of the out port 24 a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. That is, the main RAM 65 that temporarily stores information necessary for executing a program in the main CPU 63 is also used as a memory for storing the entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main side RAM 65 through the management side I / F 111. When an operation trigger of various parameters occurs, the management IC 66 accesses the main side RAM 65 to read the entry history, and reads the read history. Various parameters are calculated using the entry history. The calculated various parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 631. When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various parameters are provided from the calculation result memory 631 to the reading device, while the ball entry history stored in the main RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device. .

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the incoming ball detection process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The ball entry detection process is executed in step S211 of the timer interruption process (FIG. 18).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored for the 0th bit D0 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a sets 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S2901: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2902). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 as a pitching history. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operating power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the general winning counter is Retained. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counters in the main RAM 65 (step S2903).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored for the first bit D1 has been switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a sets 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S2904: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2905). Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2906).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored for the second bit D2 has been switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a sets 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S2907: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2908). Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counters in the main RAM 65 (step S2909).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the special electric power detection sensor 45a makes one game It is determined that a sphere has been detected (step S2910: YES). In this case, “1” is set in the special electricity prize flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2911). Further, 1 is added to the value of the special electricity prize counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2912). The special electric prize winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the special electric prize winning device 32 as a pitching history. The value of the special electric prize counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the special prize winning counter is Retained. Thereafter, the value of the 15 prize ball counters in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2913).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a sets 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S2914: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2915). Further, 1 is added to the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2916). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of entering the first operation port 33 as an entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. . Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the first operation counter Is retained. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2917).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the second operating port detection sensor 47a sets 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S2918: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2919). Further, 1 is added to the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2920). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 as a ball entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. . Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the second operation counter Is retained. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2921).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the sixth bit D6 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the out-port detection sensor 48a provides one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S2922: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2923). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the out port 24a as a ball entry history. The value of the out counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the out counter is stored even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Retained.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the seventh bit D7 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one is detected by the first gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that no game ball has been detected (step S2924: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2925).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the eighth bit D8 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the second gate detection sensor 50a provides one. It is determined that no game ball has been detected (step S2926: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2927).

  By performing the entry detection process as described above, the entry histories to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are stored in the respective entrance parts. Is stored in the main side RAM 65 as the number of balls entered. As a result, every time a ball enters any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a signal is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. There is no need to output. Therefore, the configuration for outputting a signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, when a calculation opportunity occurs, the management CPU 112 reads the number of balls entered from the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 to the general winning slot 31, and transfers the special winning prize counter from the main RAM 65 to the special winning device 32. Read the number of balls entered, read the number of balls entered from the first operation counter of the main RAM 65 to the first operation port 33, read the number of balls entered from the second operation counter of the main RAM 65 to the second operation port 34, The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read from the out counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the first parameter to the eighth parameter described in the first embodiment are calculated using the read number of balls. However, the number of balls entered in a state where the number of balls entered when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of balls entered when the front door frame 14 is closed are not measured. Therefore, the first parameter to the eighth parameter are calculated in a state including the number of entered balls generated when the front door frame 14 is open. In addition, since the number of balls entered during the opening / closing execution mode and the number of balls entered during the high frequency support mode are not individually measured, the first parameter to the 18th parameter and the 21st parameter described in the first embodiment. The 26th parameter is not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written in the calculation result memory 631. When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all parameters written at that time in the calculation result memory 631 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 631 is cleared to “0”.

  Note that the management IC 66 does not access the main RAM 65 independently, but information on the number of balls that have been stored in the main RAM 65 as the ball entry history is transmitted to the management IC 66 by transfer control by the main CPU 63. It is good also as a structure to be. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent an event in which the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 access the main RAM 65 at the same time.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 61, the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112, and the method of storing the entry history in each entry section are different from those in the first embodiment. ing. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 80 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in the present embodiment. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the MPU 62 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102. Similarly to the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a management-side I / F 111, a management-side CPU 112, a management-side ROM 113, a management-side RAM 114, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115 unlike the first embodiment. Also. In addition to the MPU 62, the main control board 61 is provided with a notification light emitting unit 651. The notification light emitting unit 651 is directly controlled to emit light by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and calculates various parameters using the information of the entry history of each entry that has been read from the history memory 117. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 651 is controlled according to the contents of the various parameters thus calculated. The notification light emitting unit 651 is accommodated in the accommodation space of the substrate box 60a of the main control device 60, but the substrate box 60a is formed transparent, and the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 651 is changed to the outside of the substrate box 60a. A light emitting unit for notification 651 is provided so that it can be visually confirmed. As a result, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the main control device 60 can be visually confirmed, so that the notification light emitting unit 651 is not required without opening the board box 60a. It becomes possible to visually confirm the light emission state of the.

  FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning mouth detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning mouth detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize winning port detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. Is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. 6 signal is input, the seventh buffer 122g is input with the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the 16th buffer 122p is output with the output instruction signal. It is inputted.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a signal corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, and a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i. Although the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, in the present embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and the front A signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is not input to the input port 121. That is, no signal relating to the entry history is input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

  The types of signals to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o have not been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals can be obtained by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. It is specified by the management side CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the fact that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management CPU 112 outputs to the sixteenth buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that the instruction signal is input.

  FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o. The first buffer counter 652a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second buffer counter 652b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third buffer counter 652c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth buffer counter 652d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth buffer counter 652e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth buffer counter 652f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The seventh buffer counter 652g stores information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eighth buffer counter 652h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth buffer counter 652i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth buffer counter 652j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh buffer counter 652k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 652l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The thirteenth buffer counter 652m stores information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourteenth buffer counter 652n stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifteenth buffer counter 652o stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

  However, the measurement targets using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o are any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. First to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the result of entering the car are input. Accordingly, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the measurement target. The distinction of whether or not these are measurement targets is performed based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. The history setting process is executed in step S1207 of the management process (FIG. 34).

  First, the number of buffers subject to confirmation in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S3001). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123j as already described, in step S3001, "7" is set in the check target counter. To do.

  Thereafter, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from “0” to “1”. Thus, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S3002). In addition, when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is a check target for numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first buffer 122a is a check target for numerical information. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the corresponding buffer counter 652a to 652o is added (step S3003). In the addition process, the counter value corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the counters of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer counter 652e is an addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first buffer counter 652a is an addition target.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3002 or when the process of step S3003 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3004). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S3005). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S3005: NO), the processing after step S3002 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  By executing the history setting process as described above, the game ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is as described above. Rather than being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing external output processing in the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S1208 of the management process (FIG. 34).

  When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S3101: YES), the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652 are added to the output target counter provided in the management RAM 114. Among the counters 652o, the management CPU 112 sets the number of counters whose number information is to be output (step S3102). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In the present embodiment, since information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g as described above, “7” is set in the output target counter in step S3102. .

  Thereafter, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the output target counter among the first to fifteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relation memory 116 is read (step S3103), and the history information is used. The number-of-times information stored in the counter corresponding to the current value of the output target counter among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o in the memory 117 is read (step S3104). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is “n”, the n-th corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o are targets for reading the corresponding relationship information, and the n-th buffer counters 652a to 652o are to read the number information. It becomes a target. For example, if the value of the output target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123e is a target for reading the correspondence information and the fifth buffer counter 652e is a target for reading the number of times information, and the value of the output target counter is If it is “1”, the first correspondence area 123a is a target for reading correspondence information, and the first buffer counter 652a is a target for reading number information.

  Thereafter, an information output process is executed (step S3105). In the information output process, the combination of the correspondence information read in step S3103 and the number-of-times information read in step S3104 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, the number-of-times information about the correspondence information that is the current output target is read.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S3106). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the output target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S3107). When the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S3107: NO), the processing after step S3103 is executed for the output target corresponding to the new output target counter value. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3107, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o are cleared to “0”.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing parameter management processing executed by the main CPU 63. The parameter management process is executed after the management output process in step S221 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

  First, it is determined whether or not an operation trigger for various parameters has occurred (step S3201). The calculation is triggered when the parameter management process is first executed after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and when the parameter management process is performed, as in the eleventh embodiment, This occurs every time the total number of game balls entering the device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 reaches 500 or more as the trigger reference number. Since the case where the parameter management process is first executed after the supply of operating power is started is set as a calculation trigger, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and then turned on again to calculate various parameters. An opportunity can be easily generated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters is executed as will be described later. Therefore, in the game area PA up to that point only by performing the power OFF / ON operation. It is possible to grasp the game ball entering mode. In addition, it is possible to finely manage the entrance mode of the game balls in the game area PA by generating a calculation opportunity every time the total number of game balls entered reaches the trigger reference number of 500 or more. It becomes.

  When a calculation trigger occurs (step S3201: YES), the ball entry history is read from the counter that is the storage target of the ball entry history among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o of the history memory 117. Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 652a to 652g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 can recognize the buffer counters 652a to 652o from which the entry history is read based on the program and data stored in the main ROM 64.

  Thereafter, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S3203). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history read in step S3202 and the information on the number of winning balls corresponding to the ball entry history. The main CPU 63 uses the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64 to store the ball entry histories read in step S3202 as the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the first operation port 33. It is possible to specify which of the two operation ports 34 corresponds, and it is possible to specify information on the number of winning balls corresponding to each entry history read in step S3202.

Specifically, various parameters calculated in step S3203 are:
7th parameter: (K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K5 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “general The number of winning balls for winning at the winning opening 31 + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the first operating port 33” + K5 × “the second operating port 34” Ratio / eighth parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning to the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K3 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K4 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K5 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” )) Is calculated.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the calculated various parameters are in the first range (step S3204). If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, an affirmative determination is made in step S3204 on the assumption that the various parameters calculated are within the first range. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, a first notification state setting process is executed (step S3205). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 651 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the first notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 651 is in a blue light emitting state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3204, it is determined whether or not the calculated various parameters are in the second range (step S3206). If only one of the conditions where the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, In step S3206, an affirmative determination is made that there are two ranges. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3206, a second notification state setting process is executed (step S3207). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 651 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the second notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 651 is in a yellow light emitting state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3206, it means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, the third notification state setting process is executed (step S3208). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 651 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the third notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 651 is in a red light emitting state.

  The light emission state set in step S3205, step S3207, or step S3208 is stopped until a new notification state is set for the notification light emitting unit 651 or the supply of operating power to the notification light emitting unit 651 is stopped. Continue until. Further, the notification state of the notification light emitting unit 651 is stored and held in the main RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, so that the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light emitting unit is stopped. Even if 651 is once turned off, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the light emitting state corresponding to the type of information in the notification state stored in the main RAM 65 is obtained. The light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 651 is executed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The game ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. Instead, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  A notification light emitting unit 651 for notifying the contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 is provided. As a result, the contents corresponding to the various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself, so that the manager of the game hall or the like does not need to read the information stored in the history memory 117 and the game balls in the game area PA can be read. It becomes possible to grasp the entrance mode.

  A notification light emitting unit 651 is provided along with the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 accommodated in the board box 60a. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light emitting unit 651.

  The calculation of various parameters and the light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 651 are executed not by the management CPU 112 but by the main CPU 63. Thereby, the reliability of the notification content in the notification light emitting unit 651 can be increased.

  When the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is entered, and when the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is established. The third notification state is entered when neither the first range nor the second range is supported. That is, the various parameters are not notified as they are, but the contents corresponding to the range including the various parameters are notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification patterns in the notification light emitting unit 651 from becoming excessive, and to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting unit 651.

  Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped immediately after the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 651 is continued. It is good also as a structure by which the light emission state in is maintained. In this case, even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the game ball entering mode in the game area PA by checking the notification light emitting unit 651. .

  Further, instead of this configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the notification light emitting unit 651 is turned off, but the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. May be configured such that the notification light emitting unit 651 is controlled to emit light so as to be in a light emitting state corresponding to the results of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by confirming the notification light emitting unit 651 before the start of business in the game hall, it is possible to grasp the game ball entering mode on the previous business day.

  The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the configuration of the notification light emitting unit 651, and may be a display device having a display surface such as the symbol display device 41, and the speaker unit 54. It may be. In addition, a signal corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters may be output to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal board 97.

  The special figure display part 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the universal figure display part 38a of the universal figure unit 38 may be configured to also function as the notification light emitting part 651. For example, when supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and depending on whether the calculation result is included in the first range, the second range, or any other one as in the above embodiment. The notification corresponding to the calculation result may be executed in the special figure display unit 37a or the general map display unit 38a immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the start condition of the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a or the start condition of the variable display of the pattern in the general map display unit 38a is satisfied. It may be configured to be temporarily interrupted when the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, and resumed when the variable display of the pattern is completed. According to this configuration, it is possible to use the special-figure display unit 37a or the general-purpose display unit 38a as notification means for notifying the entrance mode of the game ball in the game area PA.

  The notification light emitting portion 651 may be provided at a position where the notification light emitting portion 651 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, it is good also as a structure by which the alerting | reporting light emission part 651 is provided in the position which can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 behind the pachinko machine 10 rather than the window panel 52. In this case, the notification content corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters can be confirmed without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for providing information on each entry result to the management IC 66 is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of signal paths for allowing the detection results of the respective entrance detection sensors 42 a to 48 a to be input to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

  The detection result of the first winning port detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. In addition, the detection result of the second prize winning port detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third prize winning port detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. The detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. In addition, the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

  A first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

  With the above-described configuration, the detection results of the respective entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without any processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes processing for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize each result of entering the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Therefore, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  Further, branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist in the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to access the branch location and each of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and prevents an illegal act of inputting an abnormal entry result only to the management IC 66. .

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) In each of the above embodiments, the discharge adjusting means for periodically discharging the captured game ball B1 is provided above the first through gate 35. However, the arrangement of the discharge adjusting means is not limited to this. Here, the discharge adjusting means means the adjusting mechanism 180 in the first and sixth embodiments, the adjusting mechanism 220 in the second embodiment, the adjusting mechanism 330 in the third embodiment, and the fourth embodiment. The adjustment mechanism 430 in FIG. 5, the adjustment mechanism 530 in the fifth embodiment, and the adjustment mechanism 620 in the seventh embodiment. For example, instead of the second through gate 39 in each of the above-described embodiments, a game ball is an opening that can enter, and a first opening that is open upward, and switching between an open state and a closed state is possible. In a game board provided with a second opening which is an opening provided with possible opening / closing means, the discharge adjusting means may be arranged above the first opening and the second opening.

  Specifically, in the game board, the first opening and the second opening are provided on the right side of the game area. The discharge adjusting means is located above the first opening, and only game balls discharged from the discharge adjusting means can enter the first opening. The opening / closing means of the second opening prohibits the game ball from entering the second opening in the closed state. When the game ball is taken into the discharge adjustment means, and the game ball is discharged from the discharge adjustment means and enters the first opening, the opening / closing means switches from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball The ball enters the two openings. The open state of the opening / closing means is continued for a predetermined period, and a privilege advantageous to the player is given when the number of times the game ball has entered the second opening in the predetermined period.

  In order to shift the opening / closing means from the closed state to the open state, it is necessary for the player to launch a game ball aiming at the discharge adjusting means. Further, in order to make the game ball enter the second opening a predetermined number of times, it is necessary for the player to launch the game ball aiming at the second opening. In this way, the player is aiming to perform a game ball launch operation, and when a predetermined result is obtained, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, thereby increasing the player's awareness of participation. Can improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, by restricting the timing at which the game ball enters the first opening using the discharge adjusting means, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the open / close means is frequently opened. That is, by using the discharge adjusting means, it is possible to appropriately manage the interval at which the opening / closing means shifts to the open state.

  (2) The discharge adjusting means in each of the above embodiments may be provided above the first working port 33, and the lottery mode by the success / failure lottery means may be only one type. Here, the discharge adjusting means means the adjusting mechanism 180 in the first and sixth embodiments, the adjusting mechanism 220 in the second embodiment, the adjusting mechanism 330 in the third embodiment, and the fourth embodiment. The adjustment mechanism 430 in FIG. 5, the adjustment mechanism 530 in the fifth embodiment, and the adjustment mechanism 620 in the seventh embodiment. Specifically, the main CPU 63 drives and controls the discharge adjusting means so that a dischargeable period in which the taken game ball B1 can be discharged toward the first working port 33 occurs at a cycle of 1 sec. . The main ROM 64 stores a determination table for determining whether or not a determination value that is a target of a big hit in the determination process is set. As already described, the success / failure determination process is a process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponds to the jackpot winning process, and is executed in the special figure special electric control process (step S215) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). Process. In the success / failure determination table, (1250 × n−5) to (1250 × n) are set as determination values to be the targets of the big win. Here, the variable n is a natural number of 1 to 52. The probability that the winning / non-winning determination process is executed and the jackpot is won is approximately 1/210. In the first operation port 33, the jackpot target period in which the hold information acquired by winning the game ball B1 is a jackpot winning target occurs at a cycle of 5 sec and continues for 24 msec. When the dischargeable period in the discharge adjusting means does not correspond to the jackpot target period, the jackpot result is not obtained in the determination process. In this case, there is a possibility that the dischargeable period corresponds to the jackpot target period by updating the initial value of the hit random number counter C1 (FIG. 13). When the dischargeable period corresponds to the jackpot target period, the probability of winning a jackpot in the success / failure determination process is high. Specifically, when the discharge of the game ball B1 from the discharge adjusting means toward the first operation port 33 is performed in a cycle of 1 sec, a prize is awarded to the first operation port 33 at a rate of once every five times. You will be eligible for a jackpot. In this way, the discharge adjustment means creates a situation in which a big hit win is likely to occur and a situation in which it will not occur in the success / failure determination process, so that the player's behavior around the discharge adjustment means is influenced by the player's behavior. You can get interest and improve the fun of the game.

  (3) You may apply the structure for preventing the raise and stop of game ball B1 demonstrated in said each embodiment with respect to the member for distributing game ball B1 to either of two paths.

  Specifically, the game board is provided with a distribution winning device. A winning lottery is executed when a winning is generated in either the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Among these, when a winning lottery is performed in the winning lottery executed with the winning of the second operating port 34 as a trigger, the mode shifts to the distribution execution mode. In the distribution execution mode, when a V prize is generated, the special electric prize winning device 32 is in an open / close execution mode in which it is opened.

  The distribution winning device includes an upstream passage, and the upstream passage branches into a V winning passage and a discharge passage in the branch space. The upstream passage, the V winning award passage, and the discharge passage have passage cross sections that allow one game ball B1 to pass therethrough and prevent a plurality of game balls B1 from passing simultaneously. Yes. In the periphery of the branch space, the upstream passage is linearly formed downward. In addition, an outlet of the discharge passage is provided immediately below the outlet of the upstream passage around the branch space. For this reason, when the game ball B1 linearly flowing down the upstream passage around the branch space advances downward, it enters the discharge passage.

  In the branch space, a switching member is provided below the upstream passage and above the discharge passage. The switching member includes a rotation shaft, a plate-shaped switching piece that rotates from the initial position to the displacement position around the rotation axis, and switching from the initial position of the switching piece to the displacement position based on a signal from the main CPU 63. And a switching drive unit for switching from the displacement position to the initial position. When the switching piece is in the initial position, the switching piece is in a first state extending downward. In the first state, the discharge passage is opened upward. For this reason, the game ball B1 flowing down the upstream passage enters the discharge passage.

  On the other hand, when the switching piece is in the displacement position, the switching piece is in a second state extending obliquely leftward and forward. In the second state, since the switching piece exists above the discharge passage, the game ball B1 discharged from the upstream passage comes into contact with the switching piece. In the second state, the contact surface of the switching piece with the game ball B1 is inclined downward toward the front. For this reason, the course of the game ball B1 in contact with the switching piece moves forward. The V winning path is formed in such a manner that the game ball B1 that is in contact with the switching piece in the second state enters the front of the discharge path. For this reason, when the switching drive unit switches the switching piece to the displacement position, the game ball B1 discharged from the upstream path is guided to the V winning path. The distribution winning device is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the game ball B1 flowing down the V winning path, and when the game ball B1 is detected by the detection sensor, a V winning is obtained.

  The V winning path is separated from the discharge path by a plate-shaped partition member. The displacement position of the switching piece is set so that the distance from the free end of the switching piece at the displacement position to the upper end of the partition member is smaller than the diameter of the game ball B1. This prevents the game ball B1 from entering the discharge passage from the gap between the switching piece and the partition member in the second state where the switching piece is in the displacement position. In this configuration, an intermediate state in which the distance from the free end of the switching piece to the upper end of the partition member is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball B1 occurs while the switching piece is switched from the initial position to the displacement position. In the intermediate state, when the game ball B1 discharged from the upstream passage enters the gap between the rotating switching piece and the partition member, the game ball B1 may be sandwiched between the switching piece and the partition member and stop. There is.

  The configuration described in the first embodiment can be applied to this configuration. Specifically, the distribution prize winning device includes an escape passage adjacent to the discharge passage on the left side of the discharge passage. The entrance of the escape passage is provided at a position lower than the upper end of the partition member. The contact surface of the switching piece with the game ball B1 is inclined backward toward the left, and the wall on the discharge passage side in the vicinity of the upper end of the partition member is inclined forward toward the left. That is, the two surfaces that come into contact with the game ball B1 in the intermediate state both have an inclination for pushing the game ball B1 toward the escape passage. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the switching piece and the partition member in the intermediate state, the game ball B1 is pushed out into the escape passage as the switching piece moves to the displacement state. Thereby, it is possible to avoid pinching of the game ball B1 without causing the game ball B1 to rise and stop in the distribution winning device. The escape passage merges with the discharge passage at a midpoint of the discharge passage. When the game ball B1 is pushed out toward the escape passage in the intermediate state where the switching piece is switched, the game ball B1 flows down the escape passage and is guided to an intermediate position in the discharge passage. The game ball B1 guided to the escape passage is not detected by the detection sensor provided in the V winning passage. For this reason, when the game ball B1 is pushed out into the escape passage in the intermediate state, no V winning is generated as in the case where the game ball B1 flows down the discharge passage.

  The configuration described in the third embodiment can be applied to this configuration. Specifically, when the game ball B1 comes into contact with the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352, the blade member 343 rotates around the rotation shaft 344 as the rotating body 340 rotates, and the blade It is possible to apply a configuration that avoids pinching of the game ball B1 when the member 343 takes the displacement position. Specifically, the plate-shaped switching piece includes a fixed portion on the fixed end side and a rotatable portion on the free end side. A rotation shaft is provided on the free end side of the plate-like fixed portion, and the plate-like turnable portion is connected to the fixed portion in such a manner that it can turn around the rotation shaft. When no external force is applied, the surface of the fixed portion of the switching piece is on the same plane as the surface of the rotatable portion. The pivotable portion pivots downward when pressed downward from the outside, and returns to its original state by a restoring force by the biasing member when the external force is removed. When the game ball B1 is in contact with the switching piece and the partition member in the intermediate state, the rotatable portion rotates downward as the switching piece moves to the displacement position. The restoring force by the urging member is not so strong as to prevent the game ball B1 in contact with the partition member and the rotatable portion from falling downward due to its own weight. For this reason, the game ball B1 that is temporarily in contact with the partition member and the pivotable portion moves downward by its own weight and enters the discharge passage without being pinched and stopped. In the switching piece at the displacement position, the protruding length of the fixed portion above the discharge passage is such a length that the fixed portion alone can guide the game ball B1 to the V winning path. In the state where the switching piece is at the displacement position, when the game ball B1 falling from above collides with the rotatable portion, the rotatable portion rotates downward. However, the distance from the free end of the rotating movable part to the upper end of the partition member is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1 in both the state where the rotating movable part is not rotating and the state where it is rotating. Therefore, in a state where the switching piece is completely moved to the displacement position, the game ball B1 does not enter the gap between the free end of the rotatable portion and the upper end of the partition plate and enter the discharge passage. . As described above, the switching piece includes the fixed portion, the pivot shaft, and the pivotable portion, and the pivotable portion is pivotable about the pivot shaft. It becomes possible to enter the discharge passage without ascending and stopping.

  (4) In the gaming machine in which the second operation port 34 is opened when the game ball B1 entering the opportunity generation device is detected, the game ball B1 described in each of the above embodiments with respect to the opportunity generation device You may apply the structure for preventing a raise and a stop.

  Specifically, the game area PA includes an upper area PA1, a left area PA2, a right area PA3, and a lower area PA4 of the variable display unit 36. The lower area PA4 is provided with a first working port 33, and the right area PA3 is provided with a trigger generating device and a special opening device.

  In the right region PA3, the special opening device is disposed below the opportunity generating device. The trigger generating device includes a rotating body, a housing unit that stores the rotating body, a trigger generating drive unit that rotates the rotating body based on a signal from the main CPU 63, and a game ball in the trigger generating area of the trigger generating device. And an occurrence detection sensor for detecting B1. The accommodating part is provided with the standing wall for partitioning accommodating space. In the upper part of the housing portion, the left standing wall and the right standing wall are separated from each other, and a gap between the left standing wall and the right standing wall serves as an entrance of the trigger generator. The entrance of the opportunity generator is an opening that opens upward, and the width of the entrance is set slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1.

  The game ball B1 can enter the opportunity generator from the entrance. Along with the rotation of the rotating body, a state where the game ball B1 can enter and a state where the game ball B1 cannot enter occur at the entrance of the opportunity generator. The special opening device includes a special opening that is open upward, an opening / closing member that can open and close the special opening, and the main CPU 63. A special drive unit is provided for driving the open / close member based on the signal to open or close the special opening.

  The main CPU 63 executes a lottery lottery when a winning to the first working port 33 occurs. The right is generated when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot. In the right generation state, when the game ball B1 enters the trigger generation device and the game ball B1 is detected by the trigger generation detection sensor, the opening / closing period of the special opening device is started. Then, the game ball B1 is paid out in response to the ball entering the special opening that has been opened. Open / close the special opening device when a preset reference time has elapsed while the opening / closing operation of the special opening device has been performed, and when the number of balls entering the special opening reaches the reference number The period ends. Among these, when a preset reference time has elapsed while the opening / closing operation of the special opening device is being executed, the second opening / closing operation is executed by the special opening device.

  In this configuration, when a rotating body having one or more recesses capable of accommodating the game ball B1 is used as the rotating body of the opportunity generating device, the rotating body stands up when the game ball B1 enters the opportunity generating device. There is a possibility of being caught between walls. On the other hand, the configuration described in the first embodiment can be applied to this configuration.

  Specifically, on the surface of the game board, a passage entrance is provided at a position corresponding to the upper part of the opportunity generator. In addition, the game board is formed with an escape passage that allows the game ball B1 that has entered from the entrance of the passage to escape backward and downward. The rotating body is disk-shaped, and the peripheral surface of the rotating body excluding the recess is inclined in the axial direction toward the rear. For this reason, the game ball B1 that has not been taken into the recess in the upper part of the opportunity generating device is guided to the passage entrance along the inclination of the peripheral surface of the rotating body. In the upper part of the opportunity generator, the contact surface of the standing wall with the game ball B1 is inclined rightward toward the rear. The rotating body rotates clockwise. For this reason, when the game ball B1 is pressed against the standing wall from the rotating body in the upper part of the opportunity generating device, the game ball B1 is guided along the inclination of the standing wall and escapes toward the rear passage entrance. For this reason, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the rotating body and the standing wall in the upper part of the opportunity generating device, the game ball B1 enters the passage entrance as the rotating body rotates. In this way, by applying a configuration that avoids the pinching of the game ball B1 in the upper part of the trigger generation device, the game ball B1 rises or stops when the game ball B1 enters the trigger generation device. It has been avoided. The trigger occurrence detection sensor is provided inside the trigger generation device, and can detect only the game ball B1 taken into the trigger generation device. For this reason, even if the game ball B1 enters the passage entrance, the entered ball does not trigger the opening / closing operation of the special opening device.

  The configuration described in the second embodiment can be applied to this configuration. Specifically, when the game ball B1 comes into contact with the rotating body 230 and the upper right upright wall 252, the upper right upright wall 252 rotates around the rotation shaft 254 and takes in the game ball B1. Applicable configurations can be applied. Specifically, the standing wall includes a pivot shaft and a movable standing wall that can pivot about the pivot shaft. The movable upright wall is located in the upper part of the trigger generator and defines the right end of the entrance of the trigger generator. The rotating body rotates clockwise. In the upper part of the trigger generation device, the game ball B1 trying to enter the trigger generation device may be in contact with the rotating body and the movable standing wall. In this case, the game ball B1 is pushed toward the right where the movable upright wall is present as the rotating body rotates. The movable upright wall can relieve the force that the rotating body presses the game ball B1 against the movable upright wall by rotating around the rotation axis. Further, the contact surface of the movable standing wall with the game ball B1 is inclined rightward toward the lower side. For this reason, when the game ball B1 is pushed toward the contact surface by the rotating body, the movable upright wall rotates to the right, and the game ball B1 is guided by the inclination of the contact surface with the rotary upright wall. Is taken into the opportunity generator. By avoiding that the game ball B1 that is temporarily in contact with the rotating body and the movable upright wall is sandwiched, the game ball B1 can be prevented from rising and stopping. In addition, when the game ball B1 taken into the trigger generation device after being temporarily in contact with the rotating body and the movable standing wall is detected by the trigger generation detection sensor, the opening / closing operation of the special opening device is performed. It will be an opportunity to start.

  (5) The adjusting mechanism (adjusting mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, and 620) in each of the above embodiments has a dischargeable period during which the game ball B1 can be discharged toward the first through gate 35 only in a certain period. It is not restricted to the structure which generate | occur | produces. For example, the adjusting mechanism can play the game ball within a range not exceeding the upper limit number (4) of numerical information that can be held in the general-purpose holding area HA (FIG. 13) at a timing other than the dischargeable period that occurs at a fixed period. A configuration in which B1 is discharged toward the first through gate 35 may be employed.

  In the first embodiment, in addition to the four recesses 183b to 183e (FIG. 4) arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, an additional fifth recess is provided on the rotating body 183. Good. The fifth dent has the same shape and size as the first dent 183b, the second dent 183c, and the third dent 183d, and can receive one game ball B1. In this case, the first through gate 35 receives the game ball B1 discharged from any of the four recesses 183b to 183e in a 1 sec cycle, and is taken into the fifth recess and discharged in a 1 sec cycle. A game ball B1 discharged at a timing other than the possible period enters.

  In the fifth embodiment, the adjustment unit 546 (FIG. 55) may be opened in a 0.5 sec cycle. When the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 in the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, the configuration is such that the winning of the opening of the electric power is generated in the opening of the electric power at the rate of once every two times. be able to. Moreover, in the said 5th Embodiment, it is good also as a structure which the open state of the adjustment part 546 (FIG. 55) generate | occur | produced with a 1 second period continues for 0.5 sec longer than the said 5th Embodiment. In this case, a plurality of game balls B1 can be discharged toward the first through gate 35 in one open state. Here, the shortest firing interval in the game ball launching mechanism 27 is 0.6 sec. For this reason, in one open state, the upper limit of the numerical information that can be held in the main power holding area HA for the number of game balls B1 discharged at a timing outside the original dischargeable period and winning the first through gate 35 It can fit in the range not exceeding the number.

  The game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 within a range that does not exceed the upper limit number of numerical information that can be held in the general electric power holding area HA even at timings other than the dischargeable period that occurs in a 1 sec cycle. Thus, even in the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, it is possible to generate a single non-consecutive public power open winning. Therefore, even if the non-winning continuous period of low frequency support mode lasts for a long time, every time a public power open winning occurs, the player's expectation for the winning continuous period will be raised, and the player will not be bored can do.

  (6) In each of the above-described embodiments, all of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are stored as history information (or pitching history). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information. It is good also as composition which becomes. For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the second operation opening 34 may be configured to store history information, and only the general winning opening 31 is configured to store history information. Also good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the game ball entry mode in a predetermined period for the ball entry part for which history information is to be stored.

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball is transmitted in correspondence with each of the first prize opening detection sensor 42a, the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, and the third prize opening detection sensor 44a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the result of entering the same type of entrance part is the same type of entrance part. There may be a configuration in which a plurality of incoming ball detection sensors are present and a plurality of ball detection sensors are transmitted in accordance therewith. As a result, the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 can be suppressed.

  (8) In the first embodiment, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in the management IC 66 in advance. In this case, it is not necessary to execute processing for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, and thus the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  (9) In the first embodiment, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the respective buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 can communicate with each other and can be handled by the management IC 66. The configuration may be such that the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting transmission of the relationship information is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and used for both reading and writing. Correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main CPU 63. Even when the supply of operating power is stopped, the correspondence memory 116 is configured to store and hold the operation power. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

  (10) In the first embodiment, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the detection result information of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information is mainly used. A configuration may be employed in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can determine which type of information is received from the main CPU 63 based on the types of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

  (11) In the first embodiment, etc., information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may directly execute the notification control of the notification means in the same manner as in the seventeenth embodiment so that notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. The main CPU 63 transmits a command corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the sound emission control device 81, so that the contents of the various parameters are obtained using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41. It is good also as a structure which performs corresponding alerting | reporting.

  (12) When supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of various parameters may be notified using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the symbol display device 41, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game ball entering mode of the game area PA was normal on the previous business day at the start of the game hall.

  (13) When various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 cannot start a game until the prohibition release operation is performed. It is good. As a configuration for preventing the game from starting, for example, a configuration in which the launch of the game ball may be prohibited, a configuration in which each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a is invalidated, or the first operation port Even if a winning to 33 or the 2nd operation mouth 34 occurs, it is good also as composition which does not perform the success / failure judgment processing. Further, the prohibition canceling operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again with the RAM erasure switch turned ON, and can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11. It is good also as operation of the operation means used. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the game ball entering mode in the game area PA is in an abnormal mode.

  (14) Although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed in either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. Also, the configuration may be such that neither is executed. In this case, the history information may be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and various parameters may be calculated using the read history information by an operator of the reading work. Alternatively, the reading device may be configured to execute various parameters using the read history information. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced.

  (15) The management IC 66 is not provided, and the main CPU 63 may have a function of executing a history information storing process and a function of calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments. A configuration provided in the CPU 92 or a configuration provided in the sound emission control device 81 may be employed. When the payout-side CPU 92 or the sound emission control device 81 is provided with these functions, information on the detection results of the respective entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control subject having the functions. It will be.

  (16) The management IC 66 is provided with a power source separate from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters using history information. Alternatively, it may be configured to be able to output history information or information of various parameters. As a result, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the history information and various parameters can be read by the reading device.

  (17) The reading terminal 102 used for reading the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by the reading device. The terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used for reading history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62 or may be provided in a position different from the MPU 62 in the main control board 61.

  (18) The correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 631 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to the configuration provided as nonvolatile storage means such as a flash memory. 116, 117, or 131 is provided as a volatile storage unit that requires power supply to store and store information, and backup power is supplied to the memory, thereby operating power to the main CPU 63. Even if the supply is stopped, the information may be stored and held. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated backup power device is provided for the memory, and backup power is supplied to the memory from the power supply / launch control device 78 that supplies the main RAM 65 with backup power. Also good.

  (19) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which various parameters are calculated using history information, and history information is not stored and held, and a game ball is played by any one of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a. Various parameters may be calculated and updated each time a new detection is made. In this case, although the calculation frequency of various parameters increases, it is possible to extract various parameters at an arbitrary timing.

  (20) The management IC 66 includes the management CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU, and is not limited to a configuration that executes history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing based on programs and data stored in the management ROM 113. A hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63. The correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored in the history memory 117 from the correspondence memory 116, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. To do. For example, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63, the hardware circuit has received the signal. The counter value corresponding to the buffer is incremented by one. In addition, when an operation trigger occurs in the first embodiment or the like, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that time. In addition, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters as calculation results and externally outputs history information.

  (21) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the information on the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as the history information, the configuration in which the transition to the opening / closing execution mode has occurred is stored as the history information. The transition timing to the opening / closing execution mode and the end timing may be stored as history information, or the transition to the high frequency support mode may be stored as history information, and a predetermined abnormality It is good also as a structure by which it is memorize | stored as historical information that generation | occurrence | production occurred. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the transition probability to opening / closing execution mode is calculated by using the above history information, and it is good also as a structure by which the transition probability to high frequency support mode is calculated, and predetermined | prescribed abnormality is The frequency of occurrence may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device.

  (22) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate substrates, or may be provided as separate control devices.

  (23) In the first embodiment and the like, while the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is counted, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and History information including RTC information may be stored for awarding of a prize ball of a game ball such as the second operation port 34 and entering a privilege triggering ball portion that triggers the determination process. As a result, it is possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each privilege opportunity ball portion with respect to the total number of game balls discharged while allowing the game ball entry history to the privilege opportunity ball portion to be extracted. Become.

  (24) It is good also as a structure in which things other than the thing in said each embodiment are contained as object kept as log | history information. For example, at least one of the timing when the lower plate 56a becomes full, the timing when the full state is started, and the timing when the full state is released may be stored as history information. It may be configured that at least one of the timing when the ball has become unsatisfied, the timing at which the ball has no state is started, and the timing at which the state without the ball is released is stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 becomes in an abnormal state. In addition, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is canceled may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

  (25) In the first embodiment and the like, a configuration in which the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal is preset in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. It is good also as a structure. In this case, it is not necessary to previously set the correspondence relationship between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p in the management IC 66.

  (26) The number of game balls that have entered a predetermined ball-entry part that is generated when the front door frame 14 is in the open state is stored as history information, and the number of balls that are grasped using the history information. May be externally output to the reading device. As a result, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls that have entered a predetermined entry portion in a state where the front door frame 14 is in an open state, and it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud. In addition, the number of balls entered into a predetermined ball-entry part generated in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in an open state is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the calculated number of balls entered is an abnormal number. In some cases, abnormality notification may be executed. As a result, it is possible to deal with an illegal act of illegally opening the front door frame 14 and causing a game ball to enter a predetermined entrance part.

  (27) The management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether or not the management IC 66 is operating normally.

  (28) In the first embodiment or the like, the order in which the management CPU 112 performs the confirmation processing of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o may be reverse to that of the first embodiment or the like. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the process for changing the output state of each signal matches the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation process for the buffers 122a to 122o.

  (29) When information stored in the main ROM 64 is externally output using the reading terminal 102, one of a program and data may be selectively externally output, and a predetermined program It is good also as a structure which can output only to the outside. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reading device. As a configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside, the main CPU 63 selects information to be externally output from selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside. Can be considered.

  (30) The other information to be externally output through the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to history information and various parameters. For example, when an abnormality occurs May be configured to store the history information of the occurrence of the abnormality and output the stored history information to the outside through the reading terminal 102.

  (31) The detection sensors 42a to 48a are individually provided for each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a are provided. The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by grasping the total number of game balls detected in this way is not limited to this. For example, all of the game balls discharged from the game area PA It is good also as a structure which provides the discharge | emission detection sensor which detects the game ball which passes the said channel | path area | region while providing the channel | path area | region where one game ball will pass one by one. In this case, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor. Further, in the configuration, as in each of the above-described embodiments, a detection sensor for detecting the number of game balls received in each of the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. By providing 42a to 47a, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls that have entered each of the entrance parts to the total number of game balls that have been discharged from the game area PA.

  (32) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 81 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60, the display control is performed based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 82 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, the both control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main control device 60, and both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. The configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

  (33) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the specific area of the special device, or a game ball in the specific area of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, for example, a result of a lottery process of a combination executed when starting one game based on an operation of a start lever is history information. The actual winning probability of each role may be calculated using the history information, and when a transition to a special gaming state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information, and the history The configuration may be such that the actual transition probability to the special gaming state is calculated using information, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special gaming state to the total number of digested games may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device, or notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters may be performed by the gaming machine itself.

  (34) The characteristic configurations of the first to eighteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighteenth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the fourteenth embodiment may be combined. Moreover, you may apply the structure of the said another form with arbitrary combinations with respect to the structure which applied the characteristic structure of the said 1st-15th embodiment with the predetermined combination.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. A ball entry part (first through gate 35) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter;
A privilege granting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S705 and S706 in the main CPU 63) that grants a privilege based on at least one condition that a game ball has entered the pitching unit;
With
As a control mode of the privilege grant status, a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) that is more likely to be the privilege grant status than the first mode are set. ,
Guidance means (adjustment mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) for guiding the game ball toward the ball-entrance unit;
In the first mode, each guidance timing of the game ball guided by the guidance means corresponds to or is a response to a grant trigger timing at which the game ball guided to the ball-entry portion becomes the bonus grant trigger. A predetermined situation generating means (a function of executing the processing of steps S312 and S313 in the main CPU 63) for generating a predetermined situation (winning continuous period) that is easy to perform;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, the first mode is a configuration that is less likely to give a privilege than the second mode. For this reason, in the first mode, the player's expectation to become a privilege grant situation is low. In this configuration, as a situation that occurs in the first mode, a predetermined situation is provided in which the guidance timing of the game ball guided by the guidance means corresponds to or becomes easy to correspond to the grant timing. Thereby, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a predetermined situation may occur to the player who is performing the operation of launching the game ball in the first mode. In the first mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by suppressing a decrease in the player's expectation that the privilege will be granted.

Feature A2. A ball entry part (first through gate 35) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter;
A privilege granting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S705 and S706 in the main CPU 63) that grants a privilege based on at least one condition that a game ball has entered the pitching unit;
Guidance means (adjustment mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) for guiding the game ball toward the ball-entrance unit;
Each timing for guiding the game ball guided by the guiding means at a predetermined time interval in the pitched portion is given when the bonus is triggered by the game ball guided to the pitched portion. A predetermined situation generating means (a function of executing the processing of step S312 and step S313 in the main CPU 63) that generates a predetermined situation (winning continuous period) that becomes or is likely to correspond to
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A2, all or part of the conditions for granting a privilege are satisfied when the guidance timing becomes a situation corresponding to the grant opportunity timing or a predetermined situation that makes it easy to deal with. The predetermined situation is a situation in which a possibility of granting a privilege occurs every time the guidance timing is reached, which is an advantageous situation for the player. By adopting a configuration in which a predetermined situation occurs, it is possible to make the player aware of the occurrence of the predetermined situation even when it is not the predetermined situation, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the predetermined situation generating means generates the predetermined situation by changing the grant timing.

  According to the feature A3, when the grant timing is changed and the guidance timing corresponds to the grant timing, or when it becomes easy to respond, the predetermined situation occurs and the grant timing changes. When the guidance timing does not correspond to the grant timing, the predetermined situation ends. By making the predetermined situation occur without warning, the player can always be aware of the predetermined situation. By always keeping the player's expectation that the predetermined situation will occur, the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature A4. First update means for updating and storing numerical information (general utility release counter C4, function of executing processing in step S202 in the main CPU 63);
Second updating means for updating and storing numerical information for updating the initial value of the first updating means (opening initial value counter C5, function for executing the processing of step S113 in the main CPU 63, in the main CPU 63 A function of executing the process of step S204);
With
The privilege granting means
Based on the determination criterion information (low-frequency winning determination value table T1) in which numerical information corresponding to the grant timing is set, a predetermined process (general power) is performed using the numerical information stored in the first update means. Means for executing (open lottery) (function of executing the process of step S705 in the main CPU 63, function of executing the process of step S717 in the main CPU 63),
Means for granting the privilege when the numerical information stored in the first updating means in the predetermined processing is a predetermined grant result (general power open winning) that is numerical information corresponding to the grant trigger timing ( A function of executing the processes of steps S410 and S411 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processes of steps S803 to S807 in the main CPU 63),
With
The game according to Feature A3, wherein the predetermined situation generating means generates the predetermined situation by setting numerical information stored in the second updating means as an initial value of the first updating means. Machine.

  According to the feature A4, by setting the numerical information stored in the second update unit as the initial value of the first update unit, it is possible to make the occurrence timing of the predetermined situation irregular. By not knowing when the predetermined situation will occur, the player can always be aware of the predetermined situation. By always keeping the player's expectation that the predetermined situation will occur, the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature A5. The predetermined situation generating means includes
Means (step S312 in the main CPU 63) for executing the predetermined change process for changing the temporal relationship between the induction timing and the timing of giving the timing every time the predetermined change timing is reached (step S312 in the main CPU 63) And a function of executing the process of step S313),
In the predetermined situation, when the change timing comes, the extension means for extending the predetermined situation by skipping the execution of the predetermined change process (function for executing step S305 in the main CPU 63, step in the main CPU 63) The function of executing the processing of S712),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, comprising:

  According to the feature A5, the execution of the predetermined change process is postponed, whereby the predetermined situation advantageous to the player is continued for a long time, and the predetermined situation can be made attractive. Thereby, the player's sense of expectation for a predetermined situation can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature A6. A starting entrance portion (first operation port 33, 581, second operation port 34, 582) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Means for generating an advantageous state for the player on the condition that at least one condition is that the game ball has entered the start ball entrance section (function for executing the process of step S215 in the main CPU 63);
With
The starting pitching portion includes the starting pitching portion in a first predetermined state where the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot be entered (a closed state of the general utility 34a) and the first predetermined state. Is also provided with an acceptance control means (a function for executing a general-purpose general power control process in the main CPU 63) that can be switched to a second predetermined state in which the game ball is easy to enter (the open state of the general electric utility 34a). ,
As a control mode of the starting and entering part by the acceptance control means, a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) that is more likely to be in the second predetermined state than the first mode, , Is set,
The privilege granting unit executes a predetermined determination (opening lottery for public trains) on at least one condition that a game ball has entered the pitching unit, and in the predetermined determination, a predetermined determination result (opening for public trains) When it becomes, as said privilege, it has a means (function which performs processing of Step S407-Step S411 in main side CPU63) which makes the above-mentioned starting pitching part the 2nd predetermined state,
Any one of the features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined situation generating means generates the predetermined situation on the condition that the control mode of the starting and entering part is the first mode. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A6, in the first mode, the starting ball entering portion is less likely to be in the second predetermined state as compared to the second mode. For this reason, in the 1st mode, compared with the 2nd mode, a player's expectation for a game ball to enter a starting entrance part becomes low. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which a predetermined situation occurs in the first mode, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation that the game ball will enter the starting entrance part in the first mode. . Since the predetermined situation occurs on condition that the mode is the first mode, the impression that the first mode is disadvantageous compared to the second mode can be eased.

  Feature A7. The occurrence probability of the predetermined situation includes the first mode including both the case where the control mode in the acceptance control means is the second mode and the case where the control mode is not the predetermined situation. The gaming machine according to Feature A6, wherein the gaming machine is set to a probability that is more advantageous to the player than in the case of.

  According to the feature A7, when the entire first mode including both the case of the predetermined situation and the case of not being the predetermined situation is compared with the second mode, the case of the second mode is the first mode. It is more advantageous for the player than the case. While maintaining the premise that the player in the second mode is more advantageous to the player than in the first mode, the game ball starts in the first mode by generating a predetermined situation in the first mode. It is possible to prevent the player's expectation to enter the entrance part from being significantly reduced.

Feature A8. Based on a launch operation by the player, the launch means (game ball launch mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
In the game area, as the entrance portion, a first entrance portion (a first through portion) that exists at a position where an entrance can occur when the player performs a launch operation of the launch means in the first launch mode. Gate 35) and a second ball-entry portion (second ball) that is present at a position where a ball can be generated when the player performs a shooting operation of the shooting means in a second shooting mode different from the first shooting mode. Through gate 39), and
The guiding means is for guiding a game ball toward the first entrance part,
When the control mode in the acceptance control means is the first mode, it is more advantageous for the player to perform the launch operation in the first launch mode than to perform the launch operation in the second launch mode, In the second mode, it is more advantageous for the player to perform the launch operation in the second launch mode than to perform the launch operation in the first launch mode. Game machines.

  According to the feature A8, when the number of the entrance part is one, even when the control mode of the acceptance control means is the second mode, the game ball is guided to the entrance means to enter the entrance part. It will be necessary. For this reason, a game ball that has not been guided by the guiding means cannot enter the entrance portion. On the other hand, by providing a second incoming ball portion that is different from the first incoming ball portion provided with the guiding means, in the second mode, the game ball can be moved without passing through the guiding means. 2 It is possible to enter the entrance part. Thereby, the frequency with which the predetermined determination is executed in the second mode can be increased.

  In addition, by adopting a configuration that is advantageous to the player by changing the launch mode according to the situation, compared to a configuration that continues the same launch mode, the player's participation consciousness is increased and the interest of the game is improved. Can be planned.

  Feature A9. When the predetermined determination result is obtained in the predetermined determination in the case where the control mode in the acceptance control unit is the second mode, the privilege granting unit determines the predetermined determination in the first mode. Any of the features A6 to A8, wherein the starting ball entering portion is in the second predetermined state in such a manner that a game ball can easily enter the starting ball entering portion as compared with the case where the predetermined determination result is obtained. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature A9, when a predetermined situation occurs in the first mode, which is inherently disadvantageous to the player than in the second mode, the predetermined determination result is obtained in the predetermined determination every time the game ball enters the ball entering portion. Become. For this reason, when it is in the first mode as well as in the predetermined situation, there is a possibility that the starting entrance part will be in the second predetermined state with a higher frequency than in the second mode. On the other hand, when the predetermined determination result is obtained in the second mode predetermined determination, the starting ball entering part is in the second predetermined state, and when the predetermined determination result is obtained in the first mode predetermined determination. In this configuration, the starting ball enters the starting ball entering portion more easily than in the second predetermined situation. Thus, the frequency at which the game ball enters the start entrance part in the second mode and the frequency at which the game ball enters the start entrance part in the first mode and in a predetermined situation. Balance can be achieved.

Feature A10. The guiding means includes
A guide section (near the inlet 185, near the inlet 262, the upper part of the adjusting mechanisms 330 and 430, near the adjusting section 546) that can be reached by the game ball flowing down the game area;
Means for guiding the game ball that has reached the guide portion to the entrance portion at a guideable timing at which the guide portion can guide the game ball toward the entrance portion (timing in a take-in permitted state). (Rotary bodies 183, 230, 340, 440),
Discharging means (peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191) for discharging the game ball that has reached the guiding portion at a timing different from the guideable timing to a region different from the incoming ball portion;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, comprising:

  According to the feature A10, since the game ball that has reached the guide unit at a timing different from the guideable timing can be discharged, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has not been taken into the guide unit from staying in the vicinity of the guide unit. As a result, the vicinity of the guiding portion can be maintained in a state in which the game ball that has reached the guiding portion at the guiding possible timing is easily guided toward the entering portion.

  Feature A11. The discharging means includes means (peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191) for discharging the game ball that has reached the guiding portion at a timing different from the guideable timing to the outside of the guiding means. The gaming machine according to Feature A10, wherein:

  According to the feature A11, the game ball that has reached the guide unit at a timing different from the guideable timing is discharged to the outside of the guide unit by the guide unit, thereby suppressing the game ball from staying in the vicinity of the guide unit. be able to. Thereby, in a guidance part, possibility that guidance to the entrance part of a game ball which is a guidance object will be prevented by a game ball which is not a guidance object can be reduced.

Feature A12. The discharging means is
A space in which a game ball can flow down, a flow-down space provided around the guiding means in the game area (spaces provided on the left and right sides of the adjustment mechanisms 180, 430, 530, and 620, an adjustment mechanism) 220) on the left side of 220),
The game area is provided in the game area with an interval that allows the game ball guided to the guide part to flow down to the flow-down space at a timing different from the guideable timing with the guide means. , Ball guide means (nail 24b, left guide nail 291, right guide nail 292, downstream guide nail 371, guide nail 472) for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area toward the guide portion;
A gaming machine according to Feature A10 or A11, wherein

  According to the feature A12, a configuration in which a game ball guided by the guide unit and not taken into the guide unit flows down the downstream space, thereby reducing the possibility of the game ball staying in the vicinity of the guide unit. can do. In addition, since the game ball can be guided to the guiding portion by the ball guiding means, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the gaming balls guided by the guiding means toward the entering ball portion are insufficient.

  Feature A13. Any of the features A10 to A12, wherein the discharging means includes an auxiliary passage (escape passage 172) into which a game ball that has reached the guide portion at a timing different from the guideable timing can enter. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature A13, the game ball that has reached the guide unit at a timing different from the guideable timing is moved to another place by the auxiliary passage, so that it reaches the guide unit and moves to another place. While avoiding a game ball in the middle of a collision with another game ball flowing down the game area, it is possible to avoid a game ball that has reached the guide part from staying around the guide part.

Feature A14. The boundary on the rear side of the game area is defined by plate-shaped area defining means (game boards 24, 610),
The game machine according to Feature A13, wherein the auxiliary passage allows a game ball to pass behind the front surface of the area defining means.

  According to the feature A14, a member that divides the auxiliary passage is configured such that the game ball that has reached the guide portion at a timing different from the guideable timing is discharged backward from the front surface of the area defining means. Can be prevented from colliding with other game balls flowing down the game area and disturbing the course of the game balls.

  Feature A15. The auxiliary passage includes a passage outlet (passage outlet 173) for discharging the game ball flowing down the auxiliary passage toward the game area in front of the area defining means. Game machines.

  According to the feature A15, in the configuration in which the game balls that have entered the auxiliary passage do not return to the game area, there is a possibility that the game balls flowing down the guiding means are insufficient. In contrast, by adopting a configuration in which the game balls that have flowed down the auxiliary passage return to the game area from the exit for the passage, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of game balls that flow down the downstream of the guiding means will decrease.

  Feature A16. The game area is prevented from colliding with the game balls discharged from the passage exit toward the game area, from the upstream of the passage exit. A game machine according to Feature A15, wherein a collision prevention means (exit roof 174) is provided.

  According to feature A16, a game ball that is about to return to the game area from the exit for the passage collides with a game ball that has flowed down from the upstream of the exit for the passage in the game area, and is returned to the auxiliary passage again. Can be prevented.

  Feature A17. The game machine according to any one of features A13 to A16, wherein the movement of the game ball passing through the auxiliary passage is visible from the outside.

  According to the feature A17, by making the movement of the game ball in the auxiliary passage visible from the outside, it is possible to prevent the movement of the game ball from being followed by the eye as soon as the game ball enters the auxiliary passage. In particular, in a configuration in which the game ball returns to the game area after passing through the auxiliary passage, a configuration in which the player can continuously grasp the movement of the game ball makes it possible to enter the auxiliary passage and be invisible once. The game ball can be configured so as not to cause a sense of discomfort that suddenly returns to the game area.

Feature A18. The guiding means includes
Incoming blocking means for preventing the game ball flowing down toward the guiding means from entering the inside of the guiding means (left standing wall 181c, 181h, right standing wall 181d, right standing wall 252 and left standing wall 261). , Standing wall 352),
Rotating means (rotating body) provided with taking-in means (recessed parts 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, blade members 343) that are rotatable and capable of taking and holding game balls in the guiding means. 183, 230, 340, 440),
Rotation control means (function for executing the processing of step S206 in the main CPU 63, adjustment drive unit 184) to convey the game ball taken into the guidance means by rotating the rotation means;
With
The entry preventing means includes a take-in opening (take-in port 185) as an opening capable of taking the game ball that has reached the guide portion into the guide means,
The discharge means discharges the game ball that is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means at the intake opening so that the game ball enters the auxiliary passage. This includes an avoiding means (a first front surface 188b, a second front surface 189b, a third front surface 190b, a fourth front surface 191b, and a right standing wall 181d) for avoiding the game ball from being caught. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A17.

  According to feature A18, by discharging the game ball that is in contact with the rotation means and the entry prevention means at the take-in opening so that the game ball enters the auxiliary passage, A game ball can be prevented from being caught and stopped. Further, by avoiding pinching of game balls, it is possible to reduce the maintenance burden that must be performed by the manager of the game hall.

  Feature A19. The avoiding means, when the rotating means rotates with respect to a game ball that is in contact with both the rotating means and the entry preventing means at the intake opening, The gaming machine according to Feature A18, wherein a force toward the entrance is applied.

  According to the feature A19, when the rotating means rotates, the state where the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the entry preventing means is eliminated at the intake opening. For this reason, a dedicated configuration for avoiding pinching of game balls is not required. As a result, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed by avoiding complication of the configuration, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the guiding means can be ensured by avoiding the enlargement of the guiding means.

  Feature A20. The avoiding means is means for applying a force including a downward component to the game ball when the game ball is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry preventing means (front surface 188b). A gaming machine according to Feature A18 or A19, characterized in that it has a slope of ˜191b).

  According to the feature A20, a force having a downward component is applied to the game ball that is in contact with both the rotation unit and the entry prevention unit. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball that is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means is ejected upward and the flow of the upstream game ball is disturbed.

Feature A21. The discharge means includes a passage entrance (passage entrance 171) as an opening that allows a game ball to enter the auxiliary passage.
The take-in means includes means (inclinations of the inner walls of the recesses 183b to 183e) for preventing the game ball taken into the guide means by the take-in means from moving toward the entrance for the passage. The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A20, wherein:

  According to the feature A21, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball taken in by the take-in means is introduced into the auxiliary passage from the passage entrance before reaching the entrance portion. Thereby, it can suppress that the number of game balls induced | guided | derived to a ball entrance part by a guidance means decreases.

Feature A22. The guiding means includes
An intake opening (intake port 262) that allows a game ball flowing down toward the guide means to enter the inside of the guide means;
Opening partition means (upper right standing wall 252 and left standing wall 261) partitioning the intake opening;
Rotating means (rotating bodies 230, 340) that is rotatable and includes conveying means (step surfaces 241a to 244a, blade members 343) for conveying a game ball taken into the guiding means inside the guiding means. )When,
Rotation control means (function for executing the processing of step S206 in the main CPU 63, adjustment drive unit 184) to convey the game ball taken into the guidance means by rotating the rotation means;
The game ball is provided around the take-in opening and deformed when the game ball comes into contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means at the take-up opening. Deformation means (an upper right standing wall 252, a blade member 343, rotating shafts 254, 344) that makes it possible to release a force to pinch
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, comprising:

  According to the feature A22, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is caught between the rotating means and the opening partitioning means and stopped due to deformation of the take-in permission means around the take-in opening.

  Feature A23. The deformation means includes means (upper right standing wall 252 and rotating shaft 254) that allow the force applied to the opening partition means to escape by temporarily displacing the opening partition means to a predetermined position. The gaming machine according to Feature A22, wherein:

  According to the feature A23, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotation means and the opening partition means, and the game ball is pushed toward the opening partition means as the rotation means rotates, When the partition means is temporarily displaced to a predetermined position, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball is caught and stopped.

  Feature A24. The deformation means includes means (blade member 343, rotation shaft 344) that allows a force applied to the rotation means to escape by temporarily displacing a part of the rotation means to a specific position. The gaming machine according to Feature A22 or A23, wherein:

  According to feature A24, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening section means, and a force is applied to the rotating means and the opening section means as the rotating means rotates. In addition, a situation in which a part of the rotating means is temporarily displaced to a specific position and the force to pinch the game ball is released to avoid the game ball from being pinched and stopped.

Feature A25. The guiding means includes
Rotating means (rotating body) provided with taking-in means (recessed parts 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, blade members 343) that are rotatable and capable of taking and holding game balls in the guiding means. 183, 230, 340, 440),
Rotation control means (function for executing the processing of step S206 in the main CPU 63, adjustment drive unit 184) to convey the game ball taken into the guidance means by rotating the rotation means;
Release for releasing the game ball transported by the take-in means toward the entrance part at a timing before the timing at which the up-and-down moving direction of the take-in means is switched from the downward direction to the upward direction Means (discharge ports 256, 621);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A24, comprising:

  According to feature A25, in the case of a configuration in which the game ball transported by the take-in means is released at the timing when the up-and-down moving direction of the take-in means switches from the lower direction to the upper direction, the game ball in the release means When the release timing of the game is delayed, there is a possibility that the game ball being conveyed by the taking-in means starts to rise in the guiding means. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which the game ball transported by the take-in means is discharged at a timing before the timing at which the up-and-down moving direction of the take-in means is switched from the lower direction to the upper direction, It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball will rise in the guiding means when the release timing of the ball is delayed.

Feature A26. The guiding means prevents the game ball taken into the guiding means and being transported by the taking means from dropping downward and being thrown out of the guiding means by the rotation of the rotating means. Fall prevention means (left standing wall 181h, right standing wall 181d),
The discharge means is a discharge opening (discharge port) provided in the drop prevention means so that a game ball being conveyed in contact with the drop prevention means is discharged toward the outside of the guide means. 621), the gaming machine according to Feature A25.

  According to the feature A26, the game ball is transported in contact with the fall prevention means, and is released toward the outside of the guiding means when it reaches the discharge opening. Since the position of the discharge opening in the fall prevention means is fixed, the position at which the game ball is discharged from the guiding means can be the same each time. In addition, since the timing at which the rotating means guides the game ball to the discharge opening is determined according to the rotation mode of the rotating means, the timing at which the gaming ball is released from the guiding means can be set at the design stage.

  Feature A27. The game machine according to Feature A26, wherein the discharge opening has a discharge direction of the game ball discharged from the discharge opening at a rim of the discharge opening as a direction toward the ball entry portion.

  According to the feature A27, when the game ball is released from the release opening, the game ball is released toward the entrance ball portion by contacting the edge of the release opening. By fixing the position at which the game ball is released from the guiding means and the direction in which the game ball is released, the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means reaches the entrance portion can be increased.

  Feature A28. The discharge means is a direction changing means (discharge protrusion 181e, discharge position for changing the movement direction of the game ball that has reached the discharge position to the movement direction for discharge at the discharge position for discharging the game ball in the guide means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A25 to A27, comprising a discharge protruding end 263a).

  According to feature A28, the direction changing means changes the movement direction of the game ball at the release position to the movement direction for releasing the game ball, so that the game ball is not released from the release means. Passing through can be suppressed. Thereby, it can suppress that the game ball which was not discharge | released in the discharge | release position raises the inside of a guidance means.

Feature A29. The direction changing means protrudes to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the game area in a manner that allows contact with the game ball guided by the rotation means,
The gaming machine according to Feature A28, wherein the rotating means includes contact avoiding means (collision avoiding groove 192) for avoiding contact with the projecting direction changing means.

  According to the feature A29, the moving direction of the game ball is changed at the discharge position by contacting the game ball guided to the rotation unit without hindering the rotation of the rotation unit, thereby promoting the release of the game ball. be able to.

  Feature A30. The direction changing means includes means (right discharge side surface 181g) for guiding a game ball that has come into contact with the direction changing means at the discharge position toward the entrance portion, or the feature A28 or A gaming machine according to A29.

  According to the feature A30, when the release direction of the game ball is directed to the entrance portion at the release position, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball released from the guiding unit at the release position reaches the entrance portion. .

Feature A31. The guiding means includes
Direction defining means (guide passage 545) for defining the direction in which the game ball is released toward the entrance portion;
The direction defining means is located upstream in the flow direction of the game ball in the direction defining means, and when it is in an open state, the game ball can enter the direction defining means and is in a closed state. Opening / closing means (adjustment unit 546) that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter by this,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A30, comprising:

  According to the feature A31, by simplifying the configuration of the guide means, the volume of the guide means in the game area can be suppressed. Thereby, the choice of the place which arrange | positions a guidance means in a game area can be increased, and the freedom degree of design can be raised.

Feature A32. The guiding means emits a game ball toward the ball-entry part,
The course adjusting means includes a case where the game ball is allowed to flow toward the entrance portion and a case where the game ball is allowed to flow toward the entrance portion where the game ball released from the guide means is directed toward the entrance portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A31, wherein (electric nail 560) is provided.

  According to the feature A32, a part of the game ball released from the guiding means toward the entrance portion is detached from the entrance portion. By making an uncertain element whether or not the game ball released from the guide means enters the entrance part, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guide means is one of the concerns of the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball around the guiding means and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A33. The course adjusting means is
Change execution means (electric nail 560) for changing the course of the game ball when it comes into contact with the game ball;
The change execution means is moved so that the game ball released from the guide means comes into contact with the change execution means, and the change is made so that the game ball released from the guide means does not come into contact with the change execution means. A course adjustment drive means (nail drive portion 560a) capable of moving the execution means;
The gaming machine according to Feature A32, further comprising:

  According to the feature A33, the volume occupied by the course adjusting means is made by a simple configuration that creates a state in which the game ball can flow toward the entrance part and a state incapable of flowing by moving the change execution means. Can be suppressed and the degree of freedom of design can be increased.

Feature A34. The guiding means includes
Means (first support surface 241, second support surface 242, third support surface 243) for discharging the game balls so that the released game balls come into contact with the course adjusting means;
Means (fourth support surface 244) for releasing the game ball so that the released game ball does not come into contact with the course adjustment means;
The gaming machine according to Feature A32 or A33, comprising:

  According to the feature A34, the guide means releases the game ball in a plurality of modes, thereby generating a game ball that is released from the guide means and enters the entrance part and a game ball that does not enter. be able to. Further, in the guiding means, the game ball released from the guiding means enters the ball by making the rate of occurrence of the releasing mode in which the released game ball contacts the course adjusting means and the releasing mode in which the gaming ball is not in contact constant. It is possible to make the ratio of entering the club and the ratio of not entering the club closer to the ratio set in the design stage.

Feature A35. The guiding means emits a game ball toward the ball-entry part,
Any of the features A1 to A34, wherein the entrance portion is provided in the game area at a position separated from the position at which the release of the game ball is started by the guiding means by a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature A35, the game ball can pass between the position where the release of the game ball is started by the guiding means and the entrance portion. For this reason, there is a possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means does not enter the entrance portion. By making an uncertain element whether or not the game ball released from the guide means enters the entrance part, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guide means is one of the concerns of the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball around the guiding means and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A36. The guide means causes the game ball to reach the entrance part by releasing the game ball from a predetermined release start position in a predetermined release direction,
The entrance portion has an inclined opening substantially orthogonal to the moving direction at the height position of the game ball discharged from the guiding means and flowing down to the height position of the entrance portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A35.

  According to the feature A36, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball that has been released from the guiding means and has reached the entrance portion enters the entrance portion without coming into contact with the edge of the entrance portion. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means collides with the edge of the entrance portion and the entrance timing is shifted or deviated from the entrance portion.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A36, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group A, the following problems can be solved.

  As game machines, pachinko machines and slot machines are known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a lottery using numerical information is performed when a predetermined lottery condition is established, and a privilege is given to a player according to the lottery result.

  For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball enters a ball entering part provided in the game area, numerical information is acquired from an updating unit that updates numerical information for lottery, and the acquired numerical information is It is determined whether or not the winning information is supported. There is also known a configuration in which numerical information is acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and a specific effect or notification is performed based on the result of a lottery performed using the numerical information.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, novel game contents are required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A game ball that has reached the guiding portion (near the loading port 185, near the loading port 262, above the adjusting mechanisms 330 and 430, near the adjusting unit 546) at the inducible timing (timing that is in the taking-in permitted state) Guiding means (adjustment mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) capable of guiding toward the first through gate 35 and the first working ports 33, 581),
Discharging means (peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191) for discharging the game ball that has reached the guiding portion at a timing different from the guideable timing to a region different from the predetermined region;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, it is possible to prevent the game balls that have not been guided from staying in the vicinity of the guide unit by discharging the game balls that have reached the guide unit at a timing different from the guideable timing. As a result, the vicinity of the guiding unit can be kept in a state in which the game ball that has reached the guiding unit at the guideable timing is easily guided.

  Feature B2. The discharging means includes means (peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191) for discharging the game ball that has reached the guiding portion at a timing different from the guideable timing to the outside of the guiding means. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, characterized by the above.

  According to the feature B2, the game ball that has reached the guide unit at a timing different from the guideable timing is discharged to the outside of the guide unit by the guide unit, thereby suppressing the game ball from staying in the vicinity of the guide unit. be able to. Thereby, in a guidance part, possibility that guidance to the predetermined field of a game ball which is a guidance object will be prevented by a game ball which is not a guidance object can be reduced.

Feature B3. The discharging means is
A space in which a game ball can flow down, and is provided in the game area (game area PA) on the left and right sides of the flow down spaces (adjustment mechanisms 180, 430, 530, and 620) provided around the guiding means. Space, a space provided to the left of the adjustment mechanism 220),
The game area is provided in the game area with an interval that allows the game ball guided to the guide part to flow down to the flow-down space at a timing different from the guideable timing with the guide means. , Ball guide means (nail 24b, left guide nail 291, right guide nail 292, downstream guide nail 371, guide nail 472) for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area toward the guide portion;
The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or B2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B3, a configuration in which the game ball guided by the guide unit and not taken into the guide means flows down the downstream space to reduce the possibility that the game ball stays in the vicinity of the guide unit. can do. Further, since the game sphere can be guided to the guiding portion by the ball guiding means, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game sphere guided by the guiding means toward the predetermined area is insufficient.

  Feature B4. Any of the features B1 to B3, wherein the discharging means includes an auxiliary passage (escape passage 172) into which a game ball that has reached the guide portion at a timing different from the guideable timing can enter. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature B4, the game ball that has reached the guide unit at a timing different from the guideable timing is moved to another place by the auxiliary passage, so that it reaches the guide unit and moves to another place. While avoiding a game ball in the middle of a collision with another game ball flowing down the game area, it is possible to avoid a game ball that has reached the guide part from staying around the guide part.

Feature B5. The rear boundary of the game area (game area PA) is defined by plate-shaped area defining means (game boards 24, 610),
The game machine according to Feature B4, wherein the auxiliary passage allows a game ball to pass behind the front surface of the area defining means.

  According to the feature B5, the member that partitions the auxiliary passage is configured such that the game ball that has reached the guiding portion at a timing different from the guideable timing is discharged backward from the front surface of the area defining means. Can be prevented from colliding with other game balls flowing down the game area and disturbing the course of the game balls.

  Feature B6. The auxiliary passage includes a passage outlet (passage outlet 173) for discharging the game ball flowing down the auxiliary passage toward the game area in front of the area defining means. Game machines.

  According to the feature B6, in the configuration in which the game ball that has entered the auxiliary passage does not return to the game area, there is a possibility that the game ball flowing down the downstream of the guiding means is insufficient. In contrast, by adopting a configuration in which the game balls that have flowed down the auxiliary passage return to the game area from the exit for the passage, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of game balls that flow down the downstream of the guiding means will decrease.

  Feature B7. The game area is prevented from colliding with the game balls discharged from the passage exit toward the game area, from the upstream of the passage exit. The game machine according to Feature B6, wherein a collision prevention means (exit roof 174) is provided.

  According to the feature B7, the game ball which is going to return to the game area from the exit for the passage collides with the game ball flowing down from the upstream of the exit for the passage in the game area, and is returned to the auxiliary passage again. Can be prevented.

  Feature B8. The game machine according to any one of features B4 to B7, wherein the movement of the game ball passing through the auxiliary passage is visible from the outside.

  According to the feature B8, by making the movement of the game ball in the auxiliary passage visible from the outside, it is possible to avoid the movement of the game ball from being tracked by the eye as soon as the game ball enters the auxiliary passage. In particular, in a configuration in which the game ball returns to the game area after passing through the auxiliary passage, a configuration in which the player can continuously grasp the movement of the game ball makes it possible to enter the auxiliary passage and be invisible once. The game ball can be configured so as not to cause a sense of discomfort that suddenly returns to the game area.

Feature B9. The guiding means includes
Incoming blocking means for preventing the game ball flowing down toward the guiding means from entering the inside of the guiding means (left standing wall 181c, 181h, right standing wall 181d, right standing wall 252 and left standing wall 261). , Standing wall 352),
Rotating means (rotating body) provided with taking-in means (recessed parts 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, blade members 343) that are rotatable and capable of taking and holding game balls in the guiding means. 183, 230, 340, 440),
Rotation control means (function for executing the processing of step S206 in the main CPU 63, adjustment drive unit 184) to convey the game ball taken into the guidance means by rotating the rotation means;
With
The entry preventing means includes a take-in opening (take-in port 185) as an opening capable of taking the game ball that has reached the guide portion into the guide means,
The discharge means discharges the game ball that is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means in the intake opening to an area different from the predetermined area. Characterized by comprising avoidance means (first front surface 188b, second front surface 189b, third front surface 190b, fourth front surface 191b, right upright wall 181d) to avoid being caught. A gaming machine according to any one of B8.

  According to the feature B9, the game ball that is in contact with the rotation unit and the entry prevention unit at the take-in opening is discharged into an area different from the predetermined area, whereby the game ball is sandwiched. Can be avoided. Further, by avoiding pinching of game balls, it is possible to reduce the maintenance burden that must be performed by the manager of the game hall.

  Feature B10. The avoiding means, when the rotating means is rotated with respect to a game ball that is in contact with both the rotating means and the entry preventing means at the intake opening, The game machine according to Feature B9, wherein force is applied to different areas.

  According to the feature B10, when the rotation unit rotates, the state where the game ball is in contact with both the rotation unit and the entry prevention unit is eliminated at the intake opening. For this reason, a dedicated configuration for avoiding pinching of game balls is not required. As a result, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed by avoiding complication of the configuration, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the guiding means can be ensured by avoiding the enlargement of the guiding means.

  Feature B11. The avoiding means is means for applying a force including a downward component to the game ball when the game ball is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry preventing means (front surface 188b). The game machine according to Feature B9 or B10, wherein the game machine has a slope of ˜191b).

  According to the feature B11, a force having a downward component is applied to the game ball that is in contact with both the rotating means and the entry preventing means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball that is in contact with both the rotation means and the entry prevention means is ejected upward and the flow of the upstream game ball is disturbed.

Feature B12. The discharging means is
An auxiliary passage (escape passage 172) in which a game ball that has reached the guide portion at a timing different from the guideable timing can enter,
A passage entrance (passage entrance 171) that is an opening that allows a game ball to enter the auxiliary passage;
With
The take-in means includes means (inclinations of the inner walls of the recesses 183b to 183e) for preventing the game ball taken into the guide means by the take-in means from moving toward the entrance for the passage. The gaming machine according to any one of features B9 to B11, wherein:

  According to the feature B12, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball taken in by the take-in means is introduced into the auxiliary passage from the passage entrance before reaching the predetermined area. Thereby, it can suppress that the number of the game balls induced | guided | derived to a predetermined area | region by a guidance means decreases.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B12, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the above-described feature group B, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine includes a game board that defines a game area in which game balls flow down, and nails, windmills, and the like are provided on the game board in order to properly distribute the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area. These various members are arranged. In addition, the game board is provided with an opening for a game ball to be paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. The game balls launched from the game ball launching device flow down the game area while making contact with various members, and when the game balls enter the general prize opening, special electric prize winning device, operation opening, etc., a predetermined number of A game ball is paid out to a player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the behavior of the game ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Guiding means (adjustment mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 620) capable of guiding the game ball toward a predetermined area (first through gate 35, first working port 33, 581),
The guiding means includes
Rotating means (rotating body) provided with taking-in means (recessed parts 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, blade members 343) that are rotatable and capable of taking and holding game balls in the guiding means. 183, 230, 340, 440),
Rotation control means (function for executing the processing of step S206 in the main CPU 63, adjustment drive unit 184) to convey the game ball taken into the guidance means by rotating the rotation means;
Release means for releasing the game ball transported by the take-in means toward the predetermined area at a timing before the timing at which the up-and-down moving direction of the take-in means is switched from the lower direction to the upper direction. (Discharge ports 256 and 621),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, in the case of a configuration in which the game ball transported by the take-in means is released at a timing when the up-and-down moving direction of the take-in means is switched from the lower direction to the upper direction, the game ball in the release means When the release timing of the game is delayed, there is a possibility that the game ball being conveyed by the taking-in means starts to rise in the guiding means. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which the game ball transported by the take-in means is discharged at a timing before the timing at which the up-and-down moving direction of the take-in means is switched from the lower direction to the upper direction, It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball will rise in the guiding means when the release timing of the ball is delayed.

Feature C2. The guiding means prevents the game ball taken into the guiding means and being transported by the taking means from dropping downward and being thrown out of the guiding means by the rotation of the rotating means. Fall prevention means (left standing wall 181h, right standing wall 181d),
The discharge means is a discharge opening (discharge port) provided in the drop prevention means so that a game ball being conveyed in contact with the drop prevention means is discharged toward the outside of the guide means. 621). The gaming machine according to Feature C1,

  According to the feature C2, the game ball is transported in contact with the fall prevention means, and is released toward the outside of the guiding means when it reaches the discharge opening. Since the position of the discharge opening in the fall prevention means is fixed, the position at which the game ball is discharged from the guiding means can be the same each time. In addition, since the timing at which the rotating means guides the game ball to the discharge opening is determined according to the rotation mode of the rotating means, the timing at which the gaming ball is released from the guiding means can be set at the design stage.

  Feature C3. The game machine according to Feature C2, wherein the discharge opening has a discharge direction of a game ball discharged from the discharge opening toward the predetermined region at an edge of the discharge opening.

  According to the feature C3, when the game ball is released from the release opening, the game ball is released toward a predetermined region by contacting the edge of the release opening. By fixing the position where the game ball is released from the guiding means and the direction in which the game ball is released, the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means reaches a predetermined region can be increased.

Feature C4. The predetermined area is provided with a ball entrance portion (first through gate 35, first operation port 33, 581) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter.
Provided with a privilege granting means (a function for executing the processing of step S705 and step S706 in the main CPU 63) so that a privilege is granted on at least one condition that a game ball has entered the pitching unit,
The release direction is a direction that allows a game ball released from the release opening to enter the entrance portion without colliding with an edge of the entrance portion. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature C4, when the game ball released from the discharge opening collides with the edge of the entrance portion, a shift occurs in the timing at which the game ball enters the entrance portion, or the game ball moves from the entrance portion. The possibility of coming off can be suppressed.

  Feature C5. The discharge means is a direction changing means (discharge protrusion 181e, discharge) that changes the movement direction of the game ball that has reached the discharge position to the movement direction for discharge at the discharge position where the guide means discharges the game ball. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the game machine has a projecting end 263a).

  According to the feature C5, since the direction changing means changes the moving direction of the game ball to the moving direction for releasing the game ball at the release position, the release position is changed without releasing the game ball from the releasing means. Passing through can be suppressed. Thereby, it can suppress that the game ball which was not discharge | released in the discharge | release position raises the inside of a guidance means.

Feature C6. The direction changing means protrudes to a midway position in the front-rear direction of the game area (game area PA) in a manner that allows contact with the game ball guided by the rotation means,
The gaming machine according to Feature C5, wherein the rotating means includes contact avoiding means (collision avoiding groove 192) for avoiding contact with the projecting direction changing means.

  According to the feature C6, the game ball guided to the rotation means is brought into contact with the rotation means without disturbing the rotation of the rotation means, thereby changing the moving direction of the game ball at the release position and promoting the release of the game ball. be able to.

  Feature C7. The direction changing means includes means (a right side surface for discharge 181g) for guiding the game ball in contact with the direction changing means at the discharge position toward the predetermined area (C5 or C6). The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature C7, since the release direction of the game ball is directed to the predetermined area at the release position, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball released from the guiding unit at the release position reaches the entrance part.

  Feature C8. The course adjusting means (electrically operated) includes a case where the game ball discharged from the guide means is allowed to flow toward the predetermined area and a case where the game ball is not allowed to flow at the midway position toward the predetermined area. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein a nail 560) is provided.

  According to the feature C8, a part of the game ball released from the guiding means toward the predetermined area is out of the predetermined area. By making an uncertain element whether or not the game ball released from the guiding means enters the predetermined area, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guiding means is one of the concerns of the player. The degree of attention to the movement of the game ball in the vicinity of the guiding means can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature C9. The course adjusting means is
Change execution means (electric nail 560) for changing the course of the game ball when it comes into contact with the game ball;
The change execution means is moved so that the game ball released from the guide means comes into contact with the change execution means, and the change is made so that the game ball released from the guide means does not come into contact with the change execution means. A course adjustment drive means (nail drive portion 560a) capable of moving the execution means;
The gaming machine according to Feature C8, comprising:

  According to the feature C9, the volume occupied by the course adjusting unit is reduced by moving the change execution unit to create a simple configuration that creates a state where the game ball can flow toward the predetermined area and a state where the game ball cannot flow down. It can be suppressed and the degree of freedom of design can be increased.

Feature C10. The guiding means includes
Means (first support surface 241, second support surface 242, third support surface 243) for discharging the game balls so that the released game balls come into contact with the course adjusting means;
Means (fourth support surface 244) for releasing the game ball so that the released game ball does not come into contact with the course adjustment means;
A gaming machine according to Feature C8 or C9, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C10, the guide means releases the game ball in a plurality of modes, thereby generating a game ball that is released from the guide means and enters the predetermined area and a game ball that does not enter. Can do. Further, in the guiding means, the ratio of the release mode in which the released game sphere contacts the course adjusting unit and the release mode in which the game sphere does not contact is made constant so that the game sphere released from the guide unit is in a predetermined area. It is possible to make the ratio of entering the ball and the ratio of not entering the ball close to the ratio set in the design stage.

Feature C11. The guiding means emits a game ball toward the predetermined area,
The predetermined area is provided in the game area (game area PA) at a position separated from the position at which the release of the game ball is started by the guide means by a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of C10.

  According to the feature C11, the game ball can pass between the position where the release of the game ball is started by the guiding means and the predetermined area. For this reason, there is a possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means does not enter the predetermined area. By making an uncertain element whether or not the game ball released from the guiding means enters the predetermined area, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guiding means is one of the concerns of the player. The degree of attention to the movement of the game ball in the vicinity of the guiding means can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature C12. A game ball that flows down the game area (game area PA) can enter the predetermined area, and one of the conditions for granting a privilege is satisfied when the game ball enters the game area. (First through gate 35, first working port 33, 581) are provided,
The guide means causes the game ball to reach the entrance part by releasing the game ball from a predetermined release start position in a predetermined release direction,
The entrance portion has an inclined opening substantially orthogonal to the moving direction at the height position of the game ball discharged from the guiding means and flowing down to the height position of the entrance portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11.

  According to the feature C12, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball that has been released from the guiding means and has reached the entrance part enters the entrance part without contacting the edge of the entrance part. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means collides with the edge of the entrance portion and the entrance timing is shifted or deviated from the entrance portion.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C12, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group C, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine includes a game board that defines a game area in which game balls flow down, and nails, windmills, and the like are provided on the game board in order to properly distribute the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area. These various members are arranged. In addition, the game board is provided with an opening for a game ball to be paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. The game balls launched from the game ball launching device flow down the game area while making contact with various members, and when the game balls enter the general prize opening, special electric prize winning device, operation opening, etc., a predetermined number of A game ball is paid out to a player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the behavior of the game ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Guiding means (adjustment mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 620) capable of guiding the game ball toward a predetermined area (first through gate 35, first working port 33, 581),
The guiding means includes
An intake opening (intake port 262) that allows a game ball flowing down toward the guide means to enter the inside of the guide means;
Opening partition means (upper right standing wall 252 and left standing wall 261) partitioning the intake opening;
Rotating means (rotating bodies 230, 340) that is rotatable and includes conveying means (step surfaces 241a to 244a, blade members 343) for conveying a game ball taken into the guiding means inside the guiding means. )When,
Rotation control means (function for executing the processing of step S206 in the main CPU 63, adjustment drive unit 184) to convey the game ball taken into the guidance means by rotating the rotation means;
The game ball is provided around the take-in opening and deformed when the game ball comes into contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means at the take-up opening. Deformation means (an upper right standing wall 252, a blade member 343, rotating shafts 254, 344) that makes it possible to release a force to pinch
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, by deforming the deformation means around the intake opening, the game ball can be guided to the predetermined area while avoiding the situation where the game ball is caught between the rotation means and the opening partition means and stopped. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught and the game from being interrupted, or the need for troubleshooting to remove the inserted game ball can be prevented.

  Feature D2. The deformation means includes means (upper right standing wall 252 and rotating shaft 254) that allow the force applied to the opening partition means to escape by temporarily displacing the opening partition means to a predetermined position. A gaming machine according to Feature D1, characterized in that

  According to the feature D2, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotation means and the opening partition means, and the game ball is pushed toward the opening partition means as the rotation means rotates, When the partition means is temporarily displaced to a predetermined position, it is possible to avoid a situation where the game ball is caught and stopped.

  Feature D3. The deformation means includes means (blade member 343, rotation shaft 344) that allows a force applied to the rotation means to escape by temporarily displacing a part of the rotation means to a specific position. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized in that

  According to the feature D3, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening section means, and a force is applied to the rotating means and the opening section means as the rotating means rotates. In addition, a situation in which a part of the rotating means is temporarily displaced to a specific position and the force to pinch the game ball is released to avoid the game ball from being pinched and stopped.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D3, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group D, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine includes a game board that defines a game area in which game balls flow down, and nails, windmills, and the like are provided on the game board in order to properly distribute the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area. These various members are arranged. In addition, the game board is provided with an opening for a game ball to be paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. The game balls launched from the game ball launching device flow down the game area while making contact with various members, and when the game balls enter the general prize opening, special electric prize winning device, operation opening, etc., a predetermined number of A game ball is paid out to a player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the behavior of the game ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A ball entry part (first through gate 35) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter;
Guidance means (adjustment mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) for guiding the game ball toward the ball-entrance unit;
With
The guide means includes discharge means (discharge ports 256 and 621) for discharging a game ball toward the entrance portion,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the ball entry portion is provided at a position separated from the discharge means by a distance equal to or greater than a diameter of the game ball.

  According to the feature E1, it is necessary for the game ball released from the release means to flow down a distance longer than the diameter of the game ball before entering the ball entry part. For this reason, both the case where the game ball enters the entrance part and the case where it does not enter can occur depending on the release direction and release speed of the game ball released from the release means. When all of the game balls released from the release means enter the entrance part, the player may lose interest in the whereabouts of the game balls after the release. On the other hand, by making an uncertain element whether or not the game ball released from the release means enters the entrance part, the player's attention is drawn to the whereabouts of the released game ball, and the game Can be improved.

Feature E2. The guiding means includes
Rotating means (rotating body) provided with taking-in means (recessed parts 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, blade members 343) that are rotatable and capable of taking and holding game balls in the guiding means. 183, 230, 340, 440),
Rotation control means (function for executing the processing of step S206 in the main CPU 63, adjustment drive unit 184) to convey the game ball taken into the guidance means by rotating the rotation means;
A fall prevention means (left side) that prevents the game ball taken into the guidance means and carried by the take-in means from dropping downward and being thrown out of the guidance means by the rotation of the rotation means. Standing wall 181h, right standing wall 181d),
With
The discharge means is a discharge opening (discharge port) provided in the drop prevention means so that a game ball being conveyed in contact with the drop prevention means is discharged toward the outside of the guide means. 621). The gaming machine according to Feature E1,

  According to the feature E2, the game ball is transported in contact with the fall prevention means, and is released toward the outside of the guiding means when it reaches the discharge opening. Since the position of the discharge opening in the fall prevention means is fixed, the position at which the game ball is discharged from the guiding means can be the same each time. In addition, since the timing at which the rotating means guides the game ball to the discharge opening is determined according to the rotation mode of the rotating means, the timing at which the gaming ball is released from the guiding means can be set at the design stage.

  Feature E3. The gaming machine according to Feature E2, wherein the discharge opening has a discharge direction of a game ball discharged from the discharge opening at a rim of the discharge opening as a direction toward the ball entry portion.

  According to the feature E3, when the game ball is released from the discharge opening, the game ball is discharged toward the ball entry portion by contacting the edge of the discharge opening. By fixing the position at which the game ball is released from the guiding means and the direction in which the game ball is released, the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means reaches the entrance portion can be increased.

  Feature E4. The discharge means is a direction changing means (discharge protrusion 181e, discharge position for changing the movement direction of the game ball that has reached the discharge position to the movement direction for discharge at the discharge position for discharging the game ball in the guide means. The gaming machine according to the feature E2 or E3, characterized in that the gaming machine has a discharge protruding end 263a).

  According to the feature E4, the direction changing means changes the moving direction of the game ball at the release position to the movement direction for releasing the game ball, so that the game ball is not released from the release means. Passing through can be suppressed.

Feature E5. The direction changing means protrudes to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the game area in a manner that allows contact with the game ball guided by the rotation means,
The gaming machine according to Feature E4, wherein the rotating means includes contact avoiding means (collision avoiding groove 192) for avoiding contact with the projecting direction changing means.

  According to the feature E5, the moving direction of the game ball is changed at the discharge position by contacting the game ball guided to the rotation unit without hindering the rotation of the rotation unit, thereby promoting the release of the game ball. be able to.

  Feature E6. The direction changing means includes means (right side surface for discharge 181g) for guiding the game ball that has come into contact with the direction changing means at the discharge position toward the entrance portion, or the feature E4 or A gaming machine according to E5.

  According to the feature E6, since the release direction of the game ball at the release position is directed to the entrance part, the probability that the game ball released from the guiding unit at the release position reaches the entrance part can be increased. .

Feature E7. The discharge means includes a direction defining means (guide passage 545) for defining a game ball discharge direction toward the entrance portion,
The guiding means is located upstream in the flow direction of the game ball in the direction defining means, and allows the game ball to enter the direction defining means by being in an open state, and is in a closed state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, further comprising: opening / closing means (adjustment unit 546) that makes it impossible for the gaming ball to enter.

  According to the feature E7, the volume of the guiding means occupying the game area can be reduced by using the simple guiding means including the direction defining means and the opening / closing means. Thereby, the choice of the place which arrange | positions a guidance means in a game area can be increased, and the freedom degree of design can be raised.

  Feature E8. In the game area, when the game ball released from the release means is allowed to flow down toward the entrance part, and when the game ball is allowed to flow toward the entrance part, The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, wherein a certain course adjusting means (electric nail 560) is provided.

  According to the feature E8, a part of the game ball released from the releasing means toward the entrance portion is detached from the entrance portion. By providing a course adjustment means that causes both the case where the game ball released from the release means enters the entrance part and the case where the game ball does not enter the entrance part, the game ball released from the release means enters the entrance part. Whether or not to enter the ball can be an uncertain factor.

Feature E9. The course adjusting means is
Change execution means (electric nail 560) for changing the course of the game ball when it comes into contact with the game ball;
The change execution unit is moved so that the game ball released from the release unit contacts the change execution unit, and the change is performed so that the game ball released from the release unit does not contact the change execution unit. A course adjustment drive means (nail drive portion 560a) capable of moving the execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature E8, comprising:

  According to the feature E9, the volume occupied by the course adjusting unit is obtained by moving the change execution unit to create a simple configuration that creates a state in which the game ball can flow toward the entrance part and a state in which the game ball cannot flow down. Can be suppressed and the degree of freedom of design can be increased.

Feature E10. The discharge means is
Means (first support surface 241, second support surface 242, third support surface 243) for discharging the game balls so that the released game balls come into contact with the course adjusting means;
Means (fourth support surface 244) for releasing the game ball so that the released game ball does not come into contact with the course adjustment means;
The gaming machine according to feature E8 or E9, wherein

  According to the feature E10, by having a configuration in which the release means releases the game ball in a plurality of ways, both the game ball that is released from the release means and enters the entrance part and the game ball that does not enter Can be generated. Further, in the release means, the game ball released from the release means enters the ball by making the ratio of the release mode in which the released game ball contacts the course adjusting means and the release mode in which the game ball is not in contact constant. It is possible to make the ratio of entering the club and the ratio of not entering the club closer to the ratio set in the design stage.

Feature E11. The release means is to release the game ball from a predetermined release start position toward a predetermined release direction, thereby causing the game ball to reach the entrance portion,
The entrance portion has an opening having an inclination substantially orthogonal to the moving direction at the height position of the game ball released from the release means and flowing down to the height position of the entrance portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10.

  According to the feature E11, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball that has been released from the release means and has reached the entrance part enters the entrance part without contacting the edge of the entrance part. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball released from the release means collides with the edge of the entrance part and the entrance timing is shifted or deviated from the entrance part.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E11, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group E, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine includes a game board that defines a game area in which game balls flow down, and nails, windmills, and the like are provided on the game board in order to properly distribute the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area. These various members are arranged. In addition, the game board is provided with an opening for a game ball to be paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. The game balls launched from the game ball launching device flow down the game area while making contact with various members, and when the game balls enter the general prize opening, special electric prize winning device, operation opening, etc., a predetermined number of A game ball is paid out to a player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the behavior of the game ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined entry means, specific storage execution means (execution detection processing in the main CPU 63) is performed so that information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the specific storage means (main RAM 65). Function)
A privilege for executing a process for giving a privilege to a player based on the fact that information corresponding to a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means A granting unit (a function for executing the process of step S219 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the process of step S1008 in the payout CPU 92);
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding thereto is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the sixteenth embodiment). Is executed in the main RAM 65), and predetermined information (first information) that enables the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of entry into the predetermined ball entry means to be specified by the game machine or a device outside the game machine. In the fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, history information, and in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter) is stored in the predetermined storage unit (first storage execution unit). In the fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, and in the sixteenth embodiment, steps S2902, S2905, and S in the main CPU 63 are used. 908, step S2912, step S2916, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2920 and step S2923).

  According to the feature F1, when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the specific storage means, and a privilege is given to the player when the information is stored in the specific storage means Is done. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number of balls entered or the frequency of the ball entry into the predetermined ball entry means. Predetermined information that can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering or the frequency of entering the predetermined ball entry means in the game machine. By using this managed information, it is possible to store and hold information. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the predetermined information does not trigger execution of a process for giving a privilege to a player.

  According to the feature F2, the predetermined information does not trigger the execution of the process for granting a privilege to the player, and the purpose is to appropriately manage the entrance mode of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means It is possible to store and hold predetermined information in an information form.

Feature F3. Specific entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area are provided,
The predetermined storage execution means is configured such that, when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means, storage of information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Specific information that enables the number of balls to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or F2, characterized in that measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

  According to the feature F3, not only predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined entry means but also specific information corresponding to the specific entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the manner of entering the game ball into the predetermined entrance means but also the manner of entering the game ball into the specific entrance means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the pitching frequency between the predetermined pitching means and the specific pitching means.

  Feature F4. All the entry means for discharging the entered game balls from the game area, including the predetermined entry means, are stored in the predetermined storage means for information corresponding to the occurrence of the entry of the game balls. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, which is a ball entry means.

  According to the feature F4, all the entry means for discharging the game balls from the game area are managed using information stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the entry frequency for any entry means is Can be managed using the information stored in the predetermined storage means. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means with respect to the number of game balls discharged from the game area using information stored in the predetermined storage means.

  Feature F5. 5. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to a timing at which a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

  According to the feature F5, since the information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined entry means is included in the predetermined information, the use of the predetermined information allows the game ball to enter the predetermined entry means. It becomes possible to grasp the entry history in detail.

  Feature F6. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein the predetermined information is count information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means.

  According to the feature F6, the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means, so that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means while suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information. Can be managed.

  Feature F7. The predetermined storage execution means is means for allowing the predetermined storage means to store information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means is in a predetermined situation (first operation). In the first to thirteenth embodiments, the function of executing steps S1404 and S1409 in the management-side CPU 112, in the fourteenth embodiment, the function of executing processing of step S2704 in the management-side CPU 112, and in the fifteenth embodiment, the management The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, further comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2803 in the side CPU 112).

  According to the feature F7, it is possible to manage the entrance mode of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation.

  Feature F8. Any of the features F1 to F7, comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature F8, it is possible to read information stored in the predetermined storage unit from the gaming machine and analyze the entrance mode of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry unit using the read information.

Feature F9. Program output means (function to execute the processing of step S1503 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
The game machine according to F8, wherein the external output means outputs the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine using the information output unit.

  According to the feature F9, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. As a result, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  Feature F10. Means for identifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the information stored in the predetermined storage means or the control program, and outputting information corresponding to the identification result (mainly) The game machine according to Feature F9, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S1502 in the side CPU 63.

  According to the feature F10, in the configuration in which the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside is used and the information stored in the predetermined storage unit is output to the outside, the information to be externally output is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, only necessary information can be read out even when the information output unit is also used.

Feature F11. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, comprising:

  According to the feature F11, the second control unit provided separately from the first control unit having the specific storage execution unit has the predetermined storage execution unit, so that the processing load of the first control unit is extremely increased. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described while avoiding this.

  Feature F12. The gaming machine according to F11, wherein the first control unit and the second control unit are provided on the same chip.

  According to the feature F12, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is prevented. It becomes possible to stop.

Feature F13. Specific entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area are provided,
The predetermined storage execution means is configured to cause the predetermined storage means to store information corresponding to a game ball entering the specific ball entry means, so that the game to the specific ball entry means is executed. Specific information that enables the number of balls to be entered or the frequency of entering the ball to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, In the seventeenth embodiment, numerical information measured by a counter) is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means includes
First transmission means for transmitting first information to the second control means using a first signal path when a game ball enters the predetermined entry means (first to seventh signals of the main CPU 63). Function to output either), and
Second transmitting means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when a game ball enters the specific entry means (the first to seventh signals of the main CPU 63). Function to output either), and
A gaming machine according to Feature F11 or F12, wherein

  According to the feature F13, not only predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined entry means but also specific information corresponding to the specific entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the manner of entering the game ball into the predetermined entrance means but also the manner of entering the game ball into the specific entrance means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the pitching frequency between the predetermined pitching means and the specific pitching means.

  Further, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means. The second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information by the second control means can be simplified.

  Feature F14. The first control means transmits, to the second control means using the third route, information for specifying that the second control means can specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present. (In the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the eighth embodiment, the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63. The gaming machine according to feature F13, further comprising a function of outputting any one of a medium signal, a high frequency support mode signal, and a door opening signal.

  According to the feature F14, it is possible to manage whether the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and the game ball entry mode into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. In addition, since the information for identification that can identify whether or not the predetermined situation is present is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the information for identification is transmitted to the second information by the second control means. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as two information.

  Feature F15. The first control means provides the second control means with identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined pitching means and the second information corresponds to the specific pitching means. The gaming machine according to Feature F13 or F14, comprising identification information transmitting means for transmitting (a function of executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature F15, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific entry means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, it is not necessary to previously store the correspondence relationship of these pieces of information in the second control unit. Thereby, the versatility of a 2nd control means can be improved.

  Feature F16. The gaming machine according to Feature F15, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

  According to feature F16, when supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball can enter the ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

  Feature F17. The identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. The feature F15 or F16, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature F17, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. Compared to the above, the communication configuration can be simplified.

  Feature F18. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined entry means and that the second information corresponds to the specific entry means. Any one of features F15 to F17, comprising: means for storing correspondence relation information to be stored in correspondence relation storage means (correspondence relation memory 116) (function for executing correspondence relation setting processing in the management side CPU 112) The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature F18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control unit and the ball entry unit is stored in the second control unit. As a result, information that enables the second control means to specify the ball entry means corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means every time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. There is no need to do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Feature F19. The first control means transmits third information enabling the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the eighth embodiment, the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63. A function to output any of a medium signal, a high frequency support mode signal, and a door open signal)
The second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present without receiving the identification information. F15 A gaming machine according to any one of F18.

  According to the feature F19, it is possible to manage whether the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and the game ball entry mode into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be specified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . As a result, the information form of the identification information can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Feature F20. The second control means has a receiving unit capable of receiving information from the first control means, more than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F13 to F19, wherein a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

  According to the feature F20, since the second control means is provided with more receiving units than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, Accordingly, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration related to the receiving unit. Therefore, the versatility of the second control means can be improved.

Feature F21. First external output means (management) that outputs information of a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the predetermined pitching means to a device outside the gaming machine Function for executing external output processing in the side CPU 112),
Second external output means (management) that outputs information of a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it possible to recognize that the specific entry means corresponds to the device outside the gaming machine Function for executing external output processing in the side CPU 112),
The gaming machine according to any one of features F13 to F20, comprising:

  According to the feature F21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and using the read information, the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means and the game ball entering the specific ball entry means. It is possible to specify the entrance mode. In addition, when the external output is performed, information on a combination of the predetermined information and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the predetermined pitching means is output to the outside, and the specific information corresponds to the specific pitching means. The information of the combination with the information that makes it possible to recognize that is being performed is output to the outside. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify each entrance mode using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

  Feature F22. Using the predetermined information, information calculating means (first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, first, and second) for calculating the mode information corresponding to the entering mode of the game balls in the game area in the predetermined period. In the fifteenth, sixteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing steps S1608, S1613 and S1617 in the management CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, the processing of steps S2008, S2013 and S2017 in the management CPU 112 In the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2202 in the management CPU 112, the function of executing the process of step S2402 in the management CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, and the management in the thirteenth embodiment. Step S2605 in the side CPU 112 is executed That function, the gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F21 in the seventeenth embodiment is characterized in that it comprises a function) for executing the process of step S3203 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature F22, the aspect information corresponding to the entry state of the game ball is calculated in the gaming machine using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information that is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

Feature F23. The predetermined storage execution means is means for causing the predetermined storage means to include information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means is in a predetermined situation (the first storage means) In the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing steps S1404 and S1409 in the management CPU 112, the function of executing the process of step S2704 in the management CPU 112 in the fourteenth embodiment, and the management side in the fifteenth embodiment A function of executing the process of step S2803 in the CPU 112),
The information calculation means is means for calculating the mode information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined situation (first to seventh, In the eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1608, step S1613, and step S1617 in the management CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, in the management CPU 112 A function for executing the processes of step S2008, step S2013 and step S2017, a function for executing the process of step S2202 in the management CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, and a process of step S2402 in the management CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment Function in the management CPU 112 in the thirteenth embodiment Function executing the processing in step S2605, the gaming machine according to the features F22, wherein in the seventeenth embodiment has a function) for executing the process of step S3203 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature F23, it is possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the entrance mode of the game ball by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation.

  Feature F24. Means (first to seventh, eighth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, first, etc.) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculating means; In the eighteenth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S1619. In the twelfth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S2205. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature F24, when the mode information is calculated, it is difficult to generate an event that the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit is erased and the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage unit. It becomes possible to make it.

  Feature F25. Even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation unit, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage unit is maintained. F22 Or the game machine as described in F23.

  According to the feature F25, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage unit, so that the aspect information is read out and the game ball enters When analyzing an aspect, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the aspect information.

  Feature F26. When the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is stopped, or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is started, The game machine according to any one of features F22 to F25, wherein the aspect information is calculated.

  According to the feature F26, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is stopped, the mode information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature F27. The information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation opportunity that can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of F26.

  According to the feature F27, since the mode information is calculated every time the calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature F28. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period in a situation where the game is not executed, and resumes the period measurement from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the period measurement is stopped The gaming machine according to any one of features F22 to F27, characterized by:

  According to the feature F28, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in a situation where the game is not being executed, the measurement for a predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude a situation in which a game is not being executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive aspect information in a situation in which a game is being executed.

  Feature F29. Features F22 to F28, comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature F29, it is possible to easily grasp the entering mode of the game ball by outputting the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine.

  Feature F30. The gaming machine according to Feature F29, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the mode information is output to a device outside the gaming machine.

  According to the feature F30, when not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, when the mode information is read and the entering mode of the game ball is analyzed, It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature F31. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the external output means;
With
The external output means outputs the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means. A gaming machine according to F30.

  According to the feature F31, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the external output unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. It is possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature F32. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs,
Result storage execution means (in the ninth embodiment, steps S2010, S2014 and S2018 in the management side CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment) which sequentially stores the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631). The gaming machine according to any one of features F22 to F31, including a function of executing the process of (in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112).

  According to the feature F32, the mode information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. Thereby, when managing the entrance mode of a game ball, it becomes possible to read several mode information collectively.

Feature F33. The result storage execution means includes
Means for determining whether or not the mode information is storage target information (function for executing the process of step S2203 in the management CPU 112);
Means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means when the aspect information is the storage target information (function for executing the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to Feature F32, comprising:

  According to the feature F33, when the mode information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage unit. Thereby, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for the calculation result storage means.

  Feature F34. The game according to Feature F32 or F33, wherein the result storage execution unit causes the calculation result storage unit to store information that can identify a time when the mode information is calculated, in association with the mode information. Machine.

  According to the feature F34, information that can specify the time when the mode information is calculated is attached to the mode information. Thereby, it becomes possible to analyze each aspect information, grasping | ascertaining the time when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature F35. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
With
The information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Any one of features F22 to F34, wherein Game machines.

  According to the feature F35, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the information calculation unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. Information can be calculated by the second control means.

  Feature F36. Provided with notification control means (function to execute the processes of steps S3205, S3207 and S3208 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light emitting unit 651) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features F22 to F35, wherein:

  According to the feature F36, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the entrance mode of the game ball without reading the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature F37. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to Feature F36, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

  According to the feature F37, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control unit and the notification unit.

Feature F38. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
With
The game machine according to F36 or F37, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

  According to the feature F38, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the predetermined storage unit separately from the first control unit, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to consolidate functions for executing notification corresponding to the first control means.

  Feature F39. The notification control unit controls the notification unit so that the first notification is executed when the aspect information is information of the first range, and when the aspect information is information of the second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features F36 to F38, wherein the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

  According to the feature F39, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification unit from becoming excessive, and to reduce the load for controlling the notification unit.

  Feature F40. Features F1 to F1, further comprising means for externally outputting corresponding information corresponding to a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (function of executing step S220 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of F39.

  According to the feature F40, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, corresponding information corresponding to the game ball is externally output, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to use the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means while easily grasping the number and frequency of game balls entering the predetermined entry means by using the correspondence information. It becomes possible to accurately grasp the number and frequency of game balls entering the ball means.

  Feature F41. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F40, wherein the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature F41, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F41, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and the main side in the sixteenth embodiment. The predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and numerical information measured by the counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is executed by the RAM 65). Predetermined storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, and in the sixteenth embodiment, the main CPU 63 Of step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920 and step S2923. And the ability to run the management),
Information calculation means (first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, eighteenth) for calculating aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the predetermined information. In the embodiment, the function of executing steps S1608, S1613, and S1617 in the management CPU 112, and the function of executing steps S2008, S2013, and S2017 in the management CPU 112 in the twelfth embodiment, In the present embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2202 in the management CPU 112, the function of executing the process of step S2402 in the management CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, and the process of step S2605 in the management CPU 112 in the thirteenth embodiment. 17th function And functions) for executing the process of step S3203 in the main side CPU63 in facilities form,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, when a predetermined event occurs, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the predetermined storage unit, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and appropriately manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is calculated in the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information that is the result of calculation using the predetermined information Become.

Feature G2. The predetermined storage executing means is means for causing the predetermined storage means to include information that can specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to thirteenth embodiments). The function of executing the processing of step S1204 and step S1209 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing processing of step S2704 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourteenth embodiment, and the processing of step S2803 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifteenth embodiment. Function to be executed)
The information calculation means is means for calculating the mode information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation (first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, first In the fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1608, step S1613 and step S1617 in the management side CPU 112, and in the twelfth embodiment, steps S2008, S2013 and step in the management side CPU 112. A function for executing the process of S2017, a function for executing the process of step S2202 in the management-side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2402 in the management-side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, and a thirteenth embodiment In the embodiment, step S2 in the management CPU 112 Ability to run the process 05, the gaming machine according to the features G1, characterized in that in the seventeenth embodiment has a function) for executing the process of step S3203 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature G2, it is possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation.

  Feature G3. Means (first to seventh, eighth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, first, etc.) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculating means; In the eighteenth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S1619. In the twelfth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S2205. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature G3, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit is erased, so that it is difficult to generate an event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage unit. It becomes possible to make it.

  Feature G4. Even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation unit, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage unit is maintained. Or the gaming machine described in G2.

  According to the feature G4, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage unit, so that the mode information is read and a game in a predetermined period When analyzing the result, it is possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

  Feature G5. The information calculating means calculates the mode information when supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or supply of operating power to the control means is started. A gaming machine according to any one of G4 to G4.

  According to the characteristic G5, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is stopped or the supply of the operating power to the control unit is started, the mode information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature G6. Any of the characteristics G1 to G5, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation opportunity that can repeatedly occur in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62) is generated. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature G6, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature G7. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period in a situation where the game is not executed, and resumes the period measurement from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the period measurement is stopped The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6.

  According to the feature G7, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in a situation where the game is not being executed, the measurement for a predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude a situation in which a game is not being executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive aspect information in a situation in which a game is being executed.

  Feature G8. Features G1 to G7, comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature G8, it is possible to easily grasp the entrance mode of the game ball by outputting the mode information to a device outside the game machine.

  Feature G9. The gaming machine according to Feature G8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the mode information is output to a device outside the gaming machine.

  According to the feature G9, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, so that when the mode information is read and the game ball entering mode is analyzed, It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature G10. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the external output means;
With
The external output means outputs the mode information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means. A gaming machine described in G9.

  According to the characteristic G10, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the external output unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. It is possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature G11. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs,
Result storage execution means (in the ninth embodiment, steps S2010, S2014 and S2018 in the management side CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment) which sequentially stores the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631). The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics G1 to G10, including a function of executing the process (a function of executing the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112 in the twelfth embodiment).

  According to the feature G11, it is possible to accumulate the mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of pieces of mode information collectively when managing the mode of game results in a predetermined period.

  Feature G12. The result storage executing means includes means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means when the aspect information is storage target information (function to execute the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to Feature G11, characterized by:

  According to the feature G12, when the mode information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage unit. Thereby, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for the calculation result storage means.

  Feature G13. The game according to Feature G11 or G12, wherein the result storage execution unit causes the calculation result storage unit to store information that can identify a time when the mode information is calculated, in association with the mode information. Machine.

  According to the feature G13, information that can specify the time when the mode information is calculated is attached to the mode information. Thereby, it becomes possible to analyze each aspect information, grasping | ascertaining the time when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature G14. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
With
The information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Any one of the characteristics G1 to G13, Game machines.

  According to the characteristic G14, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the information calculation unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. Information can be calculated by the second control means.

  Feature G15. Provided with notification control means (function to execute the processes of steps S3205, S3207 and S3208 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light emitting unit 651) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G14, wherein:

  According to the feature G15, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading out the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature G16. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to Feature G15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

  According to the characteristic G16, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control unit and the notification unit.

Feature G17. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
A gaming machine according to Feature G15 or G16.

  According to the feature G17, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the predetermined storage unit separately from the first control unit, the function for calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to consolidate functions for executing notification corresponding to the first control means.

  Feature G18. The notification control unit controls the notification unit so that the first notification is executed when the aspect information is information of the first range, and when the aspect information is information of the second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features G15 to G17, wherein the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

  According to the feature G18, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification unit from becoming excessive, and to reduce the load for controlling the notification unit.

Feature G19. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding thereto is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the sixteenth embodiment). Then, predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is executed by the main RAM 65). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management CPU 112, in the sixteenth embodiment In step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920 and step S2923 in the main CPU 63. And the ability to run the management),
Using the predetermined information, information calculating means (first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, first, and second) for calculating the mode information corresponding to the entering mode of the game balls in the game area in the predetermined period. In the fifteenth, sixteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing steps S1608, S1613 and S1617 in the management side CPU 112, and in the twelfth embodiment, steps S2008, S2013 and S2017 in the management side CPU 112 In the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2202 in the management CPU 112, the function of executing the process of step S2402 in the management CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, and the management in the thirteenth embodiment. Step S2605 in the side CPU 112 is executed. Functions, a seventeenth function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main side CPU63 in Embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G19, when a game ball enters the predetermined entry means, the storage process of information corresponding thereto is executed for the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering or the frequency of entering the predetermined ball entry means in the game machine. By using this managed information, it is possible to store and hold information. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  In addition, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the mode information corresponding to the entrance mode of the game ball is calculated in the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information that is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

  Feature G20. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G19, wherein the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature G20, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G20, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Feature H1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and the main side in the sixteenth embodiment. The predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and numerical information measured by the counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is executed by the RAM 65). Predetermined storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, and in the sixteenth embodiment, the main CPU 63 Of step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920 and step S2923. And the ability to run the management),
Information calculation means (first to seventh, eighth, twelfth) for calculating mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the predetermined information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs. In the fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the management CPU 112 performs the processing of steps S1608, S1613, and S1617. In the twelfth embodiment, the management CPU 112 performs steps S2008 and S2013. And the function of executing the process of step S2017, the function of executing the process of step S2202 in the management CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2402 in the management CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, and the thirteenth. In this embodiment, step S in the management CPU 112 is performed. Function of executing the processing of 605, a function) for executing the process of step S3203 in the main side CPU63 in the seventeenth embodiment,
Result storage execution means (in the ninth embodiment, steps S2010, S2014 and S2018 in the management side CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment) which sequentially stores the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631). A function for executing the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, when a game ball enters a predetermined entry means, information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. . As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering or the frequency of entering the predetermined ball entry means in the game machine. By using this managed information, it is possible to store and hold information. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is calculated in the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information that is the result of calculation using the predetermined information Become.

  In addition, it becomes possible to accumulate the mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of pieces of mode information collectively when managing the mode of game results in a predetermined period.

  Feature H2. The result storage executing means includes means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means when the aspect information is storage target information (function to execute the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to Feature H1, characterized by:

  According to the feature H2, when the mode information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage unit. Thereby, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for the calculation result storage means.

  Feature H3. The game according to the characteristic H1 or H2, wherein the result storage execution unit causes the calculation result storage unit to store information that enables specifying the time when the mode information is calculated, in association with the mode information. Machine.

  According to the feature H3, information that can specify the time when the aspect information is calculated is attached to the aspect information. Thereby, it becomes possible to analyze each aspect information, grasping | ascertaining the time when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature H4. The predetermined storage executing means is means for causing the predetermined storage means to include information that can specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to thirteenth embodiments). The function of executing the processing of step S1204 and step S1209 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing processing of step S2704 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourteenth embodiment, and the processing of step S2803 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifteenth embodiment. Function to be executed)
The information calculating means is means for calculating the mode information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation (first to seventh, eighth, tenth, In the fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1608, step S1613 and step S1617 in the management side CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, steps S2008, step S2013 and step in the management side CPU 112 A function for executing the process of S2017, a function for executing the process of step S2202 in the management-side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2402 in the management-side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, and a thirteenth embodiment In the embodiment, step S26 in the management CPU 112 is performed. Ability to run the fifth processing, the gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H3 In an embodiment of the 17, characterized in that a function) for executing the process of step S3203 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature H4, it is possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation.

  Feature H5. Means (first to seventh, eighth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, first, etc.) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculating means; In the eighteenth embodiment, the management side CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S1619. In the twelfth embodiment, the management side CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S2205. Features H1 to H4 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature H5, when the mode information is calculated, it is difficult to generate an event that the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit is erased and the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage unit. It becomes possible to make it.

  Feature H6. Even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation unit, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage unit is maintained. The gaming machine according to any one of H5 to H5.

  According to the feature H6, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage unit, so that the aspect information is read and a game in a predetermined period When analyzing the result, it is possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

  Feature H7. The information calculation means calculates the mode information when supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or supply of operating power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of H6 to H6.

  According to the feature H7, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is stopped or the supply of the operating power to the control unit is started, the mode information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature H8. Any of the features H1 to H7, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation opportunity that can repeatedly occur in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62) is generated. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature H8, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature H9. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period in a situation where the game is not executed, and resumes the period measurement from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the period measurement is stopped The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8.

  According to the feature H9, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in a situation where the game is not being executed, the measurement for a predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude a situation in which a game is not being executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive aspect information in a situation in which a game is being executed.

  Feature H10. Features H1 to H9, comprising external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature H10, it is possible to easily grasp the entrance mode of the game ball by outputting the mode information to a device outside the game machine.

  Feature H11. The gaming machine according to Feature H10, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the mode information is output to a device outside the gaming machine.

  According to the feature H11, when not only the aspect information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, when the aspect information is read and the entering state of the game ball is analyzed, It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature H12. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the external output means;
With
The external output means outputs the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means. The gaming machine according to H11.

  According to the feature H12, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control means. It is possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature H13. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
With
The information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Any one of the features H1 to H12, Game machines.

  According to the feature H13, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the information calculation unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. Information can be calculated by the second control means.

  Feature H14. Provided with notification control means (function to execute the processes of steps S3205, S3207 and S3208 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light emitting unit 651) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H13, wherein:

  According to the feature H14, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading out the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature H15. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to Feature H14, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

  According to the feature H15, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control unit and the notification unit.

Feature H16. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
With
The gaming machine according to Feature H14 or H15, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

  According to the feature H16, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the predetermined storage unit separately from the first control unit, the function for calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to consolidate functions for executing notification corresponding to the first control means.

  Feature H17. The notification control unit controls the notification unit so that the first notification is executed when the aspect information is information of the first range, and when the aspect information is information of the second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features H14 to H16, wherein the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

  According to the feature H17, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification unit from becoming excessive, and to reduce the load for controlling the notification unit.

Feature H18. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding thereto is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the sixteenth embodiment). Then, predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is executed by the main RAM 65). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management CPU 112, in the sixteenth embodiment In step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920 and step S2923 in the main CPU 63. And the ability to run the management),
Information calculating means (first to first) for calculating mode information corresponding to a game ball entering mode of the game area in a predetermined period using the predetermined information each time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs. In the seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1608, step S1613 and step S1617 in the management side CPU 112, the management side in the eleventh embodiment A function of executing the processes of steps S2008, S2013, and S2017 in the CPU 112, a function of executing the process of step S2202 in the management CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, and a process of step S2402 in the management CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment. The management CPU 11 in the thirteenth embodiment. And function executing the processing in step S2605, function in the seventeenth embodiment which executes a process at step S3203 in the main side CPU 63) in,
Result storage execution means (step S2010, step S2014 and step S2018 in the management CPU 112 in the twelfth embodiment) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631). A function for executing the process of step S2204 in the management CPU 112 in the thirteenth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H18, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information storage processing corresponding to the game ball is executed for the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering or the frequency of entering the predetermined ball entry means in the game machine. By using this managed information, it is possible to store and hold information. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  In addition, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the mode information corresponding to the entrance mode of the game ball is calculated in the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information that is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

  In addition, it becomes possible to accumulate the mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of pieces of mode information collectively when managing the mode of game results in a predetermined period.

  Feature H19. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H18, wherein the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature H19, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H19, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and the main side in the sixteenth embodiment. The predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, and numerical information measured by the counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is executed by the RAM 65). First storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the main side in the sixteenth embodiment) In step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920 and step S2923 in the CPU 63 And the ability to run the management),
When a specific event occurs as a result of the game, the information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the predetermined storage means, thereby specifying the specific information (history information, first information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments). In the 15th to 17th embodiments, the second storage execution means (in the first to 15th and 17th to 18th embodiments) that stores the numerical information measured by the counter in the predetermined storage means. A function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, a function of executing processing in steps S2902, S2905, S2908, S2912, S2916, S2920, and S2923 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment). ,
First external output means (management-side CPU 112) for outputting the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so as to make it possible to recognize that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event. Function to execute external output processing in),
Second external output means (management-side CPU 112) that outputs the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so as to make it possible to recognize that the specific information corresponds to the specific event. Function to execute external output processing in),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I1, it is possible to read information stored in the predetermined storage unit from the gaming machine and use the read information to specify the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event. In addition, when the external output is performed, the predetermined information is output externally so that it can be recognized that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event, and the specific information corresponds to the specific event The specific information is output to the outside so that it can be recognized. Thereby, even if the information processing is not performed in the second control means, it is possible to specify the occurrence mode of each event using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

  Feature I2. The gaming machine according to the feature I1, further comprising means for externally outputting corresponding information corresponding to the predetermined event (a function of executing the process of step S220 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature I2, when a predetermined event occurs, corresponding information corresponding to the predetermined event is externally output, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage unit. This makes it possible to accurately determine the number of occurrences and the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means while easily grasping the occurrence number and the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using the correspondence information. It becomes possible to grasp.

  Feature I3. The gaming machine according to claim I1 or I2, wherein the predetermined information is frequency information on the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is frequency information on the number of times the specific event has occurred.

  According to the characteristic I3, the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of times that the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is the counting information of the number of times that the specific event has occurred, thereby suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information and the specific information, It is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event.

Feature I4. Program output means (function to execute the processing of step S1503 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
The first external output means and the second external output means use the information output unit to output information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of I3.

  According to the characteristic I4, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. As a result, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  Feature I5. Selection means for specifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the information stored in the predetermined storage means or the control program, and outputting information corresponding to the specification result ( The gaming machine according to Feature I4, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S1502 in the main CPU 63.

  According to the characteristic I5, in the configuration in which the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside is used and the information stored in the predetermined storage unit is output to the outside, the information to be output from the control program and the predetermined Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, only necessary information can be read out even when the information output unit is also used.

  Feature I6. The selection means includes information stored in the predetermined storage means and information on the control program based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output section. The gaming machine according to Feature I5, characterized in that the game machine is identified.

  According to the characteristic I6, which information is to be output from the information output unit is specified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

  Feature I7. A chip (MPU 62) having program storage means (main ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output unit, the first external output means, and the second external output means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I4 to I6.

  According to the feature I7, signal paths for the information output unit can be integrated in the chip. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output unit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features I1 to I7, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Program output means (function for executing the processing of step S1503 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102);
Information output means for outputting special information using the information output unit (function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J1, the special information can be output to the outside by using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output special information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  Feature J2. Selection means (step S1502 in the main CPU 63) for specifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program and outputting information corresponding to the specification result. The game machine according to Feature J1, further comprising a function of executing the process (1).

  According to the feature J2, in the configuration in which the special information is output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be externally output is either the control program or the special information. Is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, only necessary information can be read out even when the information output unit is also used.

  Feature J3. The selection means determines whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. The gaming machine according to Feature J2, characterized in that it is specified.

  According to the feature J3, which information is to be output from the information output unit is specified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

  Feature J4. Any one of features J1 to J3, wherein a chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output unit and the information output means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature J4, signal paths for the information output unit can be integrated in the chip. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output unit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features J1 to J4, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A first control unit (main CPU 63) and a second control unit (management CPU 112);
The first control means includes
A privilege granting means (a function for executing the process of step S219 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the process of step S1008 in the payout side CPU 92) so that a privilege is granted to the player when a predetermined event occurs;
Information transmitting means (a function for executing management output processing in the main CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when it occurs;
With
When the second control means receives the predetermined event information, the second control means stores the information corresponding to the predetermined event information (in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the history memory 117, the sixteenth In the embodiment, the information is executed by the main RAM 65), so that the number of occurrences or the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine (first to 14th). The predetermined storage execution means (first to fifteenth) for storing the history information in the eighteenth embodiment and the numerical information measured by the counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments in the predetermined storage means. In the seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management CPU 112 is executed. In the sixteenth embodiment, the steps S2902 and S2905 in the main CPU 63 are executed. Flop S2908, step S2912, step S2916, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2920 and step S2923).

  According to the feature K1, when a predetermined event occurs, a privilege is given to the player. As a result, the player plays a game while expecting a predetermined event to occur. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of information corresponding to the predetermined event is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the number of occurrences or the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine. The predetermined information to be stored is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and appropriately manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  In addition, the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege granting means has the predetermined storage execution means so that the processing load of the first control means does not increase excessively. However, it is possible to achieve excellent effects as described above.

  Feature K2. The gaming machine according to Feature K1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

  According to the feature K2, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is prevented. It becomes possible to stop.

Feature K3. The predetermined storage execution unit executes the storage process of information corresponding to the occurrence of a specific event in the predetermined storage unit, so that the number of occurrences or the occurrence frequency of the specific event is determined outside the gaming machine or the gaming machine. Specific information that can be specified by the device (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. To be
The first control means includes
First transmission means for transmitting first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs (function to output any one of first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the specific event occurs (function to output one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
A gaming machine according to the feature K1 or K2.

  According to the feature K3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the predetermined storage unit. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the occurrence mode of the predetermined event but also the occurrence mode of the specific event. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the occurrence frequency between the predetermined event and the specific event.

  Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. It is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information by the second control means can be simplified.

  Feature K4. The first control means transmits, to the second control means using the third route, information for specifying that the second control means can specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present. (In the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the sixth embodiment, the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63. The gaming machine according to the feature K3, which includes a function of outputting any one of a medium signal, a high frequency support mode signal, and a door opening signal.

  According to the feature K4, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. In addition, since the information for identification that can identify whether or not the predetermined situation is present is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the information for identification is transmitted to the second information by the second control means. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as two information.

  Feature K5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means. The gaming machine according to the feature K3 or K4, further comprising a transmission means (function of executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature K5, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. It is not necessary to store the correspondence relationship of these information in advance in the second control means. Thereby, the versatility of a 2nd control means can be improved.

  Feature K6. The gaming machine according to claim K5, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

  According to the characteristic K6, when supply of operating power to the first control unit is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, so that a predetermined event and a specific event can occur. In the situation, it becomes possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means.

  Feature K7. The identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. The feature described in the feature K5 or K6 Gaming machine.

  According to the feature K7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control unit using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. Compared to the above, the communication configuration can be simplified.

  Feature K8. The second control means, when receiving the identification information, correspondence information that makes it possible to specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event As described in any one of the features K5 to K7, characterized in that it comprises means (a function for executing correspondence setting processing in the management side CPU 112) stored in correspondence relation storage means (correspondence relation memory 116). Gaming machine.

  According to the feature K8, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control unit and the type of event is stored in the second control unit. As a result, information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. There is no need to do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Feature K9. The first control means transmits third information enabling the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the sixth embodiment, the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63. A function to output any of a medium signal, a high frequency support mode signal, and a door open signal)
The second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of thru K8.

  According to the feature K9, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be specified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . As a result, the information form of the identification information can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Feature K10. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature K10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described in the configuration in which the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features K1 to K10, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature E group, the feature F group, the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature I group, and the feature J group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the front of the gaming machine is provided with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. It is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine is also known to have an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section as the tray storage section. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are released as game balls. The game balls that are guided by the apparatus and become surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-described examples, management of gaming machines needs to be performed suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. First control means (main CPU 63);
Second control means (management CPU 112) for receiving information transmitted from the first control means;
With
The first control means includes
First transmission means for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs (function to output one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the second event occurs (function to output one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Identification information transmission means (main side) for transmitting identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means A function of executing recognition processing in the CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature L1, when the first event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the second event occurs, the second signal path is used. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information by the second control means can be simplified.

  In addition, since the first information corresponds to the first event and the identification information indicating that the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, these information This need not be stored in advance in the second control means. Thereby, the versatility of a 2nd control means can be improved.

  Feature L2. The gaming machine according to claim L1, wherein the identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit when supply of operating power to the first control unit is started.

  According to the feature L2, the identification information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit when the supply of the operating power to the first control unit is started. In a situation where a game ball can enter the ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

  Feature L3. The identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. The feature according to L1 or L2, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature L3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. Compared to the above, the communication configuration can be simplified.

  Feature L4. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. Any one of the characteristics L1 to L3 is provided with means (function for executing the correspondence setting processing in the management CPU 112) for storing the relation information in the correspondence relation storage means (correspondence relation memory 116). The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature L4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. Thus, it is necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify an event corresponding to the information to be transmitted every time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. Disappears. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Feature L5. The first control means transmits third information enabling the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the tenth embodiment, the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63. A function to output any of a medium signal, a high frequency support mode signal, and a door open signal)
The second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present without receiving the identification information. Thru | or the game machine of any one of L4.

  According to the feature L5, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the first event and the occurrence mode of the second event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be specified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . As a result, the information form of the identification information can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Feature L6. As a signal path through which information can be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is greater than The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, wherein a signal path is provided.

  According to the feature L6, since there are more signal paths than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, Even when the number of types increases or decreases, it is possible to cope with the configuration without changing the configuration related to the signal path. Therefore, the versatility of the second control means can be improved.

  Feature L7. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature L7, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described in the configuration in which the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features L1 to L7, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature K group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the front of the gaming machine is provided with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. It is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine is also known to have an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section as the tray storage section. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are released as game balls. The game balls that are guided by the apparatus and become surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the configuration related to communication suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 24 ... Game board, 24a ... Out port, 24b ... Nail, 27 ... Game ball launching mechanism, 31 ... General winning port, 32 ... Special prize winning device, 33 ... First operating port, 34 ... Second operation Mouth, 34a ... general power, 35 ... first through gate, 39 ... second through gate, 61 ... main control board, 62 ... MPU, 63 ... main CPU, 65 ... main RAM, 92 ... dispensing CPU 102 ... Reading terminal, 112 ... Management CPU, 116 ... Correspondence memory, 171 ... Passage entrance, 172 ... Escape passage, 173 ... Passage exit, 174 ... Outlet roof, 180 ... Adjustment mechanism, 181c ... Left standing wall , 181d ... right standing wall, 181e ... discharge protrusion, 181g ... discharge right side, 181h ... left standing wall, 183 ... rotating body, 183b to 183e ... recess, 184 ... adjustment drive, 185 ... take-in DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 188-191 ... Blade | wing part, 188a-191a ... Peripheral surface, 188b-191b ... Front surface, 192 ... Collision avoidance groove, 220 ... Adjustment mechanism, 230 ... Rotating body, 241-244 ... Support surface, 241a-244a ... Level difference Surface, 252 ... Upper right standing wall, 254 ... Rotating shaft, 256 ... Discharge port, 261 ... Left standing wall, 262 ... Intake port, 263a ... Projection end for discharge, 291 ... Left guide nail, 292 ... Right guide nail, 330 ... Adjusting mechanism, 340 ... Rotating body, 343 ... Blade member, 344 ... Rotating shaft, 352 ... Standing wall, 371 ... Downstream guide nail, 430 ... Adjusting mechanism, 440 ... Rotating body, 472 ... Guide nail, 530 ... Adjustment Mechanism, 545 ... Guide passage, 546 ... Adjustment unit, 560 ... Electric nail, 560a ... Nail drive unit, 581 ... First operation port, 610 ... Game board, 620 ... Adjustment mechanism, 621 ... Discharge port, 631 ... Calculation connection Use memory, 651 ... notification light emitting section, PA ... game area, C4 ... Hiroshi electrostatic won game open counter, C5 ... open for the initial value counter, T1 ... win determination value table for the low frequency.

Claims (1)

An entry part where game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
Guiding means for guiding a game ball toward the ball-entrance unit;
With
The guiding means includes
Rotating means comprising a take-in means that is rotatable and capable of taking a game ball into the guiding means;
Rotation control means for conveying a game ball taken into the guiding means by rotating the rotating means;
A fall prevention means for preventing a game ball taken into the guiding means and being transported by the taking means from dropping downward, and being thrown out of the guiding means by rotation of the rotating means;
Release means for causing the game ball being conveyed in contact with the fall prevention means to be released from the guide means toward the ball entrance through the release opening of the fall prevention means ;
With
The entrance portion is provided at a position separated from the discharge means by a diameter equal to or larger than the game ball ,
The releasing means includes a direction changing means for changing a moving direction of the game ball that has reached the releasing position to a moving direction for releasing at the releasing position for releasing the game ball in the guiding means,
The direction changing means protrudes to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the game area in a manner that allows contact with the game ball guided by the rotation means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the rotating means includes contact avoiding means for avoiding contact with the projecting direction changing means .

Images